Contents

Honda Accord Sedan 2022 Owner'sManual PDF

1 of 657
1 of 657

Summary of Content for Honda Accord Sedan 2022 Owner'sManual PDF

2022 ACCORD

Owners Manual

Event Data Recorders This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicles systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: How various systems in your vehicle were operating; Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were

buckled/fastened; How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator

and/or brake pedal; and, How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.

Service Diagnostic Recorders This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential. Some diagnostic and maintenance information is uploaded to Honda upon vehicle start up.

California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/

As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded by a symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.

NOTICE

Software End User License Agreement Your vehicle comes equipped with software, which is governed by the End User License Agreement in Owners Manual, and which contains a binding arbitration clause. Please refer to the End User License Agreement for the terms and conditions governing your use of the installed software, as well as the applications, services, functions, and content provided through the software. Your use of the installed software will serve as your consent to the terms and conditions of the End User License Agreement.

You may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at American Honda Motor Co., Inc., Honda Automobile Customer Service, Mail Stop CHI-5, 1919 Torrance Blvd., Torrance, CA 90501-2746.

Privacy Notice This vehicle may share location and usage information. To manage this setting, visit www.hondalink.com/vehicle-data-choices.

To learn more about how we collect and use Personal Information, please read our Privacy Policy, accessible at www.honda.com.

A Few Words About Safety

Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.

To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have provided operating procedures and other information on labels and in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You must use your own good judgment.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms, including:

Safety Labels - on the vehicle. Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and

one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION. These signal words mean:

Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions. Safety Section - such as Safe Driving. Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information - please read it carefully.

3DANGER You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don't follow instructions.

3WARNING You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don't follow instructions.

3CAUTION You CAN be HURT if you don't follow instructions.

Contents

This owners manual should be considered a permanent part of the vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.

The Navigation Manual is available online at owners.honda.com (U.S.) or honda.ca (Canada). If you are the first registered owner of your vehicle, you may request a complimentary printed copy of the Navigation Manual within the first six months of vehicle purchase. To request a copy, visit owners.honda.com. In Canada, please request a copy from your Honda dealer.

This owners manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your particular model.

Images throughout this owners manual (including the front cover) represent features and equipment that are available on some, but not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these features.

This owners manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and Canada.

The information and specifications included in this publication were in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation.

2 Safe Driving P. 33 For Safe Driving P. 34 Seat Belts P. 38 Airbags P. 46

2 Instrument Panel P. 81 Indicators P. 82 Gauges and Displays P. 139

2 Controls P. 165 Clock P. 166 Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 167 Moonroof* P. 190 Seats P. 212

2 Features P. 245 Audio System P. 246 Audio System Basic Operation P. 253 Customized Features P. 351 HomeLink Universal Transceiver* P. 371

2 Driving P. 401 Before Driving P. 402 Towing a Trailer P. 407 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 529 Refueling P. 531

2 Maintenance P. 537 Before Performing Maintenance P. 538 Maintenance MinderTM P. 541 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 572 Climate Control System Maintenance P. 587

2 Handling the Unexpected P. 595 Tools P. 596 If a Tire Goes Flat P. 597 Overheating P. 611 Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 613 If You Cannot Open the Trunk P. 628

2 Information P. 631 Specifications P. 632 Identification Numbers P. 636 Emissions Testing P. 639 Warranty Coverages P. 641

Contents

Child Safety P. 64 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 78 Safety Labels P. 79

Opening and Closing the Trunk P. 181 Security System P. 184 Windows P. 187 Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 191 Mirrors P. 210 Interior Convenience Items P. 223 Climate Control System P. 240

Audio Error Messages P. 327 General Information on the Audio System P. 329 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink P. 374 Refuel Recommend P. 400

When Driving P. 412 Honda Sensing P. 453 Braking P. 508 Parking Your Vehicle P. 518 Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions P. 534 Turbo Engine Vehicle P. 535

Maintenance Under the Hood P. 548 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 564 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 575 Battery P. 584 Remote Transmitter Care P. 586 Cleaning P. 588 Accessories and Modifications P. 593

Engine Does Not Start P. 603 If the Battery Is Dead P. 606 Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 609 Fuses P. 620 Emergency Towing P. 626 If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door P. 627 Refueling P. 630

Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 637 Reporting Safety Defects P. 638 Authorized Manuals P. 644 Customer Service Information P. 645

Quick Reference Guide P. 6

Safe Driving P. 33

Instrument Panel P. 81

Controls P. 165

Features P. 245

Driving P. 401

Maintenance P. 537

Handling the Unexpected P. 595

Information P. 631

Index P. 646

6

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

Quick Reference Guide

Visual Index

(Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) System OFF) Button (P 442)

Safety Support Switch (P 452, 459, 467, 496)

Parking Sensor System Button* (P 521)

Heated Windshield Button (P 204)

Canadian models

Brightness Control (P 205)

Head-Up Display (HUD) Buttons* (P 159) System Indicators (P 82)Gauges (P 139)Driver Information Interface (P 140)ENGINE START/STOP Button (P 191)

Climate Control System (P 240)

Rear Window Defogger (P 204)

Heated Door Mirror Button* (P 204)Center Pocket (P 225)

Hazard Warning Button

TRIP Button (P 142)

Audio System (P 246)Navigation System* () See Navigation System Manual

Front Seat Heater Buttons* (P 237)

Front Seat Heaters and Seat Ventilation Buttons* (P 238)

Passenger Airbag Off Indicator (P 61)

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

Headlights/Turn Signals (P 194, 195)

Fog Lights* (P 197)

Paddle Shifter (Shift down)* (P 426, 432) Left Selector Wheel (P 140)

(home) Button (P 140)

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow Buttons (P 471)

Wipers/Washers (P 202)

Paddle Shifter (Shift up)* (P 426, 432)

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Button (P 488)

Interval Button (P 480, 484)

Steering Wheel Adjustments (P 209)

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink System Voice Control Buttons (P 374)

Audio Remote Controls (P 250)

Horn (Press an area around .)

(HUD) Button* (P161 )

Heated Steering Wheel* (P 236)

Canadian models

* Not available on all models

7

Visual Index

8

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

Power Window Switches (P 187)Master Door Lock Switch (P 179)Door Mirror Controls (P 211)Memory Buttons* (P 208)SET Button* (P 208)

Trunk Opener (P 181)

Interior Fuse Boxes (P 622, 624)

Hood Release Handle (P 550)

Drivers Front Airbag (P 49)

Rearview Mirror (P 210)HomeLink Buttons* (P 372)

Accessory Power Socket (P 231)

Passengers Front Airbag (P 49)

Wireless Charger* (P 232)

USB Ports (P 247)

Trunk Main Switch* (P 183)

Glove Box (P 225)

ECON Button (P 434)

Automatic Brake Hold Button (P 513)

Electric Parking Brake Switch (P 508)

Auto Idle Stop OFF Button* (P 436)

SPORT Button* (P 433)

Shift Buttons*

Automatic Transmission* (P 420)

Shift Lever*

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)* (P 427, 429)

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

Side Curtain Airbags (P 59)

Ceiling Light (P 223)

Grab Handle Coat Hook (P 229)Seat Belts (P 38)

Map Lights (P 224)

Moonroof Switch* (P 190)

Sunglasses Holder (P 230)

Sun Visors

Vanity Mirrors

Knee Airbags (P 54)

Front Seat (P 212)

Accessory Power Socket (P 231)Side Airbags (P 57)

Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat) (P 72)

Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P 74)

LATCH to Secure a Child Seat (P 69)

Rear Seats (P 216)

USB Ports* (P 247)

* Not available on all models

9

Visual Index

10

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

Maintenance Under the Hood (P 548)

Windshield Wipers (P 202, 572)

Door Lock/Unlock Control (P 170)

Power Door Mirrors (P 211)

Headlights (P 564)

High-Mount Brake Light (P 571)

Emergency Trunk Opener (P 183)

Opening/Closing the Trunk (P 181)

Parking/Daytime Running Lights (P 198, 566)

Front Turn Signal Lights/Front Side Marker Lights (P 194, 566)

Fog Lights* (P 197, 566)

Trunk Release Button* (P 182)

Brake Lights (P 567)Rear Turn Signal Lights (P 567)

Back-Up Lights (P 569)

How to Refuel (P 532)

Tires (P 575, 597)

Brake Lights* (P 569)

Taillights (P 569)

Multi-View Rear Camera (P 529)

Rear License Plate Light (P 571)

Taillights (P 567) Rear Side Marker Lights (P 567)

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

Auto Idle Stop Function*

To improve fuel economy, the engine stops and then restarts as detailed below. When Auto Idle Stop is on, the Auto Idle Stop indicator (green) comes on. (P435)

At Continuously variable transmission Engine status

Deceleration

Stop

Start-up

Stop the vehicle and depress the brake pedal.

Automatic Brake Hold Off Automatic Brake Hold On

On

Keep the brake pedal depressed. With the automatic brake hold system activated, you can release the brake pedal when the indicator comes on.

CanadaU.S.

Off

Release the brake pedal. With the automatic brake hold system activated, depress the accelerator pedal.

Restarting

* Not available on all models

11

12

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

Eco Assist System (P 434)

Ambient Meter With SPORT mode* off, the color of the ambient meter changes to green to indicate that the vehicle is being driven in a fuel efficient manner.

ECON Button (P 434) Helps maximize fuel economy.

ECON Mode Indicator (P 100) Comes on when the ECON button is pressed.

Ambient Meter

*2

*1

*1: Models without SPORT mode *2: Models with SPORT mode

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

Safe Driving (P 33)

Airbags (P 46)

Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.

Child Safety (P 64)

All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat. Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat. Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.

Exhaust Gas Hazard (P 78)

Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon monoxide gas can accumulate.

Before Driving Checklist (P 37)

Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints, steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.

Seat Belts (P 38)

Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well back in the seat.

Check that your passengers are wearing their seat belts correctly.

Fasten your lap belt as low as possible.

* Not available on all models

13

14

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

Instrument Panel (P 81)

Indicators (P 82)/Gauges (P 139)/Driver Information Interface (P 140)/ Head-Up Display* (P 159)

Speedometer (P139)

Fuel Gauge (P139)

Driver Information Interface (P140)

Temperature Gauge (P139)

Tachometer (P151)

Head-Up Display* (P159)

Shift Position Indicator (P88)/ Transmission System Indicator (P89, 91)

Turbo Meter* (P152)

M (sequential mode*/7-speed manual shift mode*) Indicator*/ Gear Selection Indicator* (P88)

Controls (P 165)

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

Clock (P166)

To adjust time

To adjust date

a Press , then select Settings.

b Select System, then Day & Time.

c Select Set Date & Time.

d Select Automatic Date & Time, then select OFF.

e Select Set Date or Set Time.

f Adjust the dates, hours, and minutes by selecting / .

g Select Save to set the date or time.

The navigation system receives signals from GPS satellites, updating the clock automatically.

3 4

Models with navigation system

ENGINE START/STOP Button (P191)

Press the button to change the vehicles power mode.

* Not available on all models

15

16

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

Turn Signals (P 194)

Lights (P 195)

Turn Signal Control Lever

Right

Left

Light Control Switches

Low Beam

High Beam

Flashing

Wipers and Washers (P 202)

*1:Models with automatic intermittent wipers

*2:Models with manual intermittent wipers

Wiper/Washer Control Lever

Adjustment Ring (-: Low Sensitivity*1

(- : Lower speed, fewer sweeps*2

(+: High Sensitivity*1

(+ : Higher speed, more sweeps*2

MIST OFF AUTO*1: Wiper speed varies automatically INT*2: Low speed with intermittent LO: Low speed wipe HI: High speed wipe

Pull toward you to spray washer fluid.

AUTO should always be turned OFF before the following situations in order to prevent severe damage to the wiper system: Cleaning the windshield Driving through a car wash No rain present

Steering Wheel (P 209)

To adjust, push the adjustment lever down, adjust to the desired position, then lock the lever back in place.

Models with automatic intermittent wipers

To lock

To adjust

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

Unlocking the Front Doors from the Inside (P 178) Pull either front door inner handle to

unlock and open it at the same time.

Trunk (P 181)

Press and hold the trunk opener on the drivers door to unlock and open the trunk.

Press the trunk release button on the keyless remote to unlock and open the trunk.

Press the trunk release button* on the trunk lid to unlock and open the trunk.

Trunk Opener

Power Door Mirrors (P 211)

With the power mode in ON, move the selector switch to L or R.

Push the appropriate edge of the adjustment switch to adjust the mirror.

Selector Switch

Adjustment Switch

Power Windows (P 187)

With the power mode in ON, open and close the power windows.

If the power window lock button is in the off position, each passengers window can be opened and closed with its own switch.

If the power window lock button is in the on position (indicator on), each passengers window switch is disabled.

Power Window Lock Button

Window Switches

Indicator

* Not available on all models

17

18

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

Climate Control System (P 240)

Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system. Press the button to turn the system on or off. Press the button to defrost the windshield.

Drivers Side Temperature Control Dial

(Windshield Defroster) Button

SYNC (Synchronization) Button

AUTO Button

(ON/OFF) Button

(Recirculation) Button

MODE Control Button

Fan Control Dial

A/C (Air Conditioning) Button

Passengers Side Temperature Control Dial

Floor ventsDashboard vents and back of the center console*

Dashboard and floor vents, and back of the center console*

Floor and defroster vents

Features (P 245)

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

Audio Remote Controls (P 250)

VOL (+/VOL (- (Volume) Buttons Press to adjust the volume up/down.

Left Selector Wheel When selecting the audio mode Press the (home) button, then roll up or down to select Audio on the driver information interface, and then press the left selector wheel.

/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons

Left Selector Wheel

VOL (+/VOL (- (Volume) Buttons

(home) Button

FM

AM

SiriusXM*

USB1(USB)

USB2*

Bluetooth Audio

Smartphone Connection (Apple CarPlay/Android Auto)

Roll up or down: To cycle through the audio modes, roll up or down and then press the left selector wheel:

/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons Radio:Press / to change the

preset station. iPod, USB device, Bluetooth Audio or Smartphone Connection:

Press / to skip to the beginning of the next song or return to the beginning of the current song.

USB device:

Press and hold / to change a folder.

* Not available on all models

19

20

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

Audio System (P 253)

(Home) Button

(Audio) Button

(Back) Button

Audio/Information Screen

For navigation system operation () See the Navigation System Manual

(Phone) Button

(Day/Night) Button

(Seek/Skip) Button (Seek/Skip) Button

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Selector Knob

SOURCE Button

(Clock) Button*/ (Map) Button*

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

Driving (P 401)

Shift Position Indicator

Shift Button Indicator

Automatic Transmission* (P 419, 420)

Select (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine. Shifting

Shift Position Indicator The shift position indicator and the shift button indicator indicate the current shift position.

* Not available on all models

21

22

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

Park Press the (P button. Used when parking or starting the engine. Transmission is locked.

Reverse Pull back the (R button. Used when reversing.

Neutral Press the (N button. Transmission is not locked.

Drive Press the (D button. Normal driving (gears change between 1st and 10th automatically) Temporarily driving in the sequential mode Driving in the sequential mode (when driving in SPORT mode)

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

M (sequential mode) Indicator

Shift Position Indicator

Shift Down (- Paddle Shifter

Shift Up (+ Paddle Shifter

Sequential Mode (P425) Paddle shifters allow you to shift gears much like a manual transmission (1st through 10th). This is useful for engine braking.

When the transmission is in (D The transmission will shift back

to automatic mode once the system detects that the vehicle is cruising.

When the transmission is in (D with SPORT mode Holds the selected gear, and

the M (sequential mode) indicator comes on.

The gear selection is shown in the instrument panel.

Gear Selection Indicator

23

24

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

M Indicator

Shift Position Indicator

Continuously Variable Transmission* (P 419, 427, 429)

Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine.

Shifting

Park Used when parking or starting the engine.

Neutral Transmission is not locked.

Drive (S)*

Used: For better

acceleration To increase engine braking When going up or down hills

Models without paddle shifters

Models with paddle shifters

Depress the brake pedal and press the shift lever release button to shift.

Press the shift lever release button and shift.

Shift without pressing the shift lever release button.

Reverse Used when reversing.

Drive Used: For normal driving

When temporarily driving in the 7-speed manual shift mode When driving in the 7-speed manual shift mode (when driving in SPORT mode)

Models with paddle shifters Low*

Used: To further increase

engine braking When going up or down hills

Shift Down (- Paddle Shifter

Shift Up (+ Paddle Shifter

7-Speed Manual Shift Mode* (P431) Allows you to manually shift

the transmission up or down without removing your hands from the steering wheel.

When the transmission is in (D with SPORT mode Pulling a paddle shifter changes

the mode from continuously variable transmission to 7-speed manual shift mode.

The M indicator and the selected speed number are displayed in the gear selection indicator.

When the transmission is in (D Pulling a paddle shifter

temporarily changes the mode from continuously variable transmission to 7-speed manual shift mode. The selected speed number is displayed in the gear selection indicator.

Shift Lever

Release Button

Gear Selection Indicator

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

VSA On and Off (P 442)

The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) system helps stabilize the vehicle during cornering and helps maintain traction while accelerating on loose or slippery road surfaces.

VSA comes on automatically every time you start the engine.

To partially disable or fully restore VSA function, press and hold the button until you hear a beep.

CMBSTM On and Off (P 459)

When a possible frontal collision is likely unavoidable, the CMBSTM can help you to reduce the vehicle speed and the severity of the collision.

The CMBSTM is turned on every time you start the engine.

To turn the CMBSTM on or off, use the safety support switch.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (P 444)

Detects a change in tire conditions and overall dimensions due to decrease in tire pressures.

The TPMS is turned on automatically every time you start the engine.

A calibration procedure must be performed when certain conditions arise.

Refueling (P 531)

Fuel recommendation: Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher

Fuel tank capacity: 14.8 US gal (56 L)

a Unlock the drivers door.

b Press the area indicated by the arrow to release the fuel fill door. You will hear a click.

c After filling, wait about five seconds before removing the filler nozzle.

Wait for five seconds

* Not available on all models

25

26

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

Honda Sensing(P 453)

Honda Sensing is a driver support system which employs the use of three distinctly different kinds of sensors, a radar sensor located at the lower part of the front bumper, a front sensor camera mounted to the interior side of the windshield, behind the rearview mirror, and the sonar sensors located in the front and rear bumpers.

Honda Sensing is a driver support system which employs the use of two distinctly different kinds of sensors, a radar sensor located at the lower part of the front bumper and a front sensor camera mounted to the interior side of the windshield, behind the rearview mirror.

Models with Low Speed Braking Control

Models without Low Speed Braking Control

Front Sensor Camera

The camera is located behind the rearview mirror.

Radar Sensor

The radar sensor is at the lower part of the front bumper.

All models

Sonar Sensors

Models with Low Speed Braking Control

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) (P 456)

The system can assist you when it determines there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a pedestrian detected in front of your vehicle. The CMBSTM is designed to alert you when the potential for a collision is determined, as well as to reduce your vehicle speed to help minimize collision severity when a collision is deemed unavoidable.

Low Speed Braking Control* (P 465)

Using sonar sensors located on the front and rear bumpers, the vehicle detects if there is danger of a potential collision with a wall or other obstacle. The system is designed to alert you when a potential collision is determined, as well as assist in reducing speed, avoiding collisions, and reducing collision severity.

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (P470)

Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following-interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of yours and, if the detected vehicle comes to a stop, can decelerate and stop your vehicle, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the accelerator.

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) (P 486)

Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System (P 494)

Alerts and helps to assist you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle unintentionally crossing over detected lane markings and/or leaving the roadway altogether.

Traffic Sign Recognition System (P498)

Reminds you of road sign information, such as the current speed limit, your vehicle has just passed through, showing it on the driver information interface and the head- up display*.

* Not available on all models

27

28

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

Maintenance (P 537)

Under the Hood (P 548)

Check engine oil, engine coolant, and windshield washer fluid. Add when necessary.

Check brake fluid. Check the battery condition monthly.

a Pull the hood release handle under the corner of the dashboard.

b Locate the hood latch lever, push it to the side, and then raise the hood. Once you have raised the hood slightly, you can release the lever.

c When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly locked in place.

Lights (P 564)

Inspect all lights regularly.

Wiper Blades (P 572)

Replace blades if they leave streaks across the windshield or become noisy.

Tires (P 575)

Inspect tires and wheels regularly. Check tire pressures regularly. Install snow tires for winter

driving.

Handling the Unexpected (P 595)

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

Flat Tire (P 597)

Park in a safe location and replace the flat tire with the compact spare tire in the trunk.

Indicators Come On (P 613)

Identify the indicator and consult the owners manual.

Engine Wont Start (P 603)

If the battery is dead, jump start using a booster battery.

Blown Fuse (P 620)

Check for a blown fuse if an electrical device does not operate.

Overheating (P 611)

Park in a safe location. If you do not see steam under the hood, open the hood, and let the engine cool down.

Emergency Towing (P 626)

Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.

29

30

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

What to Do If

The power mode does not change from VEHICLE OFF to ACCESSORY. Why?

The steering wheel may be locked. Move the steering wheel left and right after

pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button.

The power mode does not change from ACCESSORY to VEHICLE OFF. Why?

The shift lever should be moved to (P.

Why does the brake pedal pulsate slightly when applying the brakes?

This can occur when the ABS activates and does not indicate a problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never pump the brake pedal.

2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) (P516)

Continuously variable transmission models for Canadian models

Continuously variable transmission models

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle. Why?

Check if the childproof lock is in the lock position. If so, open the rear door with the outside door handle. To cancel this function, slide the lever up to the unlock position.

Why do the doors lock after I unlocked the doors?

If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are relocked automatically for security.

Why does the beeper sound when I open the drivers door?

The beeper sounds when: The power mode is in ACCESSORY. The exterior lights are left on.

The Auto Idle Stop is in operation.

Why does a beeper sound when I walk away from the vehicle after I close the door?

The beeper sounds if you move outside the walk away auto lock operating range before the door completely closes.

2 Locking the doors (Walk away auto lock) (P172)

Why does the beeper sound when I start driving?

The beeper sounds when the driver and/or front passenger are not wearing their seat belts.

1.5 L engine models

31

32

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

Pressing the electric parking brake switch does not release the parking brake. Why?

Press the electric parking brake switch with the brake pedal depressed.

Im seeing an amber indicator of a tire with an exclamation point. What is that?

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) needs attention. If you recently inflated or changed a tire, you have to recalibrate the system.

2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (P444)

Depressing the accelerator pedal does not release the parking brake automatically. Why?

Fasten the drivers seat belt. Check if the transmission is in (P or (N. If so, select any other

position.

Why does the shift position automatically change to (P when I open the drivers door to check for parking space lines when reversing?

Fasten the drivers seat belt. Close the drivers door and manually change the shift

position. 2 When opening the drivers door (P422)

Why do I hear a screeching sound when I apply the brake pedal?

The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

Automatic transmission models

Safe Driving

You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.

For Safe Driving Important Safety Precautions.............. 34 Your Vehicles Safety Features............ 36 Safety Checklist ................................. 37

Seat Belts About Your Seat Belts ........................ 38 Fastening a Seat Belt .......................... 42 Seat Belt Inspection............................ 45

Airbags Airbag System Components ............... 46 Types of Airbags ................................ 49 Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 49

Knee Airbags ..................................... 54 Side Airbags....................................... 57 Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 59 Airbag System Indicators.................... 60 Airbag Care ....................................... 63

Child Safety Protecting Child Passengers ............... 64 Safety of Infants and Small Children...... 66 Safety of Larger Children ................... 76

Exhaust Gas Hazard Carbon Monoxide Gas ....................... 78

Safety Labels Label Locations .................................. 79

33

34

Safe D rivin

g

For Safe Driving

1Important Safety Precautions

Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the driver while driving.

The following pages explain your vehicles safety features and how to use them properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the most important.

Important Safety Precautions Always wear your seat belt A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and wear them properly.

Restrain all children Children ages 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the belt properly without a booster seat.

Be aware of airbag hazards While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children, and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and warnings in this manual.

Dont drink and drive Alcohol and driving dont mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink. So dont drink and drive, and dont let your friends drink and drive, either.

uuFor Safe Drivingu Important Safety Precautions Safe D

rivin g

Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash. Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to divert some attention away from driving.

Control your speed Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds. Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum speed posted.

Keep your vehicle in safe condition Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous. To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle Children, pets, and people needing assistance left unattended in the vehicle may be injured if they activate one or more of the vehicle controls. They may also cause the vehicle to move, resulting in a crash in which they and/or another person(s) can be injured or killed. Also, depending on the ambient temperature, the temperature of the interior may reach extreme levels, which can result in harm or death. Even if the climate control system is on, never leave them in the vehicle unattended as the climate control system can shut off at any time.

35

36

uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicles Safety Features

Safe D rivin

g

1Your Vehicles Safety Features

Your vehicle is equipped with many features that work together to help protect you and your passengers during a crash.

Some features do not require any action on your part. These include a strong steel framework that forms a safety cage around the passenger compartment, front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat belts in a sufficient crash.

However, you and your passengers cannot take full advantage of these features unless you remain seated in the correct position and always wear your seat belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to injuries if they are not used properly.

Your Vehicles Safety Features

The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and your passengers.

Crush Zones

6

7

9

10

11

12

Safety Cage

Seats and Seat-Backs Head Restraints Collapsible Steering Column Seat Belts Front Airbags

Side Curtain Airbags Door Locks

Side Airbags

Seat Belt Tensioners

7

7 9

9

8

10 10

11

6

11

12

8 Knee Airbags

8

13 Outer Lap Pretensioners

13

uuFor Safe DrivinguSafety Checklist Safe D

rivin g

1Safety Checklist

If the door and/or trunk open message appears on the driver information interface, a door and/or the trunk is not completely closed. Close all doors and the trunk tightly until the message disappears.

2 Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages P. 109

Safety Checklist For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items each time before you drive. After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors are closed and locked.

Locking the doors helps prevent an occupant from being ejected and an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door.

2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 177

Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a crash.

2 Seats P. 212

Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.

2 Adjusting the Front and Rear Outer* Head Restraint Positions P. 219

Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any passengers are properly belted as well.

2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 42

Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a childs age, height, and weight.

2 Child Safety P. 64

37* Not available on all models

38

Safe D rivin

g

Seat Belts

1About Your Seat Belts

If a front or rear seat passenger moves around and extends the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely. Then, refasten the belt.

If you extend the seat belt too quickly, it will lock in place. If this happens, slightly retract the seat belt, then extend it slowly.

Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your risk of serious injury.

3WARNING Not wearing a seat belt properly increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash, even though your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts and wear them properly.

About Your Seat Belts Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the vehicle, against any passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.

In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including: - frontal impacts - side impacts - rear impacts - rollovers

Lap/shoulder seat belts All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency locking retractors. In normal driving, the retractor lets you move freely while keeping some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop, the retractor locks to restrain your body.

The front passengers and rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with child seats.

2 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 72

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts Safe D

rivin g

1About Your Seat Belts

Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories require you to wear seat belts.

1Seat Belt Reminder

The indicator will also come on if a front passenger does not fasten their seat belt within six seconds after the power mode is set to ON.

When no one is sitting in the front passengers seat, the indicator will not come on and the beeper will not sound. The indicator also may not come on and the beeper may not sound when the occupant is not heavy enough to trigger the weight sensor. Such occupants (e.g., infants and smaller children) should be moved to the rear seat as a deploying front airbag likely will injure or kill them.

2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 64

Proper use of seat belts Follow these guidelines for proper use: All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position

for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduce the effectiveness of the belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.

Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash.

Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

Front seats The seat belt system includes an indicator on the instrument panel to remind the driver or a front passenger or both to fasten their seat belts. If you set the power mode to ON and a seat belt is not fastened, a beeper will sound and the indicator will blink. After a few seconds, the beeper will stop and the indicator will come on and remain illuminated until the seat belt is fastened.

The beeper will periodically sound and the indicator will blink while the vehicle is moving until the seat belt is fastened.

Seat Belt Reminder

Continued 39

40

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

Safe D rivin

g

Rear seats Your vehicle monitors rear seat belt use. A driver information interface notifies you if any of the rear seat belts are not used.

The display appears when: Any of the rear passengers seat belts are

unfastened when the power mode is turned to ON.

A rear door is opened and then closed. Any of the rear passengers fastens or

unfastens their seat belt. The seat belt reminder indicator blinks and beeper sounds if any rear passengers seat belt is unfastened while driving.

To see the display: 2 Switching the Display P. 140

: Latched

: Unlatched

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts Safe D

rivin g

1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

The seat belt tensioners can only operate once. If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not offer protection in a subsequent crash.

During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the tensioner on that side of the vehicle also activates.

The front seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety.

The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts during a moderate-to- severe frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to inflate the front airbags or the knee airbags.

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

41

42

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

Safe D rivin

g

1Fastening a Seat Belt

No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat belt or one that does not appear to be working correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working properly may not protect the occupant in a crash. Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.

If the seat belt appears to be locked in a fully retracted position, firmly pull out on the shoulder belt once, then push it back in. Then, smoothly pull it out of the retractor and fasten. If you are unable to release the seat belt from a fully retracted position, do not allow anyone to sit in the seat, and take your vehicle to a dealer for repair.

2 About Your Seat Belts P. 38 2 Seat Belt Inspection P. 45

Fastening a Seat Belt After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well back in the seat:

2 Seats P. 212

1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.

2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is secure. u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or

caught on anything.

Pull out slowly.

Correct Seated Posture.

Latch Plate

Buckle

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt Safe D

rivin g

1Fastening a Seat Belt

To release the belt, push the red PRESS button and then guide the belt by hand until it has retracted completely. When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is properly stowed so that it will not get caught in the closing door.

Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or retractor mechanism.

3WARNING Improperly positioning the seat belts can cause serious injury or death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts are properly positioned before driving.

1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor

After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder anchor position is secure.

The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height one level at a time.

3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as possible across your hips, then pull up on the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic bones take the force of a crash and reduces the chance of internal injuries.

4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to remove any slack, then check that the belt rests across the center of your chest and over your shoulder. This spreads the forces of a crash over the strongest bones in your upper body.

The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter occupants.

1. Move the anchor up and down while holding the release button.

2. Position the anchor so that the belt rests across the center of your chest and over your shoulder.

Lap belt as low as possible

Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor

Push

Continued 43

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

44

Safe D rivin

g

1Advice for Pregnant Women

Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is okay for you to drive.

To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front airbag: When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far

back as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle.

When sitting in the front passengers seat, adjust the seat as far back as possible.

If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips.

Advice for Pregnant Women

Wear the shoulder belt across the chest avoiding the abdomen.

Wear the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips.

uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection Safe D

rivin g

1Seat Belt Inspection

3WARNING Not checking or maintaining seat belts can result in serious injury or death if the seat belts do not work properly when needed.

Check your seat belts regularly and have any problem corrected as soon as possible.

Seat Belt Inspection Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:

Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check that the latch plates and buckles work smoothly and the belts retract

easily. u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only

use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.

Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper protection and should be replaced as soon as possible. A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after any collision.

45

46

Safe D rivin

g

Airbags

6

9

Airbag System Components

7

8

9

10

9

9

6

9 911

12

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components Safe D

rivin g

The front, front knee, side, and side curtain airbags are deployed according to the direction and severity of impact. Both side curtain airbags are deployed in a rollover. The airbag system includes:

aTwo SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) front airbags. The drivers airbag is stored in the center of the steering wheel; the front passengers airbag is stored in the dashboard. Both are marked SRS AIRBAG.

bTwo knee airbags. The drivers knee airbag is stored under the steering column; the front passengers knee airbag is stored under the glove box. Both are marked SRS AIRBAG.

cTwo side airbags, one for the driver and one for the front passenger. The airbags are stored in the outer edges of the seat- backs. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.

dTwo side curtain airbags, one for each side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored in the ceiling, above the side windows. The front and rear pillars are marked SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.

eAn electronic control unit that, when the power mode is in ON, continually monitors information about the various impact sensors, seat and buckle sensors, rollover sensor, airbag activators, seat belt tensioners, and other vehicle information. During a crash event the unit can record such information.

fAutomatic front seat belt tensioners. In addition, the drivers and front passengers seat belt buckles incorporate sensors that detect whether or not the belts are fastened.

gDrivers seat position sensor. This sensor detects the drivers seat slide position to help determine the optimal deployment of the drivers airbag.

hWeight sensors in the front passengers seat. The sensors are used for occupant classification to activate or deactivate the front passengers airbag.

i Impact sensors that can detect a moderate-to-severe front or side impact.

jAn indicator on the dashboard that alerts you that the front passengers front airbag has been turned off.

kAn indicator on the instrument panel that alerts you to a possible problem with your airbag system or seat belt tensioners.

lA rollover sensor that can detect if your vehicle is about to roll over and signal the control unit to deploy both side curtain airbags.

47Continued

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components

48

Safe D rivin

g

1Important Facts About Your Airbags

Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together, airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.

When driving, keep hands and arms out of the deployment path of the front airbag by holding each side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over the airbag cover.

Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises, and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing their seat belts properly and sitting correctly.

What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly and sit upright and as far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as possible.

Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags deploy.

Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag. Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.

Do not attach or place objects on the front and front knee airbag covers. Objects on the covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.

Important Facts About Your Airbags

uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags Safe D

rivin g

1Types of Airbags

The airbags can inflate whenever the power mode is in ON.

After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see a small amount of smoke. This is from the combustion process of the inflator material and is not harmful. People with respiratory problems may experience some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

1Front Airbags (SRS)

During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate at different rates, depending on the severity of the crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/ or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to supplement the seat belts to help reduce the likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal crashes.

Types of Airbags Your vehicle is equipped with four types of airbags: Front airbags: Airbags in front of the drivers and front passengers seats. Front knee airbags: Airbags under the steering column and under the glove

box. Side airbags: Airbags in the drivers and front passengers seat-backs. Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows. Each is discussed in the following pages.

Front Airbags (SRS) The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupants primary restraint system.

The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.

Housing Locations

49Continued

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

50

Safe D rivin

g

1How the Front Airbags Work

Although the drivers and front passengers airbags normally inflate within a split second of each other, it is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin, or threshold, that determines whether or not the airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.

Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions. When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.

A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.

While your seat belt restrains your torso, the front airbag provides supplemental protection for your head and chest.

The front airbags deflate immediately so that they wont interfere with the drivers visibility or the ability to steer or operate other controls.

The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.

Operation

How the Front Airbags Work

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS) Safe D

rivin g

When front airbags should not deploy Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash. Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration causes a driver or front passenger to move toward the front of the vehicle. Side airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which can cause the driver or passenger to move toward the side of the vehicle. Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed to deploy in such collisions. Rollovers: In a rollover, your best form of protection is a seat belt or, if your vehicle is equipped with a rollover sensor, both a seat belt and a side curtain airbag. Front airbags, however, are not designed to deploy in a rollover as they would provide little if any protection. When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy. Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent. When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage

appears severe Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they had deployed.

51Continued

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

52

Safe D rivin

g

1Advanced Airbags

If there is a problem with the drivers seat position sensor or the passengers seat weight sensors, the SRS indicator will come on, and in the event of a crash, the airbag will deploy (regardless of the drivers seating position or passengers occupant classification) with a force corresponding to the severity of the impact.

2 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator P. 60

The airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag related injuries to smaller occupants.

The drivers advanced airbag system includes a seat position sensor.

Based on information from this sensor and the severity of the impact, the advanced airbag system determines the optimal deployment of the drivers airbag.

Advanced Airbags

Drivers Seat Position Sensor

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS) Safe D

rivin g

1Advanced Airbags

For the advanced front airbags to work properly, confirm that: The occupant is sitting in an upright position,

wearing the seat belt properly and the seat-back is not excessively reclined.

The occupant is not leaning against the door or center console.

The occupants feet are placed on the floor in front of them.

There are no objects hanging from the front passengers seat.

Only small, lightweight objects are in the seat-back pocket.

The steering wheel and passengers side dashboard are not obstructed by any object.

No liquid has been spilled on or under the seat. There is no child seat or other object pressing

against the rear of the seat or seat-back. There is no rear passenger pushing or pulling on

the back of the front passengers seat. There are no objects placed under or beside the

front passengers seat. Improperly positioned objects can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.

The head restraint is not contacting the roof. 2 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 61

The floor mat behind the front passengers seat is set in the correct position evenly on the floor. An improperly placed mat can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.

2 Floor Mats P. 589

The front passengers advanced airbag system has weight sensors. The sensors are used for occupant classification to activate or deactivate the front passengers airbag.

For adult size occupants, the system will automatically activate the front passengers airbag. If a small adult sits in the front passenger seat and the system does not recognize him/her as an adult, see

2 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 61

We advise against allowing a child age 12 or under to ride in the front passengers seat. However, if you do allow a small child or infant to ride in the front passengers seat, the system is designed to automatically deactivate the front passengers airbag. Do not let a small child or infant ride in the front passengers seat if the airbag does not automatically deactivate.

Passengers Seat Weight Sensors

53

54

uuAirbagsuKnee Airbags

Safe D rivin

g

1Knee Airbags

Do not attach accessories on or near a knee airbag as they can interfere with the proper operation of the airbag, or even hurt someone if the airbag inflates.

The driver and front passenger should not store any items under the seat or behind their feet. The items can interfere with proper airbag deployment in the event of a moderate to severe frontal collision and may result in inadequate protection.

Knee Airbags The knee SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help keep the driver and/or front passenger in the proper position and to help maximize the benefit provided by the vehicles other safety features.

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupants primary restraint system.

The knee airbag for the driver and the one for the front passenger are housed under the steering column and the glove box respectively.

Both are marked SRS AIRBAG.

Housing Locations

Housing Location

Housing Location

uuAirbagsuKnee Airbags Safe D

rivin g

The drivers and front passengers knee airbag deploy at the same time as the drivers and front passengers airbag respectively.

Even if the collision is not severe enough to deploy the front airbags, the knee airbags may inflate alone.

Operation

When inflated

Knee Airbag

When inflated

Knee Airbag

55Continued

56

uuAirbagsuKnee Airbags

Safe D rivin

g

When the knee airbags deploy with little or no visible damage Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy. Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.

When the knee airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage appears severe

Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they had deployed.

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags Safe D

rivin g

1Side Airbags

Make sure you and your front seat passenger always sit upright. Leaning into the path of a side airbag can prevent the airbag from deploying properly and increases your risk of serious injury.

Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags. They can interfere with the proper operation of the airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.

Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers without consulting a dealer. Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your side airbags from properly deploying during a side impact.

Side Airbags The side airbags help protect the torso and pelvis of the driver or a front passenger during a moderate-to-severe side impact.

The side airbags are housed in the outside edge of the drivers and passengers seat- backs.

Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.

When the sensors detect a moderate-to- severe side impact, the control unit signals the side airbag on the impact side to immediately inflate.

Housing Locations

Housing Location

Operation

When inflated

Side Airbag

57Continued

58

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags

Safe D rivin

g

When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage Because the airbag system senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side of the vehicles framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough impact to deploy the airbag.

When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears severe

It is possible for a side airbag not to deploy during an impact that results in apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was toward the far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicles crushable body parts absorbed most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have been needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.

uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags Safe D

rivin g

1Side Curtain Airbags

To get the best protection from the side curtain airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts properly and sit upright and well back in their seats.

Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation of the side curtain airbags.

If the impact is on the passengers side, the passengers side curtain airbag deploys even if there are no occupants on that side of the vehicle.

If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side curtain airbags and activates both front seat belt tensioners.

Side Curtain Airbags The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in the outer seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain airbags equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of partial and complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes, particularly rollover crashes.

The side curtain airbags are located in the ceiling above the side windows on both sides of the vehicle.

The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side impact.

Housing Locations

Side Curtain Airbag Storage

Operation

Deployed Side Curtain Airbag

59Continued

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

60

Safe D rivin

g

1Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator

3WARNING Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in serious injury or death if the airbag systems or tensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts you to a possible problem.

When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision One or both side curtain airbags may also inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled frontal collision.

Airbag System Indicators If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on and a message appears on the driver information interface.

When the power mode is set to ON The indicator comes on for a few seconds, then goes off. This tells you the system is working properly.

If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you dont, your airbags and seat belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators Safe D

rivin g

1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

To ensure the passenger is detected properly, confirm that: The occupant is sitting in an upright position,

wearing the seat belt properly and the seat-back is not excessively reclined.

The occupant is not leaning against the door or center console.

The occupants feet are placed on the floor in front of them.

There are no objects hanging from the front passengers seat.

Only small, lightweight objects are in the seat-back pocket.

No liquid has been spilled on or under the seat. There is no child seat or other object pressing

against the rear of the seat or seat-back. There is no rear passenger pushing or pulling on

the back of the front passengers seat. There are no objects placed under or beside the

front passengers seat. Improperly positioned objects can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.

The floor mat behind the front passengers seat is set in the correct position evenly on the floor. An improperly placed mat can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.

The head restraint is not contacting the roof.

When the passenger airbag off indicator comes on

The indicator comes on to alert you that the passengers airbag has been turned off. This occurs if the seat is empty or when the weight sensors determine that a small child or infant is on the passenger seat.

Children age 12 or under should always ride properly restrained in a back seat. 2 Child Safety P. 64

If the indicator is on in the event of a crash, the passengers airbag will not deploy. The passengers knee airbag will not deploy, either.

Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

U.S. Canada

Continued 61

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

62

Safe D rivin

g

1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and go off periodically if the total weight on the seat is near the airbag cutoff threshold. For a small adult, depending on physique and posture, the system may not recognize him/her as an adult and thus deactivate the passengers airbag. If this occurs, please confirm that the conditions set forth in the above bullet points on the previous page are met. If the above conditions are met and the indicator is still on, then with the transmission in (P, set the power mode to OFF and back to ON.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible if: All of the above conditions are met, and the

indicator comes on with an adult seated in the front passenger seat.

The seat is empty and the indicator is off.

Do not allow an adult passenger to ride in the front seat when the indicator is on.

uuAirbagsuAirbag Care Safe D

rivin g

1Airbag Care

We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag system components, including the airbag, tensioners, sensors, and control unit.

Airbag Care You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle inspected by a dealer in the following situations:

When the airbags have deployed If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced. Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be replaced.

When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the drivers seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passengers seat, front seat belt tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.

Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer This would likely disable or affect the proper operation of the drivers seat position sensor or the weight sensors in the passengers seat. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a Honda dealer, or for U.S. vehicles, American Honda Automobile Customer Service at 1-800-999-1009 and for Canadian vehicles, Honda Canada Customer Relations at 1-888-9-HONDA-9.

63

64

Safe D rivin

g

Child Safety

1Protecting Child Passengers

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that all children ages 12 and under be properly restrained in a rear seat. Some states or provinces/territories have laws restricting where children may ride.

3WARNING Children who are unrestrained or improperly restrained can be seriously injured or killed in a crash.

Any child too small for a seat belt should be properly restrained in a child seat. A larger child should be properly restrained with a seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.

Protecting Child Passengers Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle crashes are the number one cause of death of children ages 12 and under.

To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride in a vehicle.

Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because: An inflating front or side airbag can injure

or kill a child sitting in the front seat.

A child in the front seat is more likely to interfere with the drivers ability to safely control the vehicle.

Statistics show that children of all sizes and ages are safer when they are properly restrained in a rear seat.

uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers Safe D

rivin g

1Protecting Child Passengers

To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.

To remind you of the passengers front airbag hazards and child safety, your vehicle has warning labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the front visors. Please read and follow the instructions on these labels.

2 Safety Labels P. 79

3WARNING Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or wrap one around their neck can result in serious injury or death.

Instruct children not to play with any seat belt and make sure any unused seat belt a child can reach is buckled, fully retracted, and locked.

Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the seat belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.

Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the event of a collision.

Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.

Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very seriously injured in a crash.

Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows, or seat adjustments.

Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.

65

66

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safe D rivin

g

1Protecting Infants

Experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat for a child so long as the childs height and weight are appropriate for a rear-facing seat.

Infants should never be seated in a forward-facing position.

Always refer to the child seat manufacturers instructions before installation.

Do not allow a front seat to rest against a child seat installed in a rear seating position. The weight sensor in the front seat may not correctly detect the actual weight of the occupant.

3WARNING Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death during a crash.

Always place a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat, not the front.

Safety of Infants and Small Children

An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat until the infant reaches the seat manufacturers weight or height limit for the seat.

Positioning a rear-facing child seat Child seats must be placed and secured in a rear seating position.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back in the desired position. Make sure that there is no contact between the child seat and the seat in front of it.

It can also interfere with proper operation of the passengers advanced front airbag system.

2 Airbags P. 46

If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front passengers seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.

Protecting Infants

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Safe D

rivin g

1Protecting Smaller Children

Educate yourself about the laws and regulations regarding child seat use where you are driving, and follow the child seat manufacturers instructions.

3WARNING Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death if the front airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible, and properly restrain the child.

If a child has exceeded the weight and height limitations of a rearward-facing child seat, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured forward-facing child seat until they exceed the weight and height limitations for the forward-facing child seat.

Forward-facing child seat placement We strongly recommend placing a forward- facing child seat in a rear seating position.

Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passengers front airbag off. A rear seat is the safest place for a child.

Protecting Smaller Children

Continued 67

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

68

Safe D rivin

g

1Selecting a Child Seat

Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is simple.

LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed to simplify the installation process and reduce the likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.

Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children). Some have a rigid-type connector, while others have a flexible-type connector. Both are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat manufacturers use and care instructions including recommended expiration dates as well as the instructions in this manual. Proper installation is key to maximizing your childs safety.

In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security. This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owners manual for proper installation instructions.

Important consideration when selecting a child seat Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements: The child seat is the correct type and size for the child. The child seat is the correct type for the seating position. The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

Selecting a Child Seat

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Safe D

rivin g

1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat

For your childs safety, when using a child seat installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the child seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child seat that is not properly secured will not adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.

3WARNING Never attach two child seats to the same anchor. In a collision, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or death.

A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in either of the two outer rear seats. A child seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of connectors.

1. Locate the anchor marks affixed to the base of the seat cushion.

2. Pull out the anchor covers under the marks to expose the lower anchors.

3. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat, then attach the child seat to the lower anchors according to the instructions that came with the child seat. u When installing the child seat, make sure

that the lower anchors are not obstructed by the seat belt or any other object.

Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat

Marks

Covers

Rigid Type

Lower Anchors

Flexible Type

Continued 69

70

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safe D rivin

g

4. Open the tether anchor cover behind the head restraint.

5. Put the head restraint to its upper-most position, then route the tether strap between the head restraint legs, and secure the tether strap hook to the anchor.

Anchor

Tether Strap Hook

Straight top tether type in seat position with adjustable headrest

Seat position with adjustable headrest

Anchor

Tether Strap Hook

Other top tether type in seat position with adjustable headrest

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Safe D

rivin g

1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat

Installing a LATCH-compatible child seat in the rear center seat Each outer rear seat is equipped with a pair of lower anchors which are used to secure a LATCH-compatible child seat. The rear center seat, however, is not equipped with anchors of any kind. The inner and outer anchors are spaced apart at a standard distance of 11 inches (280 mm). The distance between the two inner anchors is 15.4 inches (390 mm). LATCH-compatible restraint systems that are fitted with rigid-type attachments cannot be installed in the rear center seat. However, a system fitted with flexible-type attachments can be installed in the center seat, provided that the manufacturers instructions for that system permit the use of the inner anchors with the stated spacing. Before seating a child, make sure that the system is properly attached to both the lower anchors and tether anchors.

3WARNING Using the outer rear seats' inner anchors to secure a LATCH-compatible child seat in the center seating position may result in failure of the child seat, causing injury or death.

Only use the outer rear seats' inner anchors to install a child seat in the center seating position if the manufacturer's instructions expressly permit.

5. Route the tether strap over the top of the head restraint and secure the tether strap hook to the anchor.

5. Route the tether strap over the side of the head restraint and secure the tether strap hook to the anchor.

6. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer.

7. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back and side to side; little movement should be felt.

8. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked.

Anchor

Tether Strap Hook

Straight top tether type in seat position with fixed headrest

Straight top tether type in seat position with fixed headrest

Anchor

Tether Strap Hook

Other top tether type in seat position with fixed headrest

Other top tether type in seat position with fixed headrest

All models

Continued 71

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

72

Safe D rivin

g

1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt

A child seat that is not properly secured will not adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.

A child seat can be installed with a lap/shoulder belt in any rear seat or, if absolutely necessary, the front passenger seat.

1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat. 2. Route the seat belt through the child seat

according to the seat manufacturers instructions, and insert the latch plate into the buckle. u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks.

3. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all the way out until it stops. This activates the lockable retractor.

4. Let the seat belt retract a few inches and check that the retractor has switched modes by pulling on the webbing. It should not pull out again until it is reset by removing the latch plate from the buckle. u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt

out, the lockable retractor is not activated. Slowly pull the seat belt all the way out, and repeat steps 3 4.

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Safe D

rivin g

1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt

To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.

5. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack from the lap part of the belt. u When doing this, place your weight on

the child seat and push it into the vehicle seat.

6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back and side to side; less than one inch of movement should occur near the seat belt.

7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked.

Continued 73

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

74

Safe D rivin

g

1Adding Security with a Tether

Always use a tether for forward-facing child seats whether using the seat belt or lower anchors.

A tether anchor point is provided behind each

rear seating position. If you have a child seat that comes with a tether but can be installed with a seat belt, the tether may be used for additional security.

1. Locate the appropriate tether anchor point and lift the cover.

2. Pull up the head restraint to its upper-most position, then route the tether strap between the head restraint legs. Make sure the strap is not twisted.

Adding Security with a Tether

Tether Anchor Points

Cover

Anchor

Anchor

Tether Strap Hook

Straight top tether type in seat position with adjustable headrest

Seat position with adjustable headrest

Anchor

Tether Strap Hook

Other top tether type in seat position with adjustable headrest

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Safe D

rivin g

2. Route the tether strap over the top of the head restraint. Make sure the strap is not twisted.

2. Route the tether strap over the side of the head restraint. Make sure the strap is not twisted.

3. Secure the tether strap hook to the anchor. 4. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the

child seat manufacturer.

Anchor

Tether Strap Hook

Straight top tether type in seat position with fixed headrest

Straight top tether type in seat position with fixed headrest

Anchor

Tether Strap Hook

Other top tether type in seat position with fixed headrest

Other top tether type in seat position with fixed headrest

All models

75

76

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children

Safe D rivin

g

1Safety of Larger Children

3WARNING Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in front can result in injury or death if the passengers front airbag inflates.

If a larger child must ride in front, move the vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible, have the child sit up properly and wear the seat belt properly, using a booster seat if needed.

Safety of Larger Children

The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who must sit in front.

When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/ shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the following questions.

Checklist Do the childs knees bend comfortably over

the edge of the seat? Does the shoulder belt cross between the

childs neck and arm? Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as

possible, touching the childs thighs? Will the child be able to stay seated like this

for the whole trip? If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.

Protecting Larger Children

Checking Seat Belt Fit

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children Safe D

rivin g

1Booster Seats

When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the instructions that came with it, and install the seat accordingly. There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat belt correctly.

Some U.S. states and Canadian provinces and territories require children to use a booster seat until they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6 years or 60 lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or province, or territory where you intend to drive.

If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used properly, position the child in a booster seat in the rear seat. For the childs safety, check that the child meets the booster seat manufacturers recommendations.

Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front: Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information

in this manual. Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible. Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat. Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the

seat.

Monitoring child passengers We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up properly.

Booster Seats

Protecting Larger Children - Final Checks

77

78

Safe D rivin

g

Exhaust Gas Hazard

1Carbon Monoxide Gas

An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up with carbon monoxide gas. Do not run the engine with the garage door closed. Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the garage immediately after starting the engine.

3WARNING Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.

Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you.

Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that expose you to carbon monoxide.

Carbon Monoxide Gas The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon monoxide gas will not get into the interior.

Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever The exhaust system is making an unusual noise. The exhaust system may have been damaged. The vehicle is raised for an oil change.

When you operate a vehicle with the trunk open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the trunk open, open all the windows and set the climate control system as shown below.

1. Select the fresh air mode.

2. Select the mode. 3. Set the fan speed to high. 4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.

Adjust the climate control system in the same manner if you sit in your parked vehicle with the engine running.

Safety Labels

Label Locations These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels

Safe D rivin

g

carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer for a replacement.

Sun Visor

U.S. models

Canadian models

Radiator Cap

U.S. models only Dashboard

U.S. models Canadian models Air Conditioner System

79

80

lank.

This page intentionally left b

* Not available on all m

Instrument Panel

This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.

odels

Indicators ............................................ 82 Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages.................... 109

Gauges and Displays Gauges............................................ 139 Driver Information Interface ............. 140 Head-Up Display* ............................ 159

81

82

In stru

m en

t Pan el

Indicators

ECON Mode Indicator

M (sequential mode*/ 7-speed manual shift mode*) Indicator*/ Gear Selection Indicator*

P. 88

Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Red)

Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Amber)

U.S.

Canada

U.S.

Canada

Automatic Brake Hold System Indicator

Automatic Brake Hold IndicatorU.S.

Canada

*1: When you set the power mode to ON, these indicators come on to indicate that system checks are being performed. They go off a few seconds later or after the engine has started. If an indicator does not come on or turn off, there may be a malfunction in the corresponding system. To resolve the issue, follow the instructions in the owner's manual.

P. 83*1

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Charging System Indicator

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Indicator

Seat Belt Reminder Indicator

Low Fuel Indicator

Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) System Indicator

Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) OFF Indicator

Supplemental Restraint System Indicator

Auto High-Beam Indicator

Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator

Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator

Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Indicators

Lights On Indicator

High Beam Indicator

Fog Light Indicator*

System Message Indicator

Auto Idle Stop Indicator (Green)*

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (Amber)

Safety Support Indicator (Amber)

Safety Support Indicator (Green/Gray)

P. 84

P. 86

P. 86

P. 87

P. 88

*1

*1

*1

*1

P. 96*1

*1

Shift Position Indicator P. 88

Transmission System Indicator

P. 89, 91

P. 92

P. 93

P. 93

P. 93

P. 94

P. 94

*1

*1

*1

*1 P. 95

*1 P. 95

P. 97

P. 102

*1

P. 97

P. 97

P. 97

Security System Alarm Indicator

P. 99

P. 99

P. 104

P. 105

P. 108

*1 Auto Idle Stop System Indicator (Amber)*

P. 102

*1

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (White/Green)

P. 104

*1

Immobilizer System Indicator

P. 98

SPORT Mode Indicator* P. 101

P. 100

Cruise Mode Indicator (White/Green)

P. 104

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow Indicator (Amber)

P. 103*1

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow Indicator (White/Green)

P. 104

* Not available on all models

uuIndicatorsu In

stru m

en t Pan

el

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Red)

Comes on when the parking brake is applied, and goes off when it is released.

Comes on when the brake fluid level is low.

Comes on if there is a problem with the brake system.

The beeper sounds and the indicator comes on if you drive with the parking brake applied.

Comes on for about 30 seconds when you apply the electric parking brake while the power mode is in ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF, then goes off.

Stays on for about 30 seconds when you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF while the electric parking brake is applied, then goes off.

Comes on while driving - Make sure the parking brake is released. Check the brake fluid level.

2 What to do when the indicator comes on while driving P. 615

Comes on along with the Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (amber) - Immediately stop in a safe place. Contact a dealer for repair. The brake pedal becomes harder to operate. Depress the pedal further than you normally do.

2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On P. 616

Comes on along with the ABS indicator - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks P. 615

Blinks and the Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (amber) comes on at the same time - There is a problem with the electric parking brake system. The parking brake may not be set. Avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On P. 616

U.S.

Canada

(Red)

83Continued

84

uu Indicatorsu

In stru

m en

t Pan el

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Amber)

Comes on if there is a problem with a system related to braking other than the conventional brake system.

Comes on while driving - Avoid high speeds and sudden braking. Take the vehicle to a dealer immediately.U.S.

Canada

(Amber)

U.S.

Canada

uuIndicatorsu In

stru m

en t Pan

el

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Amber)

Comes on if there is a problem with the electric parking brake system and/or the automatic brake hold system.

Stays on constantly - Avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

U.S.

Canada

(Amber)

U.S.

Canada

85Continued

86

uu Indicatorsu

In stru

m en

t Pan el

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Amber)

Comes on if there is a problem with the radar sensor.

Indicator may come on temporarily when the Maximum Load Limit is exceeded.

Make sure the total load is within the Maximum Load Limit.

2 Maximum Load Limit P. 405 Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle

checked by a dealer.

Automatic Brake Hold System Indicator

Comes on when the automatic brake hold system is on.

2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 513

Automatic Brake Hold Indicator

Comes on when the automatic brake hold is activated.

2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 513

U.S.

Canada

(Amber)

U.S.

Canada

uuIndicatorsu In

stru m

en t Pan

el

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

After you have set the power mode to ON, the vehicle performs system checks. However, if the readiness codes have not been set by that time, this indicator will blink five times and then go off.

Readiness codes are part of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions control systems.

2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 639

Comes on if there is a problem with the emissions control systems.

Blinks when a misfire in the engines cylinders is detected.

2 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks P. 614

87Continued

88

uu Indicatorsu

In stru

m en

t Pan el

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

Charging System Indicator

Comes on when there is a problem with the charging system.

Stop in a safe place and contact a dealer immediately.

2 Checking the Battery P. 584 2 If the Charging System Indicator

Comes On P. 613

Shift Position Indicator

Indicates the current shift position.

2 Shifting P. 420, 427, 429

M (sequential mode*/7- speed manual shift mode*) Indicator*/ Gear Selection Indicator*

Comes on when the sequential mode*/7-speed manual shift mode* is applied.

2 Sequential Mode P. 425 2 7-Speed Manual Shift Mode P. 431

* Not available on all models

uuIndicatorsu In

stru m

en t Pan

el

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

Transmission System Indicator

The current shift position blinks if the transmission system has a problem.

Blinks while driving - Avoid sudden starts and acceleration and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

The indicated current shift position blinks if you cannot put the transmission into (R due to a transmission system failure.

Avoid sudden starts, sudden acceleration and high speed, and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

The indicated current shift position blinks if the transmission system has a problem and the performance of the vehicle is reduced.

Avoid sudden starts, sudden acceleration and high speed, and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

The indicated current shift position blinks if the transmission system has a problem and the paddle shifters cannot be used.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

Automatic transmission models

89Continued

90

uu Indicatorsu

In stru

m en

t Pan el

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

Transmission System Indicator

The current shift position or all the shift positions blink if there is a problem with the transmission and the vehicle is no longer able to run.

Immediately park your car in a safe place. 2 Emergency Towing P. 626

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

The current shift position or all the shift positions blink if there is a problem with the transmission and it is not possible to select (P .

Depending on the circumstances, you can set the power mode to ON as an emergency measure.

2 If the Transmission System Indicator Blinks along with the Warning Message P. 619

While the vehicle is stopped, apply the parking brake.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

Automatic transmission models

uuIndicatorsu In

stru m

en t Pan

el

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

Transmission System Indicator

Blinks if the transmission system has a problem.

Blinks while driving - Avoid sudden starts and acceleration and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

Blinks if the transmission system has a problem and the performance of the vehicle is reduced.

Avoid sudden starts, sudden acceleration and high speed, and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

Blinks if the transmission system has a problem and the paddle shifters cannot be used.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

Continuously variable transmission models

Models with paddle shifters

91Continued

92

uu Indicatorsu

In stru

m en

t Pan el

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

Seat Belt Reminder Indicator

Blinks and the beeper sounds for a few seconds if you are not wearing a seat belt when you set the power mode to ON, then the indicator comes on.

If the front passenger is not wearing a seat belt, the indicator comes on a few seconds later.

Comes on for a while when the rear seat belt is unfastened while the power mode in ON.

Blinks while driving if you and/or any passenger has not fastened a seat belt. The beeper sounds and the indicator blinks at regular intervals.

The beeper stops and the indicator goes off when you and the passengers fasten their seat belts.

Stays on after you and/or the passengers have fastened the seat belt(s) - A detection error may have occurred in the sensor. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 39

uuIndicatorsu In

stru m

en t Pan

el

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

Low Fuel Indicator

Comes on when the fuel reserve is running low (approximately 2.2 U.S. gal./8.4 L left).

Blinks if there is a problem with the fuel gauge.

Comes on - Refuel your vehicle as soon as possible.

Blinks - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Indicator

Comes on if there is a problem with the ABS.

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. With this indicator on, your vehicle still has normal braking ability but no anti-lock function.

2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 516

Supplemental Restraint System Indicator

Comes on if a problem with any of the following is detected: - Supplemental restraint system - Knee airbag system - Side airbag system - Side curtain airbag system - Seat belt tensioner

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

93Continued

94

uu Indicatorsu

In stru

m en

t Pan el

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

Auto High- Beam Indicator

Comes on when all the operating conditions of the auto high-beam are met.

2 Auto High-Beam P. 199

Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) System Indicator

Blinks when VSA is active. Comes on if there is a problem with

the brake assist system, VSA system or hill start assist system.

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

2 Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System P. 441

Comes on if the VSA system is deactivated temporarily after the battery has been disconnected, then re-connected.

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

uuIndicatorsu In

stru m

en t Pan

el

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) OFF Indicator

Comes on when you partially disable VSA.

2 VSA On and Off P. 442

Comes on if the VSA system is deactivated temporarily after the battery has been disconnected, then re-connected.

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator

Comes on if there is a problem with the EPS system.

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

2 If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On P. 617

95Continued

96

uu Indicatorsu

In stru

m en

t Pan el

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

Low Tire Pressure/ TPMS Indicator

May come on briefly if the power mode is set to ON and the vehicle is not moved within 45 seconds, to indicate the calibration process is not yet complete.

Comes on and stays on when: - One or more tires pressures are

determined to be significantly low. - The system has not been

calibrated.

Comes on while driving - Stop in a safe place, check tire pressures, and inflate the tire(s) if necessary.

Stays on after the tires are inflated to the recommended pressures - The system needs to be calibrated.

2 TPMS Calibration P. 446

Blinks for about one minute, and then stays on if there is a problem with the TPMS, or when a compact spare tire is temporarily installed.

Blinks and remains on - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. If the vehicle is fitted with a compact spare tire, get your regular tire repaired or replaced and put back on your vehicle as soon as you can.

Comes on if the TPMS is deactivated temporarily after the battery has been disconnected, then re- connected.

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

uuIndicatorsu In

stru m

en t Pan

el

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Indicators

Blinks when you operate the turn signal lever.

Blink along with all turn signals when you press the hazard warning button.

Does not blink or blinks rapidly 2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 566, 567

High Beam Indicator

Comes on when the high beam headlights are on.

Lights On Indicator

Comes on when the parking, tail, and other external lights are on.

2 Light Switches P. 195

Fog Light Indicator*

Comes on when the fog lights are on. 2 Fog Lights* P. 197

97Continued* Not available on all models

98

uu Indicatorsu

In stru

m en

t Pan el

*1:Canadian models only: Apply and hold the brake pedal before selecting the ON mode. *2:Canadian models

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

Immobilizer System Indicator

Blinks if the immobilizer system cannot recognize the key information.

Blinks - You cannot start the engine. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF*1, then select the ON mode again.

Repeatedly blinks - The system may be malfunctioning. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it. Electrical problems can occur.

Indicator

*2

*2

uuIndicatorsu In

stru m

en t Pan

el

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

Security System Alarm Indicator

Blinks when the security system alarm has been set.

2 Security System Alarm P. 185

System Message Indicator

Comes on along with a beep when a problem is detected. A system message on the driver information interface appears at the same time.

While the indicator is on, press the (home) button to see the message again.

2 Accessing contents in the main display P. 140

Refer to the Indicators information in this chapter when a system message appears on the driver information interface. Respond to the message accordingly.

The driver information interface does not return to the normal screen unless the warning is canceled, or the left selector wheel is pressed.

Indicator

99Continued

100

uu Indicatorsu

In stru

m en

t Pan el

*1:Models without the adaptive damper system *2:Models with the adaptive damper system

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

ECON Mode Indicator

Comes on when the ECON mode is on.

2 ECON Mode P. 434

*1

*2

uuIndicatorsu In

stru m

en t Pan

el

*1:Models without the adaptive damper system *2:Models with the adaptive damper system

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

SPORT Mode Indicator*

Comes on when you press the SPORT button.

The ambient meter remains lit up in red as long as SPORT mode is on.

2 SPORT Mode* P. 433

*1

*2

101Continued* Not available on all models

102

uu Indicatorsu

In stru

m en

t Pan el

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

Auto Idle Stop Indicator (Green)*

Comes on when Auto Idle Stop is in operation. The engine automatically shuts off.

2 Auto Idle Stop* P. 435

Auto Idle Stop System Indicator (Amber)*

Comes on when the Auto Idle Stop system has been turned off by the Auto Idle Stop OFF button.

2 Auto Idle Stop System ON/OFF P. 436

Blinks if there is a problem with the Auto Idle Stop system.

Blinks - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

* Not available on all models

uuIndicatorsu In

stru m

en t Pan

el

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow Indicator (Amber)

Comes on if there is a problem with ACC with Low Speed Follow.

Comes on while driving - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Comes on if the ACC with Low Speed Follow is deactivated temporarily after the battery has been disconnected, then re- connected.

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Indicator may come on temporarily when the Maximum Load Limit is exceeded.

ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically canceled.

Make sure the total load is within the Maximum Load Limit.

2 Maximum Load Limit P. 405 Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle

checked by a dealer.

103Continued

104

uu Indicatorsu

In stru

m en

t Pan el

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow Indicator (White/ Green)

Lights up in white when you press the button.

Lights up in green when you press the RES/+ button or SET/- button.

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 470

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (Amber)

Comes on if there is a problem with the LKAS.

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (White/ Green)

Lights up in white when you press the LKAS button.

Lights up in green when the LKAS is in operation.

2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 486

Cruise Mode Indicator (White/ Green)

Lights up in white when you change to cruise mode.

Lights up in green when you have set a speed for cruise control.

2 To Switch ACC with Low Speed Follow to Cruise Control P. 484

uuIndicatorsu In

stru m

en t Pan

el

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

Safety Support Indicator (Amber)

Comes on if there is a problem with RDM, Low Speed Braking Control*, CMBSTM, or the blind spot information system*.

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Comes on if the RDM, Low Speed Braking Control* and CMBSTM are deactivated temporarily after the battery has been disconnected and then re-connected.

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

105Continued* Not available on all models

106

uu Indicatorsu

In stru

m en

t Pan el

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

Safety Support Indicator (Amber)

Comes on when RDM, Low Speed Braking Control* and/or CMBSTM shuts itself off.

Indicator may come on temporarily when passing through an enclosed space, such as a tunnel.

The area around the radar sensor cover is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place and wipe the debris off with a soft cloth. Indicator may take some time to go off after the radar sensor cover is cleaned.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the indicator does not go off even after you have cleaned the radar sensor cover.

2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) P. 456

2 Radar Sensor P. 506

Stays on - The temperature inside the camera is too high. Use the climate control system to cool down the camera. The system activates when the temperature inside the camera cools down.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 504

* Not available on all models

uuIndicatorsu In

stru m

en t Pan

el

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

Safety Support Indicator (Amber)

Comes on when RDM, Low Speed Braking Control* and/or CMBSTM shuts itself off.

Stays on - The area around the camera is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place and wipe the debris off with a soft cloth.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the indicator and message are still displayed even after you have cleaned the area around the camera.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 504

Comes on when mud, snow, or ice accumulates in the vicinity of sonar.

Remove the obstacle in the vicinity of sonar sensor.

2 Low Speed Braking Control* P. 465 2 Sonar Sensors* P. 507

Comes on when mud, snow, or ice has accumulated in the vicinity of the blind spot information system sensor.

Comes on while driving - Something may be interfering with the blind spot information system sensor. Check the vicinity of the blind spot information system sensor and remove any obstacles.

2 Blind spot information System* P. 450

Indicator may come on temporarily when the Maximum Load Limit is exceeded.

Make sure the total load is within the Maximum Load Limit.

2 Maximum Load Limit P. 405

Models with Low Speed Braking Control

Models with blind spot information system

107Continued* Not available on all models

108

uu Indicatorsu

In stru

m en

t Pan el

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

Safety Support Indicator (Green/Gray)

Lights up in green when RDM, Low Speed Braking Control*, CMBSTM, and the blind spot information system* are on.

Lights up in green and gray when RDM, Low Speed Braking Control*, CMBSTM, or the blind spot information system* is off.

Lights up in gray when RDM, Low Speed Braking Control*, CMBSTM, and the blind spot information system* are off.

2 RDM On and Off P. 496 2 CMBSTM On and Off P. 459 2 Blind spot information System On and

Off P. 452 2 System On and Off P. 467

* Not available on all models

uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages The following messages appear only on the driver information interface. Press the (home) button, select Warnings, then press the left

In stru

m en

t Pan el

selector wheel to see the message again with the system message indicator on.

Message Condition Explanation

Appears when the vehicle is no longer able to run due to a malfunction.

Immediately stop in a safe place.

Appears when there is a risk that the vehicle will move unexpectedly after you have stopped due to a malfunction with the vehicle.

While the vehicle is stopped, apply the parking brake. 2 Parking Brake P. 508

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Appears when you set the power mode to ON again and the vehicle is able to run.

2 Starting the Engine P. 412

Automatic transmission models

109Continued

110

uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

In stru

m en

t Pan el

Message Condition Explanation

Appears if any door or the trunk is not completely closed.

Appears if any door or the trunk is opened while driving. The beeper sounds.

Disappears when all doors and the trunk are closed.

Appears when the engine oil pressure is low. Appears while driving - Immediately stop in a safe place.

2 If the Low Oil Pressure Warning Appears P. 613

uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages In

stru m

en t Pan

el

Message Condition Explanation

Appears if there is a problem with the shutter grille, and the radiator coolant temperature is too high.

Power output will be reduced, so you may not be able to accelerate or maintain your current speed. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Appears when the washer fluid is low. Refill the washer fluid.

2 Refilling Window Washer Fluid P. 563

Appears when the scheduled maintenance is due soon.

Consequently, Maintenance Due Now and Maintenance Past Due follow.

2 Maintenance Minder Messages on the Driver Information Interface P. 543

Appears when there is a problem with the battery charging system.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Models with shutter grille

Canadian models

111Continued

112

uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

In stru

m en

t Pan el

Message Condition Explanation

Appears when the engine coolant temperature gets abnormally high.

2 Overheating P. 611

Appears if the automatic brake hold is automatically canceled while it is in operation.

Immediately depress the brake pedal.

Appears when the automatic brake hold system is turned off.

2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 513

Appears when the automatic brake hold button is pressed without wearing the drivers seat belt.

Fasten the drivers seat belt. 2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 513

uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages In

stru m

en t Pan

el

Message Condition Explanation

Appears when the automatic brake hold button is pressed without depressing the brake pedal while the automatic brake hold is in operation.

Press the automatic brake hold button with the brake pedal depressed.

2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 513

Appears when the parking brake is applied automatically while it is in operation.

2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 513 2 Parking Brake P. 508

Appears when the electric parking brake switch is pressed without depressing the brake pedal while the electric parking brake is in operation.

Press the electric parking brake switch with the brake pedal depressed.

2 Parking Brake P. 508

113Continued

114

uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

In stru

m en

t Pan el

Message Condition Explanation

Appears after you set the power mode to ACCESSORY or ON.

Appears after you unlock and open the drivers door.

2 Starting the Engine P. 412

Appears when the steering wheel is locked.

Move the steering wheel left and right while pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button.

Canadian models

Continuously variable transmission models for Canadian models

uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages In

stru m

en t Pan

el

Message Condition Explanation

Appears when the power mode is in ACCESSORY.

Appears after the drivers door is opened when the power mode is in ACCESSORY.

Change the power mode to VEHICLE OFF. 2 ENGINE START/STOP Button P. 191

Appears when you close the door with the power mode in ON without the keyless remote inside the vehicle.

Disappears when you bring the keyless remote back inside the vehicle and close the door.

2 Keyless Remote Reminder P. 193

Appears when the keyless remote battery becomes weak.

2 Replacing the Remote Battery P. 586

115Continued

116

uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

In stru

m en

t Pan el

Message Condition Explanation

Appears if the keyless remote battery is too weak to start the engine or the key is not within operating range to start the engine. The beeper sounds six times.

Bring the back of the keyless remote into contact with the ENGINE START/STOP button.

2 If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak P. 604

Appears when the starter system has a problem. As a temporary measure, press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for up to 15 seconds while pressing the brake pedal, manually start the engine. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Appears as soon as a problem is detected in the keyless access system* (smart entry system*) or push button starting system.

Appears constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

U.S.

Canada

* Not available on all models

uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages In

stru m

en t Pan

el

Message Condition Explanation

Appears if you press the ENGINE START/STOP button while the vehicle is moving.

2 Emergency Engine Stop P. 605

Appears if the vehicle is being driven in a manner consistent with drowsy or inattentive driving.

2 Driver Attention Monitor P. 154

Appears when you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF, if the rear doors were opened shortly before or after the vehicle was powered on.

Check the rear seat for passengers or items before exiting the vehicle.

2 Rear Seat Reminder P. 217

117Continued

118

uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

In stru

m en

t Pan el

Message Condition Explanation

Appears when the temperature of the transmission is starting to get too hot.

The performance of the vehicle may be reduced.

Until the message disappears, reduce your speed and allow the system to cool down.

Appears when you attempt to change to another shift position with the transmission in (P and the engine OFF.

To select another shift position while in (P , the engine must be ON.

Appears when you set the power mode to OFF while driving.

Immediately stop in a safe place, set the parking brake, then restart the engine. If the message disappears, continue driving.

Automatic transmission models

uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages In

stru m

en t Pan

el

Message Condition Explanation

Appears if the vehicle is stopped and the drivers seat belt is unfastened, as there is a possibility that the vehicle may roll.

When the vehicle is idling or when you are parking or exiting the vehicle, put the transmission into (P before releasing the brake pedal.

2 Shift Operation P. 421

Appears when you put the transmission into (N, then release the (N button.

2 If you want to keep the transmission in (N position [car wash mode] P. 423

Appears when car wash mode is not available due to the transmission being too hot.

When the transmission is too hot, car wash mode may not be available. Let the engine idle until the transmission has cooled down.

2 If you want to keep the transmission in (N position [car wash mode] P. 423

Automatic transmission models

119Continued

120

uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

In stru

m en

t Pan el

Message Condition Explanation

Appears when you try to change the shift position without releasing your foot off the accelerator pedal.

Release your foot off the accelerator pedal, then change the shift position.

Appears when the (P button is pressed while the vehicle is moving.

Appears if you put the transmission into (R while the vehicle is moving forward, or into (D while the vehicle is reversing.

Make sure that the vehicle comes to a stop before operating the shift button.

Appears when you set the power mode to ON without fastening the drivers seat belt.

Appears when you change the shift position after (P has been automatically selected with the drivers door open, the drivers seat belt unfastened, then the brake pedal is released.

Fasten the seat belt properly before you start to drive. 2 Shift Operation P. 421

Appears when you try to change the shift position without depressing the brake pedal.

Depress the brake pedal, then change the shift position.

Automatic transmission models

(White)

uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages In

stru m

en t Pan

el

Message Condition Explanation

Appears when you depress the accelerator pedal while the transmission is in (N .

Remove your foot off the accelerator pedal. When driving, depress the brake pedal and operate the shift position.

Appears when you repeatedly change the shift position between (P and other positions in short period.

Take some time before changing the shift position.

Appears when you try to take the transmission out of (P immediately after you start engine.

Try to take the transmission out of (P again.

Appears when you press the (P button but it is not engaged due to low ATF temperature.

Depress the brake pedal until this message disappear.

Appears when you press and hold (N button for more than two seconds.

Disappears when you set the shift position to a shift other than (N .

2 If you want to keep the transmission in (N position [car wash mode] P. 423

Automatic transmission models

121Continued

122

uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

In stru

m en

t Pan el

Message Condition Explanation

Appears if you press the ENGINE START/STOP button to turn the engine off without the shift lever in (P .

Move the shift lever to (P . The power mode changes to VEHICLE OFF.

Move the shift lever to (P , then press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice.

Appears when the engine stops without the transmission in (P , and does not restart automatically.

Appears if you open the hood while Auto Idle Stop activated.

If you want to set the power mode to ON, put the transmission into (P.

If you want to start the engine, follow the normal procedure.

2 Starting the Engine P. 412

Appears when the engine does not restart automatically due to the following reasons: - The hood is open. - There is a problem in the system that disables Auto

Idle Stop.

Follow the normal procedure to start the engine. 2 Starting the Engine P. 412

Appears when you turn the Auto Idle Stop system on.

2 Auto Idle Stop System ON/OFF P. 436

Continuously variable transmission models

U.S. models

Canadian models

uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages In

stru m

en t Pan

el

Message Condition Explanation

Appears when Auto Idle Stop does not activate for some reason.

Appears when the engine restarts automatically. Appears when the battery temperature is around

41F (5C) or lower.

2 Auto Idle Stop Activates When: P. 437

Appears when Auto Idle Stop does not activate because the climate control system is in use, and the difference between the set temperature and actual interior temperature becomes significant.

Appears when Auto Idle Stop does not activate because the engine is not adequately warmed up or the coolant temperature is high.

Appears when Auto Idle Stop does not activate because the battery charge level is low.

Appears when the battery is low performance.

Continuously variable transmission models

123Continued

124

uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

In stru

m en

t Pan el

Message Condition Explanation

Appears when Auto Idle Stop does not activate because the pressure to the brake pedal is not enough.

Depress the brake pedal firmly. 2 Auto Idle Stop* P. 435

Appears when the system is under the following conditions while Auto Idle Stop activates: - The climate control system is in use, and the

difference between the set temperature and actual interior temperature becomes significant.

- The humidity in the interior is high. - The battery charge level is low.

The engine restarts automatically in a few seconds. 2 Auto Idle Stop* P. 435 2 The Engine Automatically Restarts When: P. 439

Appears when the hood is opened. Close the hood.

Continuously variable transmission models

* Not available on all models

uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages In

stru m

en t Pan

el

Message Condition Explanation

Appears if there is a problem with the automatic lighting control system.

Appears while driving - Manually turn the lights on, and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Appears if there is a problem with the headlights. Appears while driving - The headlights may not be on. When conditions allow you to drive safely, have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

Appears if there is a problem with the parking sensor system.

Check if the area around the sensor(s) is covered with mud, ice, snow, etc. If the indicator(s) stays on even after you clean the area, have the system checked by a dealer.

Models with parking sensor system

125Continued

126

uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

In stru

m en

t Pan el

Message Condition Explanation

Appears if there is a problem with the auto high- beam.

Manually operate the headlight switch. If you are driving with the high beam headlights when

this happens, the headlights are changed to low beams.

Appears when ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically canceled.

You can resume the set speed after the condition that caused ACC with Low Speed Follow to cancel improves. Press the RES/+ button.

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 470

Flashes when the system senses a likely collision. The beeper sounds.

Take appropriate action means to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change lanes, etc.)

2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) P. 456

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 470

2 Low Speed Braking Control* P. 465

* Not available on all models

uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages In

stru m

en t Pan

el

Message Condition Explanation

Appears when ACC with Low Speed Follow is canceled due to excessive high vehicle speed.

Reduce the speed, then reset ACC with Low Speed Follow.

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 470

Appears when the speed of the vehicle is too high for you to set ACC with Low Speed Follow.

Reduce the speed, then set ACC with Low Speed Follow.

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 470

Appears when cruise control is canceled due to excessive low vehicle speed.

Raise the speed, then reset cruise control. 2 To Switch ACC with Low Speed Follow to Cruise

Control P. 484

Appears when the speed of the vehicle is too low for you to set cruise control.

Raise the speed, then set cruise control. 2 To Switch ACC with Low Speed Follow to Cruise

Control P. 484

127Continued

128

uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

In stru

m en

t Pan el

Message Condition Explanation

Appears when the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too close while ACC with Low Speed Follow is in operation.

ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically canceled.

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 470

Appears when pressing the SET/ button while the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too close.

ACC with Low Speed Follow cannot be set. 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow P. 470

Appears when the parking brake is applied automatically while ACC with Low Speed Follow is in operation.

ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically canceled.

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 470

2 Parking Brake P. 508

Appears when pressing the SET/ button while the parking brake is applied.

ACC with Low Speed Follow cannot be set. 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow P. 470 2 Parking Brake P. 508

uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages In

stru m

en t Pan

el

Message Condition Explanation

Appears when pressing the SET/ button while the vehicle is moving and the brake pedal is depressed.

ACC with Low Speed Follow cannot be set. 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow P. 470

Appears just before the ACC with Low Speed Follow is automatically canceled when you are descending a long hill etc (The following interval is automatically set to extra long).

Appears when the ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically canceled.

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 470

Appears when you are descending a long hill etc and you press the RES/+ or SET/ button.

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 470

129Continued

130

uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

In stru

m en

t Pan el

Message Condition Explanation

Appears if the VSA or traction control function operates while ACC with Low Speed Follow is in operation.

ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically canceled.

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 470

Appears when the drivers seat belt is unfastened while your vehicle is automatically stopped by ACC with Low Speed Follow.

ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically canceled.

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 470

Appears when pressing the SET/ button while the drivers seat belt is unfastened.

ACC with Low Speed Follow cannot be set. 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow P. 470

uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages In

stru m

en t Pan

el

Message Condition Explanation

Appears when the transmission is put into any position other than (D or (S * while ACC with Low Speed Follow is in operation.

ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically canceled.

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 470

Automatic transmission models

Continuously variable transmission models

131Continued* Not available on all models

132

uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

In stru

m en

t Pan el

Message Condition Explanation

Appears when pressing the SET/ button while the transmission is in any position other than (D or (S *.

ACC with Low Speed Follow cannot be set. 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow P. 470

Automatic transmission models

Continuously variable transmission models

* Not available on all models

uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages In

stru m

en t Pan

el

Message Condition Explanation

Appears when the vehicle is stopped on a very steep slope while ACC with Low Speed Follow is in operation.

ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically canceled.

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 470

Appears when pressing the SET/ button while the vehicle is stopped on a very steep slope.

ACC with Low Speed Follow cannot be set. 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow P. 470

133Continued

134

uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

In stru

m en

t Pan el

Message Condition Explanation

Appears if ACC with Low Speed Follow is canceled while your vehicle is automatically stopped by ACC with Low Speed Follow.

Immediately depress the brake pedal.

Appears when the vehicle ahead of you resumes driving, after your vehicle has been stopped automatically by ACC with Low Speed Follow.

Press the RES/+ or SET/ button or depress the accelerator pedal to resume.

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 470

Appears when the SET/, RES/+, CANCEL or Interval button is pressed while ACC with Low Speed Follow is off.

After pressing the button, press the SET/, RES/+, CANCEL or Interval button.

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 470

Appears when the Interval button is pressed while Cruise mode is selected.

After selecting ACC with Low Speed Follow, press the Interval button.

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 470

uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages In

stru m

en t Pan

el

Message Condition Explanation

Appears if anything covers the radar sensor cover and prevents the sensor from detecting a vehicle in front.

May appear when driving in bad weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.).

When the radar sensor gets dirty, stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe off dirt using a soft cloth. The message may take some time to go off.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message does not disappear even after you clean the sensor cover.

2 Radar Sensor P. 506 2 Honda Sensing P. 453

Appears if the temperature inside the front sensor camera is too high and some driver assist systems and auto high-beam cannot be activated.

Use the climate control system to cool down the camera.

Disappears - The camera has been cooled down and the systems are activated normally.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 504 2 Auto High-Beam P. 199 2 Honda Sensing P. 453

Appears if the area around the front sensor camera is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. and be prevented from detecting a vehicle in front.

May appear when driving in bad weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.).

When the front window gets dirty, stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message does not disappear even after you cleaned the area around the camera.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 504 2 Auto High-Beam P. 199 2 Honda Sensing P. 453

135Continued

136

uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

In stru

m en

t Pan el

Message Condition Explanation

Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected lane. The steering wheel vibrates rapidly.

Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving. 2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 486

Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected lane.

- The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the vehicle is drifting out of a detected lane.

- The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the vehicle is drifting out of a detected lane. The system also steers the vehicle to help you remain within your driving lane.

Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving. 2 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System P. 494

You can change the setting for the Road Departure Mitigation system. Narrow, Normal, Wide, and Warning Only can be selected.

2 Customized Features P. 351

Appears when the vehicle is likely to drive out of a detected lane. The RDM system also steers the vehicle to help you remain within your driving lane.

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

When you selected Warning Only

When you selected Narrow, Normal or Wide

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System When you selected Narrow

uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages In

stru m

en t Pan

el

Message Condition Explanation

Blinks when you fail to steer the vehicle. The beeper sounds simultaneously.

Operate the steering wheel to resume the LKAS.

Appears when the LKAS is in operation, or the LKAS button is pressed, but there is a problem with a system related to the LKAS. The LKAS cancels automatically. The beeper sounds simultaneously.

If any other system indicators come on, such as the VSA, ABS and brake system, take appropriate action.

2 Indicators P. 82

Appears when the Low Speed Braking Control is activated.

Models with Low Speed Braking Control

137Continued

138

uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

In stru

m en

t Pan el

Message Condition Explanation

Appears if there is a problem with the adaptive damper system.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. Your vehicle will have normal damping ability without the adaptive damper feature.

Appears if the ECON mode or SPORT mode* cannot be changed due to certain situations, such as a system error or adverse driving conditions. 2 ECON Mode P. 434

2 SPORT Mode* P. 433

Appears when you unlock and open the drivers door while the engine is running by remote engine start.

2 Remote Engine Start* P. 414

Models with adaptive damper system

Models with remote engine starter

* Not available on all models

Gauges and Displays

In

stru m

en t Pan

el

1Speedometer

You can show another speed unit on the driver information interface and set the displayed measurements to read in either mph or km/h.

2 Tachometer P. 151

1Fuel Gauge

NOTICE You should refuel when the reading approaches . Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter.

The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from the fuel gauge reading.

E

1Temperature Gauge

NOTICE Driving with the temperature gauge pointer in the upper zone can cause serious engine damage. Pull safely to the side of the road and allow engine temperature to return to normal.

2 Overheating P. 611

Gauges Gauges include the speedometer, fuel gauge, and other related indicators. They are displayed when the power mode is in ON.

Displays your driving speed in mph (U.S.) or km/h (Canada).

Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.

Displays the temperature of the engine coolant.

Speedometer

Fuel Gauge

Temperature Gauge

139

140

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface

In stru

m en

t Pan el

1Switching the Display

To go back to the previous screen, press the (back) button.

You can edit, add, or delete the meter contents using the audio/information screen.

2 Customizing the Meter P. 265

Driver Information Interface The driver information interface shows information such as the estimated travelable distance and fuel economy of the vehicle. It also displays messages such as warnings and other helpful information.

Accessing contents in the main display Press the (home) button, then roll the left selector wheel to scroll to the content you want to see. Press the left selector wheel to see detailed information.

Switching the Display

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface In

stru m

en t Pan

el

(home) Button

Tachometer P. 151

Range & Fuel P. 144

Speed & Time P. 146

Navigation P. 148

Traffic Sign P. 153

Phone P. 150

Audio P. 152

Safety Support P. 158

Maintenance P. 149

Warnings P. 149

Left Selector Wheel

Roll the left selector wheel.

Driving Support P. 157

Driver Attention P. 154

Rear Seat Belts P. 153

141Continued

142

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface

In stru

m en

t Pan el

Trip B

TRIP

Sub display Press the TRIP button to change the display.

Shows the total number of miles or kilometers that your vehicle has accumulated.

Odometer

Odometer

Outside temperature

Trip A TRIP Button

TRIP

TRIP

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface In

stru m

en t Pan

el

1Trip Meter

Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by pressing the TRIP Button.

1Outside Temperature

The temperature sensor is in the front bumper. Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can affect the temperature reading when your vehicle speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).

It may take several minutes for the display to be updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.

You can adjust the temperature reading. 2 Customized Features P. 351

Shows the total number of miles or kilometers driven since the last reset. Meters A and B can be used to measure two separate trips.

Resetting a trip meter To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the TRIP Button. The trip meter is reset to 0.0.

Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).

Adjusting the outside temperature display Adjust the temperature reading by up to 5F or 3C if the temperature reading seems incorrect.

Trip Meter

Outside Temperature

Continued 143

144

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface

In stru

m en

t Pan el

Trip Meter

Range

Average Fuel Economy

Instant Fuel Economy

Roll the left selector wheel to switch between trip computer A and trip computer B.

Range & Fuel

Left Selector Wheel

Trip Computer A

Trip Computer B

Roll the left selector wheel.

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface In

stru m

en t Pan

el

1Trip meter

Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by rolling the left selector wheel.

When resetting the trip meter in the Range & Fuel, the trip meter in the sub display resets at the same time.

1Average fuel economy (Avg. Fuel)

You can change when to reset the average fuel economy.

2 Customized Features P. 351

Trip meter Shows the total number of miles or kilometers driven since the last reset. Meters A and B can be used to measure two separate trips.

Resetting a trip meter To reset the trip meter, display it, press the left selector wheel and then select Reset. u The trip meter is reset to 0.0.

Average fuel economy (Avg. Fuel) Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg or l/100 km. The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the average fuel economy is also reset.

Instant fuel economy Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg or l/100 km.

Range Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This estimated distance is based on the vehicles current fuel economy.

Continued 145

146

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface

In stru

m en

t Pan el

Trip Meter

Average Speed

Elapsed Time

Roll the left selector wheel to switch between trip computer A and trip computer B.

Speed & Time

Trip Computer A

Trip Computer B

Left Selector Wheel

Roll the left selector wheel.

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface In

stru m

en t Pan

el

1Elapsed Time

You can change when to reset the elapsed time. 2 Customized Features P. 351

1Average Speed (Avg. Speed)

You can change when to reset the average speed. 2 Customized Features P. 351

Trip meter 2 Trip meter P. 145

Elapsed Time Shows the time elapsed since Trip A or Trip B was reset.

Average Speed (Avg. Speed) Shows the average speed in mph or km/h since Trip A or Trip B was reset.

Continued 147

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface

148

In stru

m en

t Pan el

1Navigation

You can select whether to have the turn-by-turn display come on or not during the route guidance.

2 Customized Features P. 351

Turn-by-turn directions may not be available for all apps.

When the compass or turn-by-turn directions are displayed, you can control some navigation system functions on the driver information interface by scrolling the left selector wheel.

2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual

Models with navigation system

Compass Shows the compass screen.

Turn-by-Turn Directions When driving guidance is provided by the navigation system*, Android Auto or Apple CarPlay, turn-by-turn directions to your destination appear.

2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual 2 Android Auto P. 320 2 Apple CarPlay P. 313

Navigation

Compass

Turn-By-Turn Driving Directions

* Not available on all models

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface In

stru m

en t Pan

el

1Warnings

If there are no Warnings, None message appears on the driver information interface.

If there are multiple warnings, you can roll the left selector wheel to see other warnings.

2 Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages P. 109

Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM.

2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 541

Warnings

(Example)

Maintenance

Continued 149

150

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface

In stru

m en

t Pan el

Shows the current phone information. 2 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink P. 374

Phone

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface In

stru m

en t Pan

el

1Tachometer

The tachometer can be turned on and off using the audio/information screen.

2 Customized Features P. 351 Even if you have turned off the tachometer on the audio/information screen, if Tachometer is selected on the driver information interface, it will change to a tachometer-only display.

Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute.

Speed/Distance Units Enables you to show another unit on the driver information interface, head-up display* and audio/information screen and set the displayed measurements to read in either miles and mph or km and km/h.

Press and hold the left selector wheel when you select the Tachometer on the driver information interface. Each time you do this, the unit will change from miles and mph to km and km/h or vice versa. After this, a confirmation screen will appear for a few seconds.

Tachometer

Continued 151* Not available on all models

152

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface

In stru

m en

t Pan el

Turbo Meter When the turbo charger is producing boost, this meter shows the boost pressure.

When the SPORT mode is turned on while the tachometer appears, the turbo meter appears on the driver information interface.

Shows the current audio information. 2 Audio System Basic Operation P. 253

Turbo Meter

Models with SPORT mode

Audio

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface In

stru m

en t Pan

el

Shows the traffic sign recognition system. 2 Traffic Sign Recognition System P. 498

Appears when any of the rear seat belts are latched or unlatched.

2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 39

Traffic Sign Recognition System

Rear Seat Belt Reminder

153Continued

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface

154

In stru

m en

t Pan el

1Driver Attention Monitor

The Driver Attention Monitor cannot always detect if the driver is tired or inattentive. Regardless of the systems feedback, if you are feeling tired, stop in a safe location and rest for as long as needed.

The Driver Attention Monitor analyzes steering inputs to determine if the vehicle is being driven in a manner consistent with drowsy or inattentive driving. If it determines that the vehicle is being driven in such a manner, it will display the degree of the drivers attention on the driver information interface.

When you select Driver Attention on the driver information interface, bars on it light up in white to indicate the degree of the drivers attention.

2 Accessing contents in the main display P. 140

Driver Attention Monitor

Driver Information Interface

Left Selector Wheel

(home) Button

Level

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface In

stru m

en t Pan

el

If two bars light up, the Driver Attention Level Low message will appear.

If one bar lights up, the Driver Attention Level Low. Time For A Break message will appear, a beep will sound, and the steering wheel will vibrate. If this message appears, stop in a safe location and rest for as long as needed. The message will disappear when the left selector wheel is pressed or when the system has determined that the driver is driving normally. If the driver does not take a break and the monitor continues to detect that the driver is very tired, the message will appear again after approximately 15 minutes, accompanied by a beep and steering wheel vibrations. The message does not appear when the traveling time is 30 minutes or less.

155Continued

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface

156

In stru

m en

t Pan el

1For the Driver Attention Monitor to function:

The bars on the driver information interface remain grayed out unless the Driver Attention Monitor is functioning.

The Driver Attention Monitor resets when: The engine is turned off. The driver unfastens the seat belt and opens the door while the vehicle is stopped.

For the Driver Attention Monitor to function: The vehicle must be traveling above 25 mph (40 km/h). The electric power steering (EPS) system indicator must be off.

Depending on driving conditions or other factors, the Driver Attention Monitor may not function in the following circumstances:

The steering assist function of the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) is active. 2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 486

The condition of the road is poor, e.g. the surface is unpaved or bumpy. It is windy. The driver is frequently operating the vehicle in an assertive manner such as

changing lanes or accelerating.

Customizing You can change the Driver Attention Monitor settings. Select Tactile And Audible Alert, Tactile Alert, or OFF.

2 Customized Features P. 351

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface In

stru m

en t Pan

el

1Driving Support Information

In case ACC with Low Speed Follow is not activated, when the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead becomes too small, the section behind the vehicle icon turns amber and alerts you.

Amber gradation

Shows the interval between your vehicle and the vehicle detected ahead. Informs you whether ACC with Low Speed Follow and/or LKAS is activated or not. If ACC with Low Speed Follow is activated, the set following interval is displayed. If LKAS is activated, the displayed lane marks change to indicate that LKAS is activated.

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 470

2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 486

Driving Support Information

Icon of vehicle ahead Distance of vehicle ahead

When ACC and LKAS is in On

Set Vehicle Interval

ACC on: The section behind the vehicle icon turns green. LKAS on: The lane outlines appear on the display. LKAS starts: The lane lines change to solid ones. LKAS suspend: The lane lines change to dotted ones.

Continued 157

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface

158

In stru

m en

t Pan el

1Safety Support

If a system is indicated by the color amber, have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

To turn on or off each system, first rotate the left selector wheel to switch displays. From the next display you can select which system to turn on or off.

2 RDM On and Off P. 496 2 CMBSTM On and Off P. 459 2 Blind spot information System On and Off

P. 452 2 System On and Off P. 467

You can also confirm the status of each function by the color of the safety support indicator.

2 Safety Support Indicator (Amber) P. 105 2 Safety Support Indicator (Green/Gray)

P. 108

Even when the Low Speed Braking Control icon is green, if the parking sensor is turned off for the rear only, the brake assist will not operate when reversing.

2 Turning off All Rear Sensors P. 524

Models with Low Speed Braking Control

Indicates the status of RDM, CMBSTM, Low Speed Braking Control* and the blind spot information system*, such as On, Off, or Failure, by color and letters.

The following colors indicate the status of any of the above mentioned systems: Green: The system is on. Gray: The system is off. Amber: There is a problem with the system.

Safety Support

Area Info for CMBSTM

CMBSTM Icon and Status Info

Area Info for blind spot information system* Blind spot

information system Icon and Status Info*Low Speed

Braking Control Icon and Status Info*

Area Info for Low Speed Braking Control*

RDM Icon and Status Info

Area Info for RDM

* Not available on all models

uuGauges and DisplaysuHead-Up Display* In

stru m

en t Pan

el

1Head-Up Display*

When you unlock and open the drivers door with a remote transmitter or keyless access system, the head-up display adjusts automatically to one of the two preset positions.

Press the button to raise the display.

3

Press the button to lower the display.

4

Head-Up Display*

Shows the current mode for ACC with Low Speed Follow and LKAS, tachometer, traffic sign recognition system, shift position indicator, M (sequential mode*/7- speed manual shift mode*) Indicator/Gear Selection Indicator, compass or turn-by- turn directions along with the vehicle speed. You can choose which item to be displayed using the (HUD) button on the steering wheel. They are displayed when the power mode is in ON.

To turn the head-up display on and off: Press the HUD button on the driver side control panel. The display can be moved up and down to become level with your eyes. To raise or lower the head-up display: Press the or button until the desired position is reached.

3 4

/ Button3 4

HUD Button

Head-Up Display

159Continued* Not available on all models

160

uuGauges and DisplaysuHead-Up Display*

In stru

m en

t Pan el

The display also shows the following warnings. Lane Departure Warning: When your

vehicle is too close to the traffic lane lines, the lane departure warning appears.

2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 486

Head-up Warning Lights: Flash when the BRAKE message appears on the driver information interface.

2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) P. 456

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 470

2 Low Speed Braking Control* P. 465

Lane Departure Warning

* Not available on all models

uuGauges and DisplaysuHead-Up Display* In

stru m

en t Pan

el

, Traffic tion

Tachometer, Shift Position Indicator, M (sequential mode*/7-speed manual shift mode*) Indicator/Gear Selection Indicator, Vehicle Speed, Traffic Sign Recognition System

ehicle ic Sign System

Compass, Vehicle Speed, Traffic Sign Recognition System

Each time you press the (HUD) button on the steering wheel, the head-up display content will change.

To Change Head-Up Display Content

Head-Up Display Current Mode for ACC with Low Speed Follow and the LKAS, Vehicle Speed, Traffic Sign Recognition System

Vehicle Speed Sign Recogni System

Traffic Sign Recognition System, Vehicle Speed

Turn-by-Turn Directions, V Speed, Traff Recognition

(HUD) Button

161Continued* Not available on all models

uuGauges and DisplaysuHead-Up Display*

162

In stru

m en

t Pan el

1Vehicle Speed

Switch between mph and km/h by using the driver information interface or customized features on the audio/information screen.

2 Speed/Distance Units P. 151 2 Customized Features P. 351

Shows your driving speed in mph or km/h.

Shows the number of engine revolutions as a bar graph.

Shows the current shift position. 2 Shift Position Indicator P. 88

Shows the current mode for the sequential mode*/7-speed manual shift mode*.

Shows the current mode for ACC with Low Speed Follow and LKAS. 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 470 2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 486

Vehicle Speed

Tachometer

Shift Position Indicator

M (sequential mode*/7-speed manual shift mode*) Indicator/Gear Selection Indicator

Current Mode for ACC with Low Speed Follow and LKAS

* Not available on all models

uuGauges and DisplaysuHead-Up Display* In

stru m

en t Pan

el

1Navigation

You can select whether the turn-by-turn display comes on during the route guidance.

2 Customized Features P. 351

Turn-by-turn directions may not be available for all apps.

Compass Shows the compass screen.

Turn-by-Turn Directions When driving guidance is provided by the navigation system, Android Auto or Apple CarPlay, turn-by-turn directions to your destination appear.

2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual 2 Android Auto P. 320 2 Apple CarPlay P. 313

Shows the traffic sign recognition system. 2 Traffic Sign Recognition System P. 498

Navigation

Traffic Sign Recognition System

163

164

lank.

This page intentionally left b

* Not available on all m

Controls

This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.

Clock .................................................. 166 Locking and Unlocking the Doors

Key .................................................. 167 Low Keyless Remote Signal Strength ...169 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside .......................................... 170

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside ............................................. 177

Childproof Door Locks ..................... 179 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .......... 180

Opening and Closing the Trunk....... 181 Security System

Immobilizer System .......................... 184 Security System Alarm...................... 185

Windows ........................................... 187

odels

Moonroof* ........................................ 190 Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel ENGINE START/STOP Button............. 191 Turn Signals ..................................... 194 Light Switches.................................. 195 Fog Lights* ...................................... 197 Daytime Running Lights ................... 198 Auto High-Beam.............................. 199 Wipers and Washers ........................ 202 Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button ........................................... 204

Heated Windshield Button ............... 204 Brightness Control ........................... 205 Driving Position Memory System* .... 207 Adjusting the Steering Wheel .......... 209

Mirrors Interior Rearview Mirror ................... 210 Power Door Mirrors ......................... 211

Seats .................................................. 212 Interior Convenience Items.............. 223 Climate Control System

Using Automatic Climate Control .... 240 Automatic Climate Control Sensors... 243

Canadian models

165

166

C o

n tro

ls

Clock

1Clock

The clock is automatically updated through the navigation system, so the time does not need to be adjusted.

You can also adjust the clock by touching the clock displayed on the upper right corner of the display or the Clock icon on the home screen. 1. Touch the clock on the display.

The clock screen of the select face-type appears. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Day & Time. 4. Select Set Date & Time. 5. Select Automatic Date & Time, then select OFF. 6. Select Set Date or Set Time. 7. Adjusting the dates, hours, and minutes by

selecting / . 8. Select Save to set the time.

You can customize the clock display to show the 12 hour clock or 24 hour clock.

2 Customized Features P. 351

You can customize the date display to MM/DD/YYYY, DD/MM/YYYY or YYYY/MM/DD.

2 Customized Features P. 351

Models with navigation system

3 4

Adjusting the Clock You can adjust the time manually in the audio/information screen, with the power mode in ON.

1. Press the , then select Settings. 2. Select System. 3. Select Day & Time. 4. Select Set Date & Time. 5. Select Automatic Date & Time, then

select OFF.

To adjust time: 6. Select Set Time. 7. Selecting / . 8. Select Save to set the time.

To adjust date: 6. Select Set Date. 7. Selecting / . 8. Select Save to set the date.

Adjusting the Time

3 4

3 4

Locking and Unlocking the Doors

C

o n

tro ls

1Key

All the keys have an immobilizer system. The immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle theft.

2 Immobilizer System P. 184

Follow the advice below to prevent damage to the keys: Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in

locations with high temperature or high humidity. Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them. Keep the keys away from liquids, dust and sand. Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the

battery.

If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine may not start, and the remote transmitter may not work. If the keys do not work properly, have them inspected by a dealer.

You can remotely start the engine using the keyless remote.

2 Remote Engine Start* P. 414

Models with remote engine starter

Key This vehicle comes with the following keys:

Use the key to start and stop the engine, lock and unlock all the doors and the fuel fill door, and open the trunk.

Models without keyless access system Models with keyless access system

167Continued* Not available on all models

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey

168

C o

n tro

ls

1Key Number Tag

Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a safe place outside of your vehicle. If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a dealer.

If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine, contact a dealer.

The built-in key can be used to lock/unlock the doors or open the trunk when the keyless remote battery becomes weak and the power door lock/unlock operation is disabled.

To remove the built-in key, slide the release knob and then pull out the key. To reinstall the built-in key, push the built-in key into the keyless remote until it clicks.

Contains a number that you will need if you purchase a replacement key.

Built-in Key

Built-in Key

Release Knob

Key Number Tag

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLow Keyless Remote Signal Strength C

o n

tro ls

1Low Keyless Remote Signal Strength

Communication between the keyless remote and the vehicle consumes the keyless remotes battery. Battery life is about two years, but this varies depending on regularity of use. The battery is consumed whenever the keyless remote is receiving strong radio waves. Avoid placing it near electrical appliances such as televisions and personal computers.

Low Keyless Remote Signal Strength The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the keyless remote to start the engine, lock and unlock* all the doors and the fuel fill door, and open* the trunk.

In the following cases, starting the engine, locking/unlocking* the doors/fuel fill door, or opening* the trunk may be inhibited or operation may be unstable: Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment. You are carrying the keyless remote together with telecommunications

equipment, laptop computers, cell phones, or wireless devices. A metallic object is touching or covering the keyless remote.

169* Not available on all models

170

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

C o

n tro

ls

1Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

If the interior light switch is in the door activated position, the interior light comes on when you unlock the doors. No doors opened: The light fades out after 30 seconds. Doors relocked: The light goes off immediately.

2 Interior Lights P. 223

1Using the Keyless Access System*

If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the keyless access system, the doors and trunk will automatically relock.

You can lock or unlock doors using the keyless access system only when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF.

Do not leave the keyless remote in the vehicle when you get out. Carry it with you.

Even if you are not carrying the keyless remote, you can lock/unlock the doors while someone else with the keyless remote is within range.

The door may be unlocked if the door handle is covered with water in heavy rain or in a car wash if the keyless remote is within range.

If you grip a front door handle or touch a door lock sensor wearing gloves, the door sensor may be slow to respond or may not respond by unlocking or locking the doors.

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

When you carry the keyless remote, you can lock/unlock the doors and fuel fill door, and open the trunk. You can lock/unlock the doors, fuel fill door within a radius of about 32 inches (80 cm) of the outside door handle. You can open the trunk within about 32 inches (80 cm) radius from the trunk release button.

Locking the doors Touch the door lock sensor on the front door. u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper

sounds; all the doors and fuel fill door lock; and the security system sets.

Using the Keyless Access System*

Door Lock Sensor

* Not available on all models

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside C

o n

tro ls

1Using the Keyless Access System*

After locking the door, you have up to 2 seconds during which you can pull the door handle to confirm whether the door is locked. If you need to unlock the door immediately after locking it, wait at least 2 seconds before gripping the handle, otherwise the door will not unlock.

The door might not open if you pull it immediately after gripping the door handle. Grip the handle again and confirm that the door is unlocked before pulling the handle.

Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may not be able to lock/unlock the doors with the keyless remote if it is above or below the outside handle.

The keyless remote may not operate if it is too close to the door and door glass.

The light flash, beep and door unlock mode settings can be customized using the audio/information screen.

2 Customized Features P. 351

Unlocking the doors and trunk Grab the drivers door handle: u The drivers door and fuel fill door

unlocks. u Some exterior lights flash twice and the

beeper sounds twice. Grab the front passengers door handle: u All the doors and fuel fill door unlock. u Some exterior lights flash twice and the

beeper sounds twice. Press the trunk release button: u The trunk unlocks and opens. u A beeper will sound. 2 Using the Trunk Release Button* P. 182

Trunk Release Button

Continued 171* Not available on all models

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

172

C o

n tro

ls

1Locking the doors (Walk away auto lock)

The auto lock function is set to OFF as the factory default setting. The auto lock function can be set to ON using the audio/information screen. If you set the auto lock function to ON using the audio/information screen, only the keyless remote that was used to unlock the drivers door prior to the setting change can activate auto lock.

2 Customized Features P. 351

After the auto lock function has been activated, when you stay within the locking/unlocking operation range, the indicator on the keyless remote will continue to flash until the doors are locked.

When you stay beside the vehicle within the operation range, the doors will automatically lock approximately 30 seconds after the auto lock function activating beeper sounds.

When you open a door after the auto lock function activating beeper sounds, the auto lock function will be canceled.

Under the following circumstances, the auto lock function will not activate: The keyless remote is inside the vehicle. uThe beeper will not sound. The keyless remote is taken out of its operational

range before all the doors are closed. uThe beeper will sound.

Locking the doors (Walk away auto lock)

When you walk away from the vehicle with all doors closed while carrying the keyless remote, the doors will automatically lock. The auto lock function activates when all doors are closed, and the keyless remote is within about 5 feet (1.5 m) radius of the outside door handle. Exit vehicle while carrying keyless remote and close door(s). 1. While within about 5 feet (1.5 m) radius of

the vehicle. u The beeper sounds; the auto lock

function will be activated. 2. Carry the keyless remote beyond about 5

feet (1.5 m) from the vehicle and remain outside this range for 2 or more seconds. u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper

sounds; all doors will then lock.

The activation range of the auto lock function is about 5 feet (1.5 m)

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside C

o n

tro ls

1Locking the doors (Walk away auto lock)

The auto lock function does not operate when any of the following conditions are met. The keyless remote is inside the vehicle. A door or the hood is not closed. The power mode is set to any mode other than

OFF. The keyless remote is not located within a radius of

about 5 feet (1.5 m) from the vehicle when you get out of the vehicle and close the doors.

Auto lock function operation stop beeper After the auto lock function has been activated, the auto lock operation stop beeper sounds for approximately two seconds in the following cases. The keyless remote is put inside the vehicle through

a window. You are located too close to the vehicle. The keyless remote is put inside the trunk.

If the warning beeper sounds, check that you are carrying the keyless remote. Then, open/close a door and confirm the auto lock activation beeper sounds once.

To temporarily deactivate the function: 1. Set the power mode to OFF. 2. Open the drivers door. 3. Using the master door lock switch, operate

the lock as follows: Lock Unlock Lock Unlock. u The beeper sounds and the function is

deactivated.

To restore the function: Set the power mode to ON. Lock the vehicle without using the auto lock

function. With the keyless remote on you, move out

of the auto lock function operation range. Open any door.

Continued 173

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

174

C o

n tro

ls

1Using the Remote Transmitter

If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter, the doors will automatically relock. You can change the relock timer setting.

2 Customized Features P. 351

You can lock or unlock doors using the remote transmitter only when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF.

The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so the operating range may vary depending on the surroundings.

The remote transmitter will not lock the vehicle when a door is open.

If the distance at which the remote transmitter works varies, the battery is probably low. If the LED does not come on when you press a button, the battery is dead.

2 Replacing the Remote Battery P. 586

You can customize the door unlock mode setting. 2 Customized Features P. 351

Locking the doors Press the lock button. Once: u Some exterior lights flash, all the doors

and fuel fill door lock, and the security system sets.

Twice (within five seconds after the first push): u Some exterior lights flash, the beeper

sounds and verifies the security system is set.

Unlocking the doors Press the unlock button. Once: u Some exterior lights flash twice, and the

drivers door and fuel fill door unlocks. Twice: u Some exterior lights flash twice, and the

remaining doors unlock.

Using the Remote Transmitter

LED

Unlock Button

Lock Button

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside C

o n

tro ls

1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key

When you lock the drivers door with a key, all the other doors and the fuel fill door lock at the same time. When unlocking, the drivers door unlocks first. Turn the key a second time within a few seconds to unlock the remaining doors.

You can customize the door unlock mode setting. 2 Customized Features P. 351

If the lock or unlock button of the keyless remote does not work, use the key instead.

Fully insert the key and turn it.

Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key

Lock

Unlock

Continued 175

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

176

C o

n tro

ls

1Locking a Door Without Using a Key

When you lock the drivers door or lock the passengers door using the master door lock switch, all the other doors and the fuel fill door lock at the same time.

Before locking a door, make sure that the key is not inside the vehicle.

If you do not have the key on you, or if for some reason you cannot lock a door using the key, you can lock the door without it.

Locking the front doors Push the lock tab forward a or push the master door lock switch in the lock direction b, and close the door.

Locking the rear doors Push the lock tab forward and close the door.

Lockout prevention system The doors cannot be locked when the keyless remote is inside the vehicle.

Locking a Door Without Using a Key

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside C

o n

tro ls

1Using the Lock Tab

When you lock the door using the lock tab on the drivers door, all of the other doors and the fuel fill door lock at the same time. When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the drivers door, only the drivers door will unlock.

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

Locking a door Push the lock tab forward.

Unlocking a door Pull the lock tab rearward.

Using the Lock Tab

To Unlock

Lock TabTo Lock

177Continued

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

178

C o

n tro

ls

1Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle

The front door inner handles are designed to allow front seat occupants to open the door in one motion. However, this feature requires that front seat occupants never pull a front door inner handle while the vehicle is in motion.

Children should always ride in a rear seat where childproof door locks are provided.

2 Childproof Door Locks P. 179

Pull the front door inner handle. u The door unlocks and opens in one

motion.

Unlocking and opening the drivers door from the inner handle unlocks all the other doors and the fuel fill door.

To avoid all the doors unlocking, use the lock tab on the drivers door to unlock, then lock again before opening the door. u This setting works for one time only. If you do not want all the doors to unlock

all the time, customize the Auto Door Unlock setting to OFF using the audio/ information screen. 2 Customized Features P. 351

Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle

Inner Handle

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuChildproof Door Locks C

o n

tro ls

1Childproof Door Locks

To open the door from the inside when the childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the unlock position, lower the rear window, put your hand out of the window, and pull the outside door handle.

Press the master door lock switch in as shown to lock or unlock all the doors and the fuel fill door.

Childproof Door Locks The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside regardless of the position of the lock tab.

Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock position, and close the door.

When opening the door Open the door using the outside door handle.

Using the Master Door Lock Switch

To Unlock

Master Door Lock Switch

To Lock

Setting the Childproof Door Locks

Unlock

Lock

179

180

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking

C o

n tro

ls

1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking

You can turn off or change to another auto door locking/unlocking setting using the audio/ information screen.

2 Customized Features P. 351

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Your vehicle locks or unlocks all doors automatically when a certain condition is met.

Drive lock mode All doors lock when the vehicles speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).

Drivers door open mode All doors unlock when the drivers door is opened.

Auto Door Locking

Auto Door Unlocking

Opening and Closing the Trunk

C

o n

tro ls

Precautions for Opening/Closing the Trunk Opening the trunk Open the trunk all the way. u If it is not fully opened, the trunk lid may begin to close under its own weight.

Closing the trunk Keep the trunk lid closed while driving to: u Avoid possible damage. u Prevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle. 2 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 78

Using the Trunk Opener Press and hold the trunk opener on the drivers door to unlock and open the trunk.

2 If You Cannot Open the Trunk P. 628

Trunk Opener

181

182

uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuUsing the Trunk Release Button*

C o

n tro

ls

1Using the Trunk Release Button*

If you forget the keyless remote inside, the beeper will sound and the trunk will not close.

A person who is not carrying the keyless remote can unlock the trunk if a person who is carrying it is within range.

If the beeper sounds after you close the trunk, move the keyless remote away from the trunk and close again.

The keyless remote may not operate if it is too close to the trunk.

1Using the Remote Transmitter

If the drivers door is locked, the trunk will automatically lock when you close it. Otherwise, you will have to lock it manually.

Using the Trunk Release Button*

Push up the release button on the trunk lid after all the doors are unlocked.

2 If You Cannot Open the Trunk P. 628

Even if the trunk is locked, you can open the trunk if you carry the keyless remote. u Some exterior lights flash twice and the

beeper sounds.

Using the Remote Transmitter Press the trunk release button for approximately one second to unlock and open the trunk.

Trunk Release Button

Trunk Release Button

* Not available on all models

uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuTrunk Main Switch* C

o n

tro ls

1Trunk Main Switch*

If you need to give the key to someone else, remove the built-in key from the keyless remote by sliding the release knob, and give the keyless remote as a valet key.

1Emergency Trunk Opener

Parents should decide if their children should be shown how to use this feature.

Trunk Main Switch*

The trunk main switch disables the trunk release button on the remote transmitter and the trunk release button on the trunk lid and trunk opener on the drivers door to protect luggage in the trunk. 1. Make sure the rear seat-back is not folded

down. 2. Turn off the trunk main switch in the glove

box. 3. Lock the glove box.

Emergency Trunk Opener The trunk release lever allows you to open the trunk from inside for your safety.

Slide the release lever in the direction of the arrow.

ON

OFF

Main Switch

Lever

183* Not available on all models

184

C o

n tro

ls

Security System

1Immobilizer System

NOTICE Leaving the key in the vehicle can result in theft or accidental movement of the vehicle. Always take the key with you whenever you leave the vehicle unattended.

Do not alter the system or add other devices to it. Doing so may damage the system and make your vehicle inoperable.

Apply and hold the brake pedal before turning the vehicle on the first time after the battery has been disconnected.

Canadian models

Immobilizer System This system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from starting the engine.

Pay attention to the following when pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button: Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ENGINE START/

STOP button. Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object. Do not bring a key from another vehicles immobilizer system near the ENGINE

START/STOP button.

Do not put the key near magnetic items. Electronic device, such as televisions and audio systems emit strong magnetic fields. Note that even a key chain can become magnetic.

uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm C

o n

tro ls

1Security System Alarm

Do not alter the system or add other devices to it. Doing so may damage the system and make your vehicle inoperable.

The security system alarm continues for a maximum of two minutes until the security system alarm deactivates.

Do not set the security system alarm when someone is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can accidentally activate when: Unlocking the door with the lock tab. Opening the trunk with the trunk opener or the

emergency trunk opener. Opening the hood with the hood release.

Taking the transmission out of (P.

If the battery goes dead after you have set the security system alarm, the security alarm may go off once the battery is recharged or replaced. If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by unlocking a door using the key, remote transmitter, or keyless access system*.

Continuously variable transmission models

Security System Alarm The security system alarm activates when the trunk, hood or doors are forcibly opened. The alarm does not activate if the trunk or doors are opened with the key, remote transmitter, or keyless access system*. However, the alarm activates if a door is opened with the key and then the transmission is taken out of (P (continuously variable transmission models) or the hood is opened before the power mode is in ON.

When the security system alarm activates The horn sounds intermittently, and some exterior lights flash.

To deactivate the security system alarm Unlock the vehicle using the key, remote transmitter or keyless access system*, or set the power mode to ON. The system, along with the horn and flashing lights, is deactivated.

Setting the security system alarm The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have been met: The power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF. The hood is closed. All doors and trunk are locked from outside with the key, remote transmitter, or

keyless access system*.

When the security system alarm sets The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks and the blinking interval changes after about 15 seconds.

To cancel the security system alarm The security system alarm is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the key, remote transmitter or keyless access system*, or when the power mode is set to ON. The security system alarm indicator goes off at the same time.

185Continued* Not available on all models

186

uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm

C o

n tro

ls

The panic button on the remote transmitter

If you press the panic button for approximately one second, the following will occur for about 30 seconds: The horn sounds. Some exterior lights flash.

Canceling panic mode Press any button on the remote transmitter. Set the power mode to ON.

Panic Mode

Panic Button

Windows

C

o n

tro ls

1Windows

The power windows can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF. Opening either front door cancels this function.

Auto Reverse If a power window senses resistance when closing automatically, it will stop closing and reverse direction.

The drivers window auto reverse function is disabled when you continuously pull up the switch.

The auto reverse function stops sensing when the window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.

While driving with any of the windows open, you may hear a booming, throbbing, or helicopter-type noise or pressure. This is called wind buffeting. This is a normal occurrence that can be minimized.

If you hear a wind buffeting noise with any of the windows open, lower all of the other windows slightly or open the moonroof*.

3WARNING Closing a power window on someones hands or fingers can cause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers are away from the windows before closing them.

Opening/Closing the Power Windows The power windows can be opened and closed when the power mode is in ON, using the switches on the doors.

The drivers side switches can be used to open and close all the windows. The power window lock button on the drivers side must be switched off (indicator off) to open and close the windows from anywhere other than the drivers seat.

When the power window lock button is pressed, the indicator comes on and you can only operate the drivers window. Turn the power window lock button on (indicator on) if a child is in the vehicle.

Manual operation To open: Push the switch down lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached. To close: Pull the switch up lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached.

Automatic operation To open: Push the switch down firmly. To close: Pull the switch up firmly.

The window opens or closes completely. To stop the window at any time, push or pull the switch briefly.

Opening/Closing the Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function

Power Window Lock Button

Indicator

Drivers Window Switch

Front Passengers Window Switch

187Continued* Not available on all models

uuWindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows

188

C o

n tro

ls

1Opening the Windows with the Keyless Remote

If you open the windows with the keyless remote, the moonroof will open automatically along with them.

Models with moonroof

To open: Push the switch down. To close: Pull the switch up.

Release the switch when the window reaches the desired position.

To open: Press the unlock button, and then within 10 seconds, press it again and hold it.

If the windows stop midway, repeat the procedure.

Opening/Closing the Windows without Auto-Open/Close Function

Close

Open

Opening the Windows with the Keyless Remote

Unlock Button

uuWindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows C

o n

tro ls

1Opening/Closing the Windows with the Key

If you open/close the windows with the key, the moonroof will open/close automatically along with them.

Models with moonroof

To open: Unlock the drivers door with the key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the central position, turn the key in the unlock direction and hold it there. To close: Lock the drivers door with the key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the central position, turn the key in the lock direction and hold it there.

Release the key to stop the windows at the desired position. If you want further adjustment, repeat the same operation.

Opening/Closing the Windows with the Key

Close

Open

189

190

C o

n tro

ls

Moonroof*

1Moonroof*

NOTICE Opening the moonroof in below freezing temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice can damage the moonroof panel or motor.

The moonroof can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you set the power mode to OFF. Opening either front door cancels this function.

When resistance is detected, the auto reverse function causes the moonroof to change directions, then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers, are clear of the moonroof.

You can use the remote transmitter or the key to operate the moonroof.

2 Opening the Windows with the Keyless Remote P. 188

2 Opening/Closing the Windows with the Key P. 189

3WARNING Opening or closing the moonroof on someones hands or fingers can cause serious injury.

Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of the moonroof before opening or closing it.

Opening/Closing the Moonroof You can operate the moonroof when the power mode is in ON. Use the switch in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof.

Automatic operation To open: Pull the switch back firmly. To close: Push the switch forward firmly.

The moonroof automatically opens or closes all the way. To stop the moonroof midway, pull or push the switch briefly.

Manual operation To open: Pull the switch back lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached. To close: Push the switch forward lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached.

Tilting the moonroof up To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof switch. To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then release.

Using the Moonroof Switch

Open

Close Tilt

* Not available on all models

Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel

C

o n

tro ls

1ENGINE START/STOP Button

ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range You can start the engine when the keyless remote is inside the vehicle.

If the battery of the keyless remote is getting low, the engine may not start when you push the ENGINE START/STOP button. If the engine does not start, refer to the following link.

2 If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak P. 604

The engine may also run if the keyless remote is close to the door or window, even if it is outside the vehicle.

ON mode: The ENGINE START/STOP button is red when the engine is running.

Operating Range

ENGINE START/STOP Button

*1: Continuously variable transmission models for Canadian models *2: U.S. models

Changing the Power Mode

Continuously Variable Transmission Automatic Transmission

VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) The button is off. The steering wheel is locked*1. The power to all electrical components is turned off.

Press the button without the transmission in (P.

Put the transmission into (P then press the button.

Press the button.

Without pressing the brake pedal

Without pressing the brake pedal

ACCESSORY The button blinks (in red). Operate the audio system and other accessories in this position.

ON The button blinks (in red). All electrical components can be used.

Put the transmission into (P *2.

*2

191Continued

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button

192

C o

n tro

ls

1Changing the Power Mode

If the power mode does not change from VEHICLE OFF to ACCESSORY, press the ENGINE START/STOP button while moving the steering wheel left and right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing the mode to change.

Do not leave the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON when you get out.

Continuously variable transmission models for Canadian models

If you leave the vehicle for 30 to 60 minutes with the transmission in (P and the

power mode in ACCESSORY, the vehicle automatically goes into the mode similar to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to avoid draining the battery.

When in this mode: The steering wheel does not lock. You cannot lock or unlock doors with the remote transmitter or the keyless access system. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice to switch the mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

If you open the drivers door when the power mode is set to ACCESSORY, a warning buzzer sounds.

Automatic Power Off

Power Mode Reminder

Continuously variable transmission models for Canadian models

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button C

o n

tro ls

1Keyless Remote Reminder

When the keyless remote is within the systems operational range, and the drivers door is closed, the warning function cancels.

If the keyless remote is taken out of the vehicle after the engine has been started, you can no longer change the ENGINE START/STOP button mode or restart the engine. Always make sure if the keyless remote is in your vehicle when you operate the ENGINE START/STOP button.

Removing the keyless remote from the vehicle through a window does not activate the warning buzzer.

Do not put the keyless remote on the dashboard or in the glove box. It may cause the warning buzzer to go off. Under some other conditions that can prevent the vehicle from locating the keyless remote, the warning buzzer may also go off even if the keyless remote is within the systems operational range.

When the power mode is set to any mode other than OFF and you remove the keyless remote from the vehicle and shut the door, an alarm will sound. If the alarm continues to sound, place the keyless remote in another location.

When the power mode is in ACCESSORY

The alarm will sound from outside the vehicle.

When the power mode is in ON An alarm will sound both inside and outside the vehicle. In addition, a warning indicator will appear on the instrument panel.

Keyless Remote Reminder

193

194

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals

C o

n tro

ls

1Turn Signals

The turn signal indicator on the instrument panel will blink when the external turn signal blinks.

2 Indicators P. 82

Turn Signals The turn signals can be used when the power mode is in ON.

(A): Turn signal Push the lever up or down based on the direction you want to turn, and the turn signal will blink.

(B): One-touch turn signal When you lightly push the lever up or down and release it, the turn signal will blink 3 times.

(A)

(B)

(A)

(B)

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches C

o n

tro ls

1Light Switches

If you leave the power mode in VEHICLE OFF while the lights are on, a chime sounds when the drivers door is opened.

When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the instrument panel will be on.

2 Lights On Indicator P. 97

Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off because it will cause the battery to discharge.

If you sense that the level of the headlights is abnormal, have the vehicle inspected by a dealer.

Light Switches

Rotating the light switch turns the lights on and off, regardless of the power mode setting. High beams Push the lever forward until you hear a click. Low beams When in high beams, pull the lever back to return to low beams. Flashing the high beams Pull the lever back, and release it.

Lights off Turn the lever to OFF either when: The transmission is in (P . The parking brake is applied.

To turn the lights on again, turn the lever to OFF to cancel the lights off mode. Even if you do not cancel the lights off mode, the lights come on automatically when: The transmission is taken out of (P and the

parking brake is released. The vehicle starts to move.

Manual Operation

High Beams

Flashing the high beams Low Beams

Turns on parking, side marker, tail, and rear license plate lights

Turns on headlights, parking, side marker, tail, and rear license plate lights

U.S. models

High Beams

Flashing the high beams Low Beams

Turns on parking, side marker, tail, and rear license plate lights

Turns on headlights, parking, side marker, tail, and rear license plate lights

Canadian models Canadian models

195Continued

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches

196

C o

n tro

ls

1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)

We recommend that you turn on the lights manually when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas such as long tunnels or parking facilities.

The light sensor is in the location shown below. Do not cover this light sensor with anything; otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not work properly.

Light Sensor

Models without automatic intermittent wipers

Light Sensor

Models with automatic intermittent wipers

Automatic lighting control can be used when the power mode is in ON.

When the light switch is in AUTO, the headlights and other exterior lights will switch on and off automatically depending on the ambient brightness.

The headlights comes on when you unlock a door in dark areas with the headlight switch in AUTO. u Once you lock the door, the headlights

will go off.

Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)

U.S. models

Canadian models

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights* C

o n

tro ls

1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)

You can adjust the auto light sensitivity as follows:

2 Customized Features P. 351

Setting The exterior lights come on when the ambient light is at

Max High Mid Low Min

U.S. models

Bright

Dark

1Headlight Integration with Wipers

This feature activates while the headlights are off in AUTO. The instrument panel brightness does not change when the headlights come on.

At dark ambient light levels, the automatic lighting control feature turns on the headlights, regardless of the number of wiper sweeps.

1Automatic Lighting Off Feature

You can change the headlight auto off timer setting. 2 Customized Features P. 351

The headlights automatically come on when the wipers are used several times within a certain number of intervals with the headlight switch in AUTO. The headlights automatically go off a few minutes later if the wipers are stopped.

The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off 15 seconds after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF, take the keyless remote with you, and close the drivers door.

If you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF with the headlight switch on, but do not open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (three minutes, if the switch is in the AUTO position).

The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the drivers door. If you unlock the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the drivers door, you will hear a reminder chime alerting you that the lights are on.

Fog Lights*

When the low beam headlights are on, turn the fog light switch on to use the fog lights.

Headlight Integration with Wipers

Automatic Lighting Off Feature

Fog Light Switch

197* Not available on all models

198

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDaytime Running Lights

C o

n tro

ls

Daytime Running Lights The parking/daytime running lights come on when the following conditions have been met:

The power mode is in ON. The headlight switch is off, or in . The parking brake is released.

The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Setting the power mode to VEHICLE OFF will turn off the daytime running lights.

The daytime running lights are off once the headlight switch is turned on, or when the head light switch is in AUTO and it is getting darker outside.

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam C

o n

tro ls

1Auto High-Beam

The auto high-beam system does not always operate in every situation. This system is just for assisting the driver. Always observe your surroundings and switch the headlights between high beam and low beam manually if necessary.

If you find the timing of beam changes inconvenient for driving, change the headlight beams manually.

The range and the distance at which the camera can recognize varies depending on conditions surrounding your vehicle.

Regarding the handling of the camera mounted to the inside of the windshield, refer to the following.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 504

For the auto high-beam to work properly: Do not place an object that reflects light on the

dashboard. Keep the windshield around the camera clean. When cleaning the windshield, be careful not to

apply the windshield cleanser to the camera lens. Do not attach an object, sticker or film to the area

around the camera. Do not touch the camera lens.

If the camera receives a strong impact, or repairing of the area near the camera is required, consult a dealer.

Auto High-Beam The front sensor camera detects the light sources ahead of the vehicle such as the lights of a preceding or oncoming vehicle, or street lights. When you are driving at night, the system automatically switches the headlights between low beam and high beam depending on the situation.

When all of the following conditions have been met, the auto high-beam indicator comes on and the auto high-beam is activated.

The power mode is in ON. The light switch is in AUTO. The lever is in the low beam position. The headlights have been automatically

activated. It is dark outside the vehicle.

If the auto high-beam indicator does not come on even when all the conditions have been met, carry out the following procedure and the indicator will come on. Pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams then release it while driving.

How to Use the Auto High-Beam

Front Sensor Camera

Auto High-Beam Indicator

Light Switch

199Continued

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam

200

C o

n tro

ls

1How to Use the Auto High-Beam

In the following cases, the auto high-beam system may not switch the headlights properly or the switching timing may be changed. In case of the automatic switching operation does not fit for your driving habits, please switch the headlights manually.

The brightness of the lights from the preceding or oncoming vehicle is intense or poor.

Visibility is poor due to the weather (rain, snow, fog, windshield frost, etc.).

Surrounding light sources, such as street lights, electric billboards and traffic lights are illuminating the road ahead.

The brightness level of the road ahead constantly changes.

The road is bumpy or has many curves. A vehicle suddenly appears in front of you, or a

vehicle in front of you is not in the preceding or oncoming direction.

Your vehicle is tilted with a heavy load in the rear. A traffic sign, mirror, or other reflective object

ahead is reflecting strong light toward the vehicle. The oncoming vehicle frequently disappears under

roadside trees or behind median barriers. The preceding or oncoming vehicle is a motorcycle,

bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small vehicle.

The auto high-beam system keeps the headlight low beam when: Windshield wipers are operating at a high speed. The camera has detected a dense fog.

Automatic switching between high-beam and low-beam When auto high-beam is active, the headlights switch between high beam and low beam based on the following conditions.

Manual switching between high-beam and low-beam If you want to manually switch the headlights between high beam and low beam, follow either of the procedures below. Note that when you do this, the auto high- beam indicator will turn off and the auto high-beam will be deactivated.

Using the lever: Pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams then release it within about one second while driving. u To reactivate the auto high-beam, pull the lever toward you for flashing the

high beams then release it while driving. The auto high-beam indicator will come on.

Using the light switch: Turn the light switch to . u To reactivate the auto high-beam, turn the light switch to AUTO when the

lever is in the low beam position, the auto high-beam indicator will come on.

Switching to high beam: Switching to low beam:

All of the following conditions must be met before the high beams turn on. Your vehicle speed is 25 mph (40

km/h) or more. There are no preceding or

oncoming vehicle with headlights or taillights turned on.

There are few street lights on the road ahead.

One of the following conditions must be met before the low beams turn on. Your vehicle speed is 15 mph (24

km/h) or less. There is a preceding or oncoming

vehicle with headlights or taillights turned on.

There are many street lights on the road ahead.

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam C

o n

tro ls

1How to Use the Auto High-Beam

If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: Camera Temperature Too High message appears: Use the climate control system to cool down the

interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode with the airflow directed toward the camera.

Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield temperature, which cools down the area around the camera.

If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: Clean Front Windshield message appears: Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the

windshield. If the message does not disappear after you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

1How to Turn Off the Auto High-Beam

If you turn the auto high-beam system off, the system does not operate until you turn the system on.

Park in a safe place before turning the system off or on.

You can turn the auto high-beam system off. If you want to turn the system off or on, set the power mode to ON, then carry out the following procedures while the vehicle is stationary.

To turn the system off: With the light switch is in AUTO, pull the lever toward you and hold it for at least 40 seconds. After the auto high-beam indicator light blinks twice, release the lever.

To turn the system on: With the light switch is in AUTO, pull the lever toward you and hold it for at least 30 seconds. After the auto high-beam indicator light blinks once, release the lever.

How to Turn Off the Auto High-Beam

AUTO Position

201

202

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers

C o

n tro

ls

1Wipers and Washers

NOTICE Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry. The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber blades will get damaged.

NOTICE Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out. The pump may get damaged.

The wiper motor may stop motor operation temporarily to prevent an overload. Wiper operation will return to normal within a few minutes, once the circuit has returned to normal.

If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are operating intermittently, the length of the wipe interval shortens. When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operations shortest delay setting ( ) and the LO setting become the same.

NOTICE In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the windshield. Operating the wipers in this condition may damage the wipers. Use the defogger or heated windshield* to warm the windshield, then turn the wipers on.

Models with intermittent time adjustment ring

Wipers and Washers

The windshield wipers and washers can be used when the power mode is in ON.

MIST The wipers run at high speed until you release the lever.

Wiper switch (OFF, INT*1/AUTO*2, LO, HI) Move the lever up or down to change the wiper settings.

Adjusting wiper operation*

Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper operation.

Washer Sprays while you pull the lever toward you. When you release the lever for more than one second, the spray stops, the wipers sweep two or three more times to clear the windshield, then stop.

*1: Models with manual intermittent operation *2: Models with automatic intermittent operation

Windshield Wiper/Washer

MIST

INT*1/AUTO*2

OFF

LO: Low speed wipe

HI: High speed wipe

Pull to use washer.

Intermittent Time Adjustment Ring*

Lower speed, fewer sweeps

Higher speed, more sweeps

* Not available on all models

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers C

o n

tro ls

1Wipers and Washers

If the wipers stop operating due to an obstacle such as the buildup of snow, park the vehicle in a safe place. Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and set the power mode to ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF, then remove the obstacle.

1Automatic Intermittent Wipers*

The rainfall sensor is in the location shown below.

NOTICE AUTO should always be turned OFF before the following situations in order to prevent severe damage to the wiper system: Cleaning the windshield Driving through a car wash No rain present

Rainfall Sensor

When you push the lever down to AUTO, the windshield wipers sweep once, and go into the automatic mode.

The wipers operate intermittently, at low speed, or at high speed and stop in accordance with the amount of rainfall the rainfall sensor detects.

AUTO sensitivity adjustment When the wiper function is set to AUTO, you can adjust the sensitivity of the rainfall sensor (using the adjustment ring) so that wipers will operate in accordance with your preference.

Sensor sensitivity

Automatic Intermittent Wipers*

Adjustment Ring

Low Sensitivity

High Sensitivity

203* Not available on all models

204

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button

C o

n tro

ls

1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button

This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off when the window has been defogged. Also, do not use the system for a long time while the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery, making it difficult to start the engine.

When the power mode is set to ON and the outside temperature is below 41F (5C), the heated door mirror may automatically activate for 10 minutes.

Models with heated door mirror

1Heated Windshield Button

This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off when the window has been deiced. Also, do not use the system for a long period when the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery, making it difficult to start the engine.

Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button Press the rear defogger and heated door mirror button to defog the rear window and mirrors when the power mode is in ON.

The rear defogger and heated door mirror automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes depending on the outside temperature. However, if the outside temperature is 32F (0C) or below, it does not automatically switch off.

Heated Windshield Button Press the heated windshield button to deice the windshield at the wiper park area and along the driver side edge of the windshield when the power mode is in ON. The heated windshield will automatically switch off after 15 minutes.

Canadian models

* Not available on all models

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control C

o n

tro ls

1Brightness Control

The brightness of the instrument panel will be reduced when the following conditions: The power mode is in ON. The light switch is in any position other than off

and it is dark outside.

The brightness can be set differently for when the exterior lights are on, and when they are off.

Brightness Control

When the power mode is in ON, you can use the brightness control dial to adjust instrument panel brightness. To brighten: Turn the dial up. To dim: Turn the dial down.

You will hear a beep when the brightness reaches minimum or maximum. Several seconds after adjusting the brightness, you will be returned to the previous screen.

Brightness level indicator The brightness level is shown on the driver information interface while you are adjusting it.

Adjusting the Instrument Panel Brightness

Control Dial

205Continued

206

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control

C o

n tro

ls

When the head-up display is on, press and hold the HUD button until its brightness level indicator on the driver information interface. To brighten: Press the button. To dim: Press the button.

The driver information interface will return to its original state several seconds after you adjust the brightness.

Brightness level indicator The brightness level is shown on the driver information interface while you are adjusting it.

Adjusting the Head-Up Display Brightness*

/ Button3 4

HUD Button

3

4

* Not available on all models

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System* C

o n

tro ls

1Driving Position Memory System*

Using the audio/information screen you can disable the automatic seat adjustment function.

2 Customized Features P. 351

The drivers seat easy exit feature can be turned ON/ OFF.

2 Customized Features P. 351

System Operation The system will not operate if: The vehicle speed is above 2 mph (3 km/h). Either memory position button is pressed while the

seat is in motion. The seat position is adjusted while in operation. The memory 1 or 2 position is set fully to the rear.

The system may not recognize a key if: The key is in close proximity to a cell phone or other

wireless device. Both keys are in the vehicle at the same time. The Driving Position Memory System is disabled in

customized features. Opening driver's door without fully grabbing door

handle.

Driving Position Memory System*

You can store two drivers seat positions (except for power lumbar) with the driving position memory system. When you unlock and open the drivers door with a remote transmitter or keyless access system, the seat adjust automatically to one of the two preset positions.

When you enter the vehicle, the driver information interface briefly shows you which remote transmitter you used to unlock the vehicle. DRIVER 1 transmitter is linked to memory button 1. DRIVER 2 transmitter is linked to memory button 2.

The drivers seat moves rearward depending on the set seating position once you Stop the vehicle. Put the transmission into (P . Turn the engine off. Open the drivers door. Once the power mode is in the ACCESSORY position, the drivers seat moves forward to the DRIVER 1 or 2 preset position.

DRIVER 1 DRIVER 2

207Continued* Not available on all models

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System*

208

C o

n tro

ls

1Storing a Position in Memory

After you press the SET button, the storing operation will be canceled when: You do not press the memory button within five

seconds. You readjust the seat position before the two

beeps. You set the power mode to any position except

ON.

1Recalling the Stored Position

The seat will stop moving if you: Press the SET button or memory button (1 or (2. Adjust the seat position.

1. Set the power mode to ON. Adjust the drivers seat to the desired position.

2. Press the SET button. u You will hear the beeper, and the

memory button indicator light will blink. 3. Press the memory button (1 or (2 within

five seconds of pressing the SET button. u Once the seat position has been

memorized, the indicator light on the button you pressed stays on and you will hear two beeps.

1. Put the transmission into (P . 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Press a memory button ( (1 or (2 ). u You will hear a beep, and the indicator

light will blink.

The seat will automatically move to the memorized position. When it has finished moving, you will hear a beep, and the indicator light stays on.

Storing a Position in Memory

Memory Button 1

Memory Button 2

SET Button

Recalling the Stored Position

Memory Button 1

Memory Button 2

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel C

o n

tro ls

1Adjusting the Steering Wheel

3WARNING Adjusting the steering wheel position while driving may cause you to lose control of the vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel only when the vehicle is stopped.

Adjusting the Steering Wheel The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.

1. While the vehicle is stopped, push the steering wheel adjustment lever down. u The steering wheel adjustment lever is

under the steering column. 2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and

in or out. u Make sure you can see the instrument

panel gauges and indicators. 3. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up

to lock the steering wheel in position. u After adjusting the position, make sure

you have securely locked the steering wheel in place by trying to move it up, down, in, and out.

To adjust

To lock

Lever

209

210

C o

n tro

ls

Mirrors

1Mirrors

Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and adjusted for best visibility.

Adjust the mirrors before you start driving. 2 Seats P. 212

1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror*

The auto dimming function cancels when the transmission is in (R.

Interior Rearview Mirror Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving position.

Flip the tab to switch the position. The night position will help to reduce the glare from headlights behind you when driving after dark.

When you are driving after dark, the automatic dimming rearview mirror reduces the glare from headlights behind you. Press the auto mirror button to turn this function on and off. When activated, the auto indicator comes on.

Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions*

Tab

Daytime Position

Night Position

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror*

Auto Mirror Button

* Not available on all models

uuMirrorsuPower Door Mirrors C

o n

tro ls

Power Door Mirrors You can adjust the door mirrors when the power mode is in ON.

Mirror position adjustment L/R selector switch: Select the left or right mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the switch to the center position. Mirror position adjustment switch: Press the switch left, right, up, or down to move the mirror.

If activated, passenger side door mirror automatically tilts downward when you put the transmission into (R ; this improves close- in visibility on the passenger side of the vehicle when backing up. The mirror automatically returns to its original position when you take the transmission out of (R.

To activate this feature, set the power mode to ON and slide the selector switch to the passenger side.

Selector Switch

Adjustment Switch

Reverse Tilt Door Mirror*

Selector Switch

211* Not available on all models

212

C o

n tro

ls

Seats

1Seats

Always make seat adjustments before driving.

1Front Seats

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and the chest.

3WARNING Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious injury or death if the front airbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from the front airbags as possible while maintaining control of the vehicle.

Front Seats Adjust the drivers seat as far back as possible while allowing you to maintain full control of the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright, well back in the seat and be able to adequately press the pedals without leaning forward, and grip the steering wheel comfortably. The passengers seat should be adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far back from the front airbag in the dashboard as possible.

Adjusting the front power seat(s)*

Move back.

Allow sufficient space.

Adjusting the Seat Positions

Horizontal Position Adjustment

Height Adjustment (Drivers seat only)

Seat-back Angle Adjustment

Drivers seat is shown

* Not available on all models

uuSeatsuFront Seats C

o n

tro ls

Lumbar Support Adjustment Switch*

Press the top: To move the lumbar support up. Press the bottom: To move the lumbar support down. Press the front: To increase the entire lumbar support. Press the rear: To decrease the entire lumbar support.

Lumbar Support Adjustment Switch

213Continued* Not available on all models

uuSeatsuFront Seats

214

C o

n tro

ls

1Adjusting the front manual seat(s)*

Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and forth to make sure it is locked in position.

Adjusting the front manual seat(s)*

Horizontal Position Adjustment Pull up on the bar to move the seat, then release the bar.

Height Adjustment (Driver side only) Pull up or push down the lever to raise or lower the seat.

Seat-back Angle Adjustment Pull up the lever to change the angle.

Drivers seat is shown.

* Not available on all models

uuSeatsuFront Seats C

o n

tro ls

1Adjusting the Seat-Backs

Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the seat-back and your back.

Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag operation.

If you cannot get far enough away from the steering wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend that you investigate whether some type of adaptive equipment may help.

3WARNING Reclining the seat-back too far can result in serious injury or death in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to an upright position, and sit well back in the seat.

Adjust the drivers seat-back to a comfortable, upright position, leaving ample space between your chest and the airbag cover in the center of the steering wheel.

The front seat passenger should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, upright position.

Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the occupants chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.

Adjusting the Seat-Backs

215

216

uuSeatsuRear Seats

C o

n tro

ls

1Folding Down the Rear Seat(s)

The rear seat-back(s*) can be folded down to accommodate bulkier items in the trunk.

Never drive with the seat-back folded down and the trunk lid open.

2 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 78

To lock a seat-back upright, push it backwards until it locks. When returning the seat-back to its original position, push it firmly back. Also, make sure all rear shoulder belts are positioned in front of the seat-back, and the center shoulder belt is re-positioned in the guide.

Make sure that the folded seat-back does not press against the front passenger seat, as this can cause the weight sensors in the front passenger seat to work improperly.

2 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 61

Make sure all items in the trunk or items extending through the opening into the rear seat is properly secured. Loose items can fly forward if you have to brake hard.

The front seat(s) must be far enough forward so they do not interfere with the rear seats as they fold down.

Rear Seats

1. Remove the center shoulder belt from the guide.

2. Pull the release lever in the trunk to release the lock.

3. Fold the seat-back down.

Folding Down the Rear Seat(s)

Guide

Center Shoulder Belt

Release Lever

Release Lever*

* Not available on all models

uuSeatsuRear Seats C

o n

tro ls

1Rear Seat Reminder

When the power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF, the reminder will go off and the function will terminate.

The reminder will not work if the power mode has not been set to ON within 10 minutes of operating the rear doors.

The system does not detect passengers in the rear seats. Instead, it can detect when a rear door is opened and closed, indicating that there may be something in the rear seats.

You can turn off the notification setting. 2 Customized Features P. 351

Models with wireless Apple CarPlay

This feature alerts you to the possible presence of passengers or items in the rear seats before you exit the vehicle. It activates when the vehicle is set to VEHICLE OFF if the rear doors were opened shortly before or after the vehicle was set to ON.

A reminder appears on the driver information interface and an alert will sound when the power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF.

Rear Seat Reminder

217

218

uuSeatsuMaintain a Proper Sitting Position

C o

n tro

ls

1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position

3WARNING Sitting improperly or out of position can result in serious injury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back in the seat, with your feet on the floor.

Maintain a Proper Sitting Position After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the power mode is off.

Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased.

In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an inflating front airbag.

uuSeatsuHead Restraints C

o n

tro ls

1Head Restraints

In order for the head restraint system to work properly: Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or

from the restraint legs. Do not place any objects between an occupant and

the seat-back. Install each restraint in its proper location.

3WARNING Improperly positioning head restraints reduces their effectiveness and increases the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.

Make sure head restraints are in place and positioned properly before driving.

Head Restraints Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints in all seating positions.

Head restraints are most effective for protection against whiplash and other rear- impact crash injuries when the center of the back of the occupants head rests against the center of the restraint. The tops of the occupants ears should be level with the center height of the restraint.

Adjusting the Front and Rear Outer* Head Restraint Positions

Position head in the center of the head restraint.

219Continued* Not available on all models

220

uuSeatsuHead Restraints

C o

n tro

ls

To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward. To lower the head restraint: Push it down while pressing the release button.

Front

Rear

uuSeatsuHead Restraints C

o n

tro ls

1Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints

3WARNING Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the head restraints can result in severe injury during a crash.

Always replace the head restraints before driving.

Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair.

To remove a head restraint: Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then, push the release button and pull the restraint up and out.

To reinstall a head restraint: Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked in position.

Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints

221

222

uuSeatsuArmrest

C o

n tro

ls

Armrest

The console lid can be used as an armrest.

Pull down the armrest in the center backrest.

Using the Front Seat Armrest

Using the Rear Seat Armrest

Interior Convenience Items

C

o n

tro ls

1Interior Light Switches

In the door activated position, the interior lights fade out and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are closed. The lights go off after about 30 seconds in the following situations: When you unlock the drivers door but do not open it. When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF but

do not open a door. You can change the interior lights dimming time.

2 Customized Features P. 351

The interior lights go off immediately in the following situations: When you lock the drivers door. When you close the drivers door in ACCESSORY

mode. When you set the power mode to ON.

To avoid draining the battery, do not leave the interior lights on for an extended length of time when the engine is off.

If you leave any of the doors open in VEHICLE OFF mode, the interior lights go off after about 15 minutes.

Interior Lights

ON The interior lights come on regardless of whether the doors are open or closed. Door activated The interior lights come on in the following situations: When any doors are opened. You unlock the drivers door. When the power mode is set to VEHICLE

OFF. OFF The interior lights remain off regardless of whether the doors are open or closed.

Interior Light Switches

Door Activated Position

OFF

Front*

Door Activated Position

ON

OFF

Rear

223Continued* Not available on all models

uu Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Lights

224

C o

n tro

ls

1Map Light Switches

When the interior light switch is in the door activated position and any door is open, the map light will not go off when you press the lens.

Models with moonroof

The map lights can be turned on and off by pressing the lenses.

Map Light Switches

uu Interior Convenience ItemsuStorage Items C

o n

tro ls

1Glove Box

3WARNING An open glove box can cause serious injury to your passenger in a crash, even if the passenger is wearing the seat belt.

Always keep the glove box closed while driving.

Storage Items

Pull the handle to open the glove box.

You can lock the glove box with the built-in key.

Push the cover to open the pocket.

Glove Box

Glove Box Handle

To Lock

Models with trunk main switch

Center Pocket

225Continued

226

uu Interior Convenience ItemsuStorage Items

C o

n tro

ls

Pull the handle to open the console compartment.

Removable tray The tray in the console compartment is detachable. To remove the tray, simply pull it up.

Console Compartment

uu Interior Convenience ItemsuStorage Items C

o n

tro ls

1Beverage Holders

NOTICE Spilled liquids damage the upholstery, carpeting, and electrical components in the interior.

Be careful when you are using the beverage holders. Hot liquid can scald you.

Front seat beverage holders Are located in the console between the front seats.

Door side beverage holders Are located on the both of front and rear door side pockets.

Beverage Holders

Front

Rear

Continued 227

228

uu Interior Convenience ItemsuStorage Items

C o

n tro

ls

Rear seat beverage holders Fold the armrest down to use the rear seat beverage holders.

uu Interior Convenience ItemsuStorage Items C

o n

tro ls

1Coat Hook

The coat hook is not designed for large or heavy items.

1Cargo Hooks

Heavy objects may damage the hook. Make sure any items put on this hook weigh less than 6.6 lbs (3 kg).

Distribute cargo evenly on the floor of the trunk, placing the heaviest items on the bottom and as far forward as possible.

2 Maximum Load Limit P. 405

There is a coat hook on the rear left grab handle. Pull it down to use it.

The cargo hooks in the trunk can be used to install a net for securing items.

Coat Hook

Cargo Hooks

Continued 229

uu Interior Convenience ItemsuStorage Items

230

C o

n tro

ls

1Sunglasses Holder

Keep the holder closed while driving except when accessing stored items.

To open the sunglasses holder, push and

release the indent. To close, push it again until it latches.

You can store eyeglasses and other small items in this holder.

Sunglasses Holder

Push

uu Interior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items C

o n

tro ls

1Accessory Power Sockets

NOTICE Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter element. This can overheat the power socket.

The accessory power socket is designed to supply power for 12-volt DC accessories that are rated 180 watts (15 amps) or less.

To prevent battery drain, use the power socket only when the engine is running.

When the accessory power socket is not in use, close the cover to prevent any small foreign objects from getting into the accessory power socket.

Other Interior Convenience Items

The accessory power sockets can be used when the power mode is in ACCESSORY or ON.

Center pocket Open the center pocket and the cover to use it.

Console compartment Open the console lid and the cover to use it.

Accessory Power Sockets

231Continued

uu Interior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items

232

C o

n tro

ls

1Wireless Charger*

RF Radiation Exposure Statement: This equipment complies with FCC RF Radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device and its antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

In order to use safely: Remove any metal objects from the charge pad

before charging a device. Do not open the charger case. Do not use the charger if it malfunctions. Contact

your dealer.

If the charger interferes with radio communications, attempt to correct the interference: Press and hold the switch on the charger for a few

seconds to turn off the charger.

appears on the audio/information screen when the device is being charged by the wireless charger.

To use the wireless charger, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON. Charge any devices compatible with Qi wireless charging on the area indicated by the mark as follows:

1. To turn the system on and off, press and hold the (power) button. u When the system is activated, the green

indicator light comes on. 2. Place the device you want to charge on the

charging area. u The system will automatically start

charging the device, and the amber indicator light will come on.

u Make sure that the device is compatible with the system, and placed with the chargeable side in the center of the charging area.

3. When charging is completed, the green indicator light will come on. u Depending on the device, the amber

indicator light will stay on.

Wireless Charger*

Green Indicator Amber Indicator

Charging Area (Power)

Button

* Not available on all models

uu Interior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items C

o n

tro ls

1Wireless Charger*

This system consumes a lot of power. Do not use the system for a long time when the engine is not running. This may weaken the battery, making it difficult to start the engine.

When using the wireless charger, check the users manual that came with the compatible device you want to charge.

3CAUTION Metal objects between the charge pad and the device to be charged will get hot and can burn you. Always remove foreign objects from the

charge pad before charging the device. Be sure the surface is clear of dust and

other debris before charging. Do not spill liquids (i. e. water, drinks,

etc.) on the charger and the device. Do not use oil, grease, alcohol, benzine

or thinner for cleaning the charge pad. Do not cover the system with towels,

clothing, or other objects while charging etc.

Avoid spraying aerosols which may come in contact with the charge pad surface.

When charging does not start Perform one of the solutions in the following table.

Indicator Cause Solution

Green &

Amber

Blinking simulta- neously

There is an obstacle(s) between the charging area and the device.

Remove the obstacle(s).

The device is not within the charging area.

Pick up and reset the device to the center of the charging area where is located.

The temperature of the wireless charger pad increases.

Temporarily suspend charging the device. Wait for temperature to drop and attempt to charge the device again.

Amber Blinking The wireless charger is faulty. Contact a dealer for repairs.

Continued 233* Not available on all models

uu Interior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items

234

C o

n tro

ls

1Wireless Charger*

The wireless charger can support up to 15 W, but the charging rate varies based on the device and other conditions.

NOTICE Do not place any magnetic recording media or precision machines within the charging area while charging. The data on your cards such as credit cards can be lost because of the magnetic effect. Also precision machines such as watches can go wrong.

Qi and marks are the registered trademarks owned by Wireless Power Consortium (WPC).

In the following cases, charging may stop or not start: The device is already fully charged. The temperature of the device is extremely high

while charging. You are at a place that emits strong

electromagnetic waves or noises, such as a TV station, electric power plant, or gas station.

The device has a cover, case or accessories which are not compatible with wireless charging.

A device may not charge if the size or shape of its chargeable side is not appropriate for use with the charging area.

Not all devices are compatible with the system.

During the charging phase, it is normal for the charging area and device to heat up.

* Not available on all models

uu Interior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items C

o n

tro ls

1Wireless Charger*

Charging may be briefly interrupted when: All the doors and the trunk are closed

- to avoid interference with the proper functioning of the keyless access system.

The position of the device is altered.

Do not charge more than one device at a time on a charging area.

If the device becomes too hot and its battery protection function activates, it may charge extremely slowly or no longer charge. The temperature at which the battery protection function activates depends on the device.

Continued 235* Not available on all models

uu Interior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items

236

C o

n tro

ls

1Heated Steering Wheel*

Do not use the heated steering wheel continuously when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.

The power mode must be in ON to use the heated steering wheel.

Press the button on the lower side of the steering wheel.

When a comfortable temperature is reached, press the button again to turn it off.

The heated steering wheel is turned off every time you start the engine, even if you turned it on the last time you drove the vehicle.

Heated Steering Wheel*

Canadian models

* Not available on all models

uu Interior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items C

o n

tro ls

1Front Seat Heaters*

Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.

After a certain period of time, the strength setting for the front seat heaters will automatically be reduced by one level at a time until the front seat heaters shut off. The elapsed time varies according to the interior environment.

3WARNING Heat induced burns are possible when using seat heaters.

Persons with a diminished ability to sense temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes, lowerlimb nerve damage, or paralysis) or with sensitive skin should not use seat heaters.

The power mode must be in ON to use the seat heaters.

Press the seat heater button: Once - The HI setting (three indicators on) Twice - The MID setting (two indicators on) Three times - The LO setting (one indicator on) Four times - The OFF setting (no indicators on)

When the power mode is turned on after it is turned off, the previous setting of front seat heaters are maintained.

Front Seat Heaters*

Continued 237* Not available on all models

uu Interior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items

238

C o

n tro

ls

1Front Seat Heaters and Seat Ventilation*

Do not use the seat heaters and the seat ventilation even in LO when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.

After a certain period of time, the strength setting for the front seat heaters will automatically be reduced by one level at a time until the front seat heaters shut off. The elapsed time varies according to the interior environment.

3WARNING Heat induced burns are possible when using seat heaters.

Persons with a diminished ability to sense temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes, lowerlimb nerve damage, or paralysis) or with sensitive skin should not use seat heaters.

The seat heaters or ventilators can be used when the power mode is in ON. The seat heaters: Use them to warm up the seat. The seat ventilators: Use them when you want to ventilate the surface of the seats. When used with the air conditioning, the surface of the seats will become easier to cool.

Press the seat heater or the seat ventilation button: Once - The HI setting (three indicators on) Twice - The MID setting (two indicators on) Three times - The LO setting (one indicator on) Four times - The OFF setting (no indicators on)

When the power mode is turned on after it is turned off, the previous setting of front seat heaters and ventilation are maintained.

Front Seat Heaters and Seat Ventilation*

* Not available on all models

uu Interior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items C

o n

tro ls

1Rear Seat Heaters*

Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.

After a certain period of time, the strength setting for the rear seat heaters will automatically be reduced by one level at a time until the rear seat heaters shut off. The elapsed time varies according to the interior environment.

3WARNING Heat induced burns are possible when using seat heaters.

Persons with a diminished ability to sense temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes, lowerlimb nerve damage, or paralysis) or with sensitive skin should not use seat heaters.

The power mode must be in ON to use the seat heaters.

There is no heater in the rear center seating position.

Press the seat heater button: Once - The HI setting (three indicators on) Twice - The MID setting (two indicators on) Three times - The LO setting (one indicator on) Four times - The OFF setting (no indicators on)

Rear Seat Heaters*

239* Not available on all models

240

C o

n tro

ls

Climate Control System

1Using Automatic Climate Control

If any buttons are pressed while using the climate control system in auto, the function of the button that was pressed will take priority. The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions unrelated to the button that was pressed will be controlled automatically.

During idle-stops, air-conditioning is suspended, and only the blower remains active. If you do not want air-conditioning suspended, press the Auto Idle Stop OFF button to cancel idle-stop.

To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the fan may not start immediately when the AUTO button is pressed.

If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down more rapidly by partially opening the windows, turning the system on auto, and setting the temperature to low. Change the fresh air mode to recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.

When you set the temperature to the lower or upper limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.

Pressing the button switches the climate control system between on and off. When turned on, the system returns to your last selection.

While ECON mode is active, the climate control system may have reduced cooling performance.

Models with Auto Idle Stop

All models

Using Automatic Climate Control The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select. The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that raises or lowers the interior temperature to your preference as quickly as possible.

Use the system when the engine is running. 1. Press the AUTO button. 2. Adjust the interior temperature using the drivers side or passengers side control

dial. 3. Press the (ON/OFF) button to cancel.

Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes Press the (recirculation) button and switch the mode depending on environmental conditions. Recirculation mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicles interior through the system. Fresh air mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in fresh air mode in normal situations.

Floor and defroster vents

Floor ventsDashboard and floor vents, and back of the center console*

Dashboard vents and back of the center console*

AUTO Button

Drivers Side Temperature Control Dial

(Recirculation) Button

Fan Control Dial

A/C (Air Conditioning) Button

Passengers Side Temperature Control Dial

(ON/OFF) Button

* Not available on all models

uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control C

o n

tro ls

1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows

For your safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the windows before driving.

Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower limit. When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the windshield may fog up.

If you press the button during Auto Idle Stop, the engine restarts automatically.

Models with Auto Idle Stop

1To rapidly defrost the windows

After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode, the windows may fog up from humidity. This impedes visibility.

Pressing the button turns the air conditioning system on and automatically switches the system to fresh air mode.

Press the button again to turn off, the system returns to the previous settings.

To rapidly defrost the windows 1. Press the button. 2. Press the button.

Defrosting the Windshield and Windows

Continued 241

uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control

242

C o

n tro

ls

1Synchronization Mode

When you press the button, the system changes to synchronization mode.

When the system is in dual mode, the driver side temperature and the passenger side temperature can be set separately.

You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver side and the passenger side in synchronization mode.

1. Press the SYNC button. u The system will switch to the synchronization mode.

2. Adjust the temperature using drivers side temperature control dial.

Press the SYNC button or adjust the interior temperature using the passengers side control dial to return to dual mode.

Synchronization Mode

uuClimate Control SystemuAutomatic Climate Control Sensors C

o n

tro ls

Automatic Climate Control Sensors The automatic climate control system is equipped with sensors. Do not cover or spill any liquid on them.Sensor

Sensor

243

244

lank.

This page intentionally left b

* Not available on all m

Features

This chapter describes how to operate technology features.

Audio System About Your Audio System................ 246 USB Ports ......................................... 247 Audio System Theft Protection ......... 249 Audio Remote Controls.................... 250

Audio System Basic Operation ........ 253 Audio/Information Screen ................ 254 System Updates* ............................. 266 Adjusting the Sound ........................ 272 Display Setup ................................... 273 Voice Control Operation .................. 275 Playing AM/FM Radio ....................... 278 Playing SiriusXM Radio* ................. 282 Playing an iPod ................................ 293

odels

Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 296 Playing Bluetooth Audio................. 299 HondaLink ..................................... 301 HondaLink Service* ........................ 305 Wi-Fi Connection ............................. 310 AT&T Hotspot* ................................ 311 Siri Eyes Free* .................................. 312 Apple CarPlay .................................. 313 Android Auto................................... 320

Audio Error Messages ...................... 327 General Information on the Audio System ............................................. 329

Customized Features ........................ 351 HomeLink Universal Transceiver*.....371

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink............. 374 Refuel Recommend .............................. 400

245

246

Featu res

Audio System

1About Your Audio System

iPod, iPhone and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc.

State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.

SiriusXM Radio* is available on a subscription basis only. For more information on SiriusXM Radio*, contact a dealer.

2 General Information on the Audio System P. 329

SiriusXM Radio* is available in the United States and Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico.

SiriusXM* is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Radio, Inc.

About Your Audio System The audio system features AM/FM radio and SiriusXM Radio* service. It can also play USB flash drives, iPod, iPhone, and Bluetooth devices.

You can operate the audio system from the buttons and knobs on the panel, the remote controls on the steering wheel, or the icons on the touchscreen interface.

Remote Controls

iPod

USB Flash Drive

* Not available on all models

uuAudio SystemuUSB Ports Featu

res

1USB Ports

Do not leave the iPod or USB flash drive in the vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may damage it.

We recommend that you use a USB cable if you are attaching a USB flash drive to the USB port.

Do not connect the iPod or USB flash drive using a hub.

Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard disk drive, as the device or your files may be damaged.

We recommend backing up your data before using the device in your vehicle.

Displayed messages may vary depending on the device model and software version.

The USB port can supply up to 2.5A of power. It does not output 2.5A unless the device requests. For amperage details, read the operating manual of the device that needs to be charged.

Under certain conditions, a device connected to the port may generate noise to the radio station you are listening to.

USB charge

USB Ports In the Center Pocket ( ) The USB port(s) (2.5A) is/are for charging devices, playing audio files and connecting compatible phones with Apple CarPlay or Android Auto. u To prevent any potential issues, be sure

to use an Apple MFi Certified Lightning Connector for Apple CarPlay, and for Android Auto, the USB cables should be certified by USB-IF to be compliant with USB 2.0 Standard.

In the Center Pocket ( )*

The USB port (2.5A) is only for charging devices. u You cannot play music even if you have

connected music players to it.

*1: Models without wireless Apple CarPlay and wireless Android Auto *2: Models with wireless Apple CarPlay and wireless Android Auto

*1

*2

In the Center Pocket

247Continued* Not available on all models

248

uuAudio SystemuUSB Ports

Featu res

Rear of the center console*

The USB ports (2.5A) are only for charging devices. u You cannot play music even if you have

connected music players to them.

Rear of the center console*

* Not available on all models

uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection Featu

res

Audio System Theft Protection The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as when the battery is disconnected or goes dead. In certain conditions, the system may display a code entry screen. If this occurs, reactivate the audio system.

Reactivating the audio system 1. Set the power mode to ON. 2. Turn on the audio system. 3. Press and hold the audio system power knob for more than two seconds. u The audio system is reactivated when the audio control unit establishes a

connection with the vehicle control unit. If the control unit fails to recognize the audio unit, you must go to a dealer and have the audio unit checked.

249

250

uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls

Featu res

1Audio Remote Controls

Some modes appear only when an appropriate device or medium is used.

Depending on the Bluetooth device you connect, some functions may not be available.

Press the (back) button for the driver information interface to go back to the previous screen or cancel a command.

Press the (home) button to go back to the home screen of the driver information interface.

Audio Remote Controls Allow you to operate the audio system while driving. The information is shown on the driver information interface or head-up display*.

VOL (+ /VOL (- (Volume) Buttons Press VOL (+: To increase the volume. Press VOL (-: To decrease the volume.

Left Selector Wheel When selecting the audio mode

Press the (home) button, then roll up or down to select Audio on the driver information interface, and then press the left selector wheel.

/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons

VOL (+/VOL (- (Volume) Buttons

Left Selector Wheel

(home) Button

(back) Button

* Not available on all models

uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls Featu

res

Roll up or down:

FM

AM

SiriusXM*

USB1 (USB)

USB2*

Bluetooth Audio

Smartphone Connection (Apple CarPlay/Android Auto)

To cycle through the audio modes, roll up or down and then press the left selector wheel:

251Continued* Not available on all models

252

uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls

Featu res

/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons When listening to the radio

Press : To select the next preset radio station. Press : To select the previous preset radio station. Press and hold : To select the next strong station. Press and hold : To select the previous strong station.

When listening to an iPod, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth Audio, or Smartphone Connection Press : To skip to the next song. Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song.

When listening to a USB flash drive Press and hold : To skip to the next folder. Press and hold : To go back to the previous folder.

Audio System Basic Operation

Featu

res

1Audio System Basic Operation

These indications are used to show how to operate the Selector Knob. Rotate to select.

Press to enter.

Selector Knob When the list is not displayed, songs, frequency, etc. can be changed.

While connected to Apple CarPlay, it changes as follows: Pressing the Phone Button, display the Apple

CarPlay phone screen. Pressing the Audio Button, display the Apple

CarPlay audio screen.

To use the audio system function, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON. (Home) Button: Press to go to the home

screen. 2 Switching the Display P. 254

(Back) Button: Press to go back to the previous display when it is displayed.

/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons: Press to change songs.

(Clock) Button*: Press to display the clock screen.

(Map) Button*: Press to display the map screen.

(Phone) Button: Press to display the phone screen.

(Audio) Button: Press to display the current audio information. SOURCE Button: Press to display the source select screen. Selector Knob: Rotate left or right to scroll through the available choices. Press to set your selection.

(Day/Night) Button: Press to change the audio/information screen brightness. Press once and select or to make an adjustment. u Each time you press , the mode

switches among the daytime mode, nighttime mode, and off mode.

(Day/Night) Button (Home) Button

(Back) Button

(Audio) Button

Selector Knob

(Phone) Button

SOURCE Button

/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons

(Clock) Button*/ (Map) Button*

253* Not available on all models

254

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Featu res

1Audio/Information Screen

Touchscreen Operation Use simple gestures - including touching, swiping,

and scrolling - to operate certain audio functions. Some items may be grayed out during driving to

reduce the potential for distraction. You can select them when the vehicle is stopped or

use voice commands. Wearing gloves may limit or prevent touchscreen

response.

You can change the touchscreen sensitivity setting. 2 Customized Features P. 351

Audio/Information Screen Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this display, you can go to various setup options.

Using the audio/information screen

Press the button to go to the home screen. Select the following icons on the home screen or after selecting All Apps.

Phone Displays the HFL information.

2 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink P. 374

Switching the Display

Home Screen

(Home) Button

All Apps

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen Featu

res

Trip Computer Displays the trip computer information. Current Drive tab: Displays the current trip information. Trip A/Trip B tab: Displays information for the current and three previous drives.

The information is stored every time you reset Trip A/B. To reset the Trip A/B, select Settings, then select Delete Trip History. To change the setting of how to reset Trip A/B, select Settings, then select Trip A Reset Timing or Trip B Reset Timing.

Clock Displays the clock.

System Updates*

Updates the software version of the audio system. 2 System Updates* P. 266

FM/AM/SiriusXM*/USB1 (USB)/USB2*/Bluetooth Audio/Smartphone Connection

Displays information for each audio format.

Settings Enters the customizing menu screen.

2 Customized Features P. 351

Navigation*

Displays the navigation screen. 2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual

255Continued* Not available on all models

256

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Featu res

HondaLink Displays the HondaLink screen.

2 HondaLink P. 301

Apple CarPlay/Android Auto Displays the Apple CarPlay or Android Auto screen.

2 Apple CarPlay P. 313 2 Android Auto P. 320

Messages Displays the text message screen.

2 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink P. 374

AT&T Hotspot*

Displays the AT&T Hotspot screen. 2 AT&T Hotspot* P. 311

Compass*

Displays the compass screen.

* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen Featu

res

1Wallpaper Setup

The wallpaper you set up on Clock Faces cannot be displayed on the driver information interface. When importing wallpaper files, the image must be

in the USB flash drives root directory. Images in a folder cannot be imported.

The file name must be fewer than 64 characters (64 bytes).

The file format of the image that can be imported is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).

If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures, the No files detected message appears.

Up to five pictures can be imported. The individual file size limit is 2 MB. The maximum image size is 1,920 936 pixels. If

the image size is less the image is displayed in the middle of the screen with the extra area appearing in black.

You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.

Import wallpaper 1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB port

in the center pocket. 2 USB Ports P. 247

2. Select Clock. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Clock Faces. 5. Select Add New Wallpaper. u The Searching... screen is displayed.

6. Import a desired picture. u Multiple pictures can be imported at the

same time. 7. Select Start Import. u The display will return to the Clock Faces

screen.

Wallpaper Setup

Continued 257

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

258

Featu res

1Wallpaper Setup

You cannot delete the initial imported wallpapers.

When the file size is large, it takes a while to be previewed.

Select wallpaper 1. Select Clock. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Clock Faces. 4. Select a desired wallpaper. 5. Select Set. u The display will return to the Clock Faces screen.

To view wallpaper once it is set 1. Press the button. 2. Select Clock.

Delete wallpaper 1. Select Clock. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Clock Faces. 4. Select a desired wallpaper. 5. Select Delete. 6. Select Yes. u The display will return to the Clock Faces screen.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen Featu

res

1Home Screen

The home screen has 2 pages. You can add up to 7 pages.

Press the button to go directly back to the first page of the home screen from any page.

To move to the next screen

Selecting or , or swiping the screen left or right changes to the next screen.

Home Screen

Swipe

Icon> Icon< Current page position

< >

Continued 259

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

260

Featu res

1To add app icons on the home screen

You can add app icons by the following procedure. 1. Press the button. 2. Select All Apps. 3. Select Customize. 4. Select Add. 5. Drag and drop the icon to where you want it to

be. 6. Select Done. uThe screen will return to the home screen.

Pre-installed apps may not start up normally. If this occurs, you need to reset the system.

2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 370

If you perform Factory Data Reset, it may reset all the settings to their factory default.

2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 370

In case those apps still do not startup normally even after Factory Data Reset, contact your dealer.

If a browser shuts down mid-use, the screen will return to the screen viewed prior to the browser startup.

To add app icons on the home screen App icons can be added on the home screen.

1. Press the button. 2. Select and hold the home screen. 3. Select Add. 4. Drag and drop the icon to where you want

it to be. 5. Select Done. u The screen will return to the home

screen.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen Featu

res

1To move icons on the home screen

Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again.

To move icons on the home screen You can change location on the home screen.

1. Select and hold an icon. u The screen switches to the customization

screen. 2. Drag and drop the icon to where you want

it to be. 3. Select Done. u The screen will return to the home

screen.

Select and hold.

Drag and drop.

Continued 261

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

262

Featu res

1To remove icons on the home screen

Apps will not be deleted by deleting the icon on the home screen.

Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again.

To remove icons on the home screen You can delete the icons on the home screen.

1. Select and hold an icon. u The screen switches to the customization

screen. 2. Drag and drop the icon you want to remove

to the Hide icon. u The icon is removed from the home

screen. 3. Select Done. u The screen will return to the home

screen.

Select and hold.

Drag and drop to Hide icon.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen Featu

res

1To shortcut icons on the home screen

Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again.

To shortcut icons on the home screen You can store up to three icons on the upper left of the home screen.

1. Select and hold an icon. u The screen switches to the customization

screen. 2. Drag and drop the icon you want to store to

the upper left of the home screen. u The icon is a shortcut.

3. Select Done. u The screen will return to the home

screen.

Select and hold.

Drag and drop to preset icon.

Shortcut Icons

Continued 263

264

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Featu res

1. Select the system status icon. u The status area appears.

2. Select an item to see the details. 3. Press the button or select the system

status icon to close the area.

Status Area

System Status Icon

Status Area

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen Featu

res

1Customizing the Meter

You can store up to three customized configurations. To select or customize a configuration, select Select configuration.

You can edit, show, or hide the meter contents on the driver information interface. 1. Press the button. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select Config. of Instrument Panel. 5. Select the content you wish to show or

hide. u The checked items are displayed on the

driver information interface. 6. Select Done.

Editing order You can change the order of the contents on the driver information interface.

1. Press the button. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select Config. of Instrument Panel. 5. Select Reorder. 6. Select and hold the contents you want to

move. 7. Drag and drop the contents to where you

want them to be. 8. Select Done.

Customizing the Meter

265

266

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates*

Featu res

1Wireless connection mode setup

If your vehicle has a telematics control unit (TCU), you do not need the wireless connection mode setup.

System Updates*

The audio systems firmware can be updated with a Wi-Fi connection or with a USB device.

Wireless connection mode setup 1. Press the button. 2. Select System Updates. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Connection Setup. 5. Select Wi-Fi.

6. Select Change Mode. 7. Select Network, then Confirm. u The display returns to the network list.

8. Select an access point from the network list, then Save. u If the audio system requires a password,

enter a password.

How to Update Wirelessly

* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates* Featu

res

1How to update

You can update the system via Wi-Fi, but cannot use the captive portal that require login or agreement the terms of use on the browser.

Your download will be canceled if: Your Wi-Fi connection is severed. You turn off the ignition when the battery is low on

power.

Your download will recommence the next time a Wi- Fi connection is established.

How to update When the audio system update is available, the notification is shown on the audio/ information screen. Use the following procedure to update the system.

1. Press the button. 2. Select System Updates.

3. Select via Wireless. u If a notification is displayed on the

screen, the screen of step 5 will be displayed.

4. Select Download Now. u A notification appears on the screen.

Notification

Continued 267

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates*

268

Featu res

1How to update

For battery protection, Install while Vehicle OFF cannot be selected when the battery is low on power. If you want to install the updated data, recharge the battery or select Install Now.

5. Select Install Now or Install while Vehicle OFF. u A notification appears on the screen if

the update is successful.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates* Featu

res

Automatic download settings Use the following procedure to change to the automatic download setting.

1. Press the button. 2. Select System Updates. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Auto Download. 5. Select the access point, then Yes.

View a version and update status Use the following procedure to confirm the version and update status. 1. Press the button. 2. Select System Updates. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Version Status.

269Continued

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates*

270

Featu res

1How to Update with a USB Device

A USB device with a minimum of 8 GB of free space or more is recommended.

Be sure to delete any previous inventory or update files from the USB before starting the USB update process.

Download the update files from the server 1. Press the button. 2. Select System Updates. 3. Select via USB. u A notification appears on the screen.

4. Connect a USB device into the USB port in the center pocket. u The inventory data is copied into the USB

device. 2 USB Ports P. 247

5. Remove the USB device from the USB port. 6. Connect the USB device into your

computer, and then download the update files. u Follow the link to download the required

software update files. Refer to https://usb.honda.com for instructions.

How to Update with a USB Device

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates* Featu

res

Update the audio system 1. Press the button. 2. Select System Updates. 3. Select via USB. u A notification appears on the screen.

4. Connect the USB device with the update files into the USB port. u A notification appears on the screen.

2 USB Ports P. 247

5. Select Install Now. u A notification appears on the screen if

the update is successful.

271

272

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound

Featu res

1Adjusting the Sound

The SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down, audio volume decreases.

You can also adjust the sound by the following procedure. 1. Press the button. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Sound.

To reset each setting for Bass / Treble, Balance / Fader, DTS Neural Surround* and Speed Volume Compensation select Default.

Adjusting the Sound 1. Press the button. 2. Select an audio source icon. 3. Select Sound. 4. Select the setting you want. 5. Select Save.

Select an item from the following choices: Bass / Treble: Treble, Midrange, Bass,

Subwoofer*

Balance / Fader: Balance, Fader DTS Neural Surround*: DTS Neural

SurroundTM

Speed Volume Compensation: Speed Volume Compensation (SVC)

* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup Featu

res

1Changing the Screen Brightness

You can change the Contrast and Black Level settings in the same manner.

To reset the settings, select Default.

Display Setup You can change the brightness of the audio/information screen.

1. Press the button. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Display. 4. Select Day Mode or Night Mode. 5. Select the setting you want. 6. Select Save.

Changing the Screen Brightness

273Continued

274

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

Featu res

Select the current source icon or press the SOURCE button, then select an icon on the source list to switch the audio source.

Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion. You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.

Selecting an Audio Source

Limitations for Manual Operation*

Select the source icon Source Select Screen

Source List Icons SOURCE Button

* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation Featu

res

1Voice Control Operation

When you press the button, a helpful prompt asks what you would like to do. Press and release the button again to bypass this prompt and give a command.

Voice Control Operation Your vehicle has a voice control system that allows hands-free operation. The voice control system uses the (talk) and (back) buttons on the steering wheel and a microphone near the map lights on the ceiling.

To achieve optimum voice recognition when using the voice control system: Make sure the correct screen is displayed for the voice command that you are

using. The system recognizes only certain commands. Available voice commands:

2 Voice Portal Screen P. 276

Close the windows and moonroof*. Adjust the dashboard and side vents so air does not blow onto the microphone

on the ceiling. Speak clearly in a clear, natural speaking voice without pausing between words. Reduce any background noise if possible. The system may misinterpret your

command if more than one person is speaking at the same time.

Voice Recognition

275Continued* Not available on all models

276

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

Featu res

When the (talk) button is pressed, available voice commands appear on the screen. For a complete list of commands, say Voice Help after the beep.

The system only recognizes the commands on the following pages, at certain screens. Free-form voice commands are not recognized.

Voice Portal Screen

* Not available on all models

These commands can only be used when a phone is connected. When the system recognizes a Phone command, the screen will change to the dedicated phone voice recognition screen.

Phone Commands Phone Call Call The system only recognizes contact names stored in the phonebook of your phone. If a full name is registered in the first name field, the system will recognize the first name and last name as one contact name.

Phone commands are not available if using Apple CarPlay.

When the system recognizes an Audio command, the screen will change to the dedicated audio voice recognition screen.

Phone Commands

Audio Commands

FM Commands FM Tune to <87.7-107.9> FM

AM Commands AM Tune to <530-1710> AM

Sirius XM Commands*

Sirius XM Channel <1-999> Channel

USB Commands USB Play genre Play Artist Play Album Play Playlist Play Song Play Music List Genre List Artist List Album List Playlist

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation Featu

res

The system will accept navigation voice commands when on the dedicated voice command screen for navigation.

2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual

Voice Help Cancel Back Voice Help provides guidance for the current screen.

*1: Models with navigation system

Navigation Commands*1

Standard Commands

277

278

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Featu res

on-screen keyboard for o frequency directly.

Audio/Information Screen

n each station with a strong signal.

Preset Icons Tune the radio frequency for preset memory. Select and hold the preset icon to store that station. Select to display beyond preset 5.

>

Settings Icon Select whether to tune to HD RadioTM* automatically.

Selector knob Turn to tune the radio frequency. Press, and then turn to select an item. After that, press again to make your selection.

Playing AM/FM Radio

(Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display.

Seek Buttons Press or to search up and down the selected band for a station with a strong signal.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Push to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.

Tune Icon Select to use the entering the radi

Scan Icon Select to sca

* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio Featu

res

1Preset Memory

The ST indicator appears on the display indicating stereo FM broadcasts. Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.

Switching the Audio Mode Roll the left selector wheel or select the audio source icon on the screen.

2 Audio Remote Controls P. 250

You can store 12 AM/FM stations into preset memory.

HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. For patents see http://dts.com/patents. HD Radio, Artist Experience, and the HD, HD Radio, and ARC logos are registered trademarks or trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Models with HD RadioTM feature

To store a station: 1. Tune to the selected station. 2. Select and hold the preset icon for the station you want to store.

Lists the strongest stations on the selected band. 1. Select Station List to display a list. 2. Select the station.

Manual update Updates your available station list at any time. 1. Select Station List to display a list. 2. Select Refresh.

Preset Memory

Station List

Continued 279

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

280

Featu res

1Radio Data System (RDS)

When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS automatically turns on, and the frequency display changes to the station name. However, when the signals of that station become weak, the display changes from the station name to the frequency.

Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. To turn off scan, select Stop or .

Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.

To find an RDS station from Station List 1. Select Station List to display a list while listening to an FM station. 2. Select the station.

Manual update Updates your available station list at any time. 1. Select Station List to display a list while listening to an FM station. 2. Select Refresh.

Scan

Radio Data System (RDS)

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio Featu

res

Displays the subchannel list when an HD RadioTM station is selected while listening to an FM station. 1. Select HD Radio Channels. 2. Select the channel number.

Change the AM/FM settings. 1. Select Settings. 2. Select an option.

HD Radio: Automatically choose a digital or an analog channel, or listen to analog only.

Artwork: Turns the artwork display on and off.

HD Subchannel

AM/FM Settings

Models with HD RadioTM feature

281

282

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio*

Featu res

us or next channel. ip 10 channels at a time.

splay and select a SiriusXM Radio category.

Audio/Information Screen

Preset Icons Tune the radio frequency for preset memory. Select and hold the preset icon to store that station. Select to display beyond preset 5.

>

Settings Icon Select settings to display and customize siriusXM settings.

Selector knob Turn to change the channel. Press, and then turn to select an item. After that, press again to make your selection.

Playing SiriusXM Radio*

(Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display.

Channel Icons Select or to the previo Select and hold to rapidly sk

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Push to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.

Category Icons Select or to di

Album Art

Seek Buttons Press or to search up and down the selected band for a station with a strong signal.

* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio* Featu

res

1Playing SiriusXM Radio*

In the channel mode, all available channels are selectable. In the category mode, you can select a channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).

There may be instances when SiriusXM Radio does not broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title). This does not indicate a problem with your audio system.

SiriusXM Radio stations load in ascending order, which can take about a minute. Once they have loaded you will be able to scroll up or down to make your selections.

Switching the Audio Mode Roll up or down the left selector wheel to select Audio or select the audio source icon on the screen.

2 Audio Remote Controls P. 250

Tune Start: When you change to a preset channel, a song being played on that channel restarts from the beginning with this function. This can be turned on or off by the following procedure. 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Tune Start. 3. Select ON or OFF.

To change a category, select Category icons, or select More and then select Category List.

1. Select Settings. 2. Select Tune Mode. 3. Select Channel or Category.

To Change the Tune Mode

Continued 283* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio*

284

Featu res

1Preset Memory

You can store 12 SiriusXM channels into the preset memory.

1Multi-channel preset (for music channels only)

TuneMix: The multi-channel preset function can be turned on or off by the following procedure. 1. Select Settings. 2. Select TuneMix. 3. Select ON or OFF.

When you want to replace the channel, select Replace preset. If you want to delete a channel, select Edit TuneMix, and then select the channel you want to delete.

To store a channel: 1. Tune to the selected channel. 2. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.

Multi-channel preset (for music channels only) You can store up to 10 of your preferred music channels per preset.

1. Tune a station. 2. Select and hold the preset number you

want to add a music channel. 3. Select Add to TuneMix or Create

TuneMix. u A message appears if there are no

available presets.

Preset Memory

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio* Featu

res

1Listening to Featured Channels

Up to ten featured channels by SiriusXM can be displayed.

Featured channel lists are at the top of the channel list.

To switch the sorting method, select Number or Name on the upper right of the screen.

Select Keypad to use the on-screen keyboard for entering the channel number directly.

Suggested channel listing received from SiriusXM can be displayed and selected. 1. Select Category List. 2. Select Featured Favorite.

Listening to Featured Channels

Continued 285

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio*

286

Featu res

1Replay Function

The system starts storing broadcast in memory when the power mode is turned ON. You can go back to the program from that point.

You can no longer replay any program once the power mode is turned off as it erases memory. You can check how long the program has been stored in memory from the audio/information screen.

After 30 or 60 minutes of recording the system will automatically start deleting the oldest data.

(A): Shows how much time the replayed segment is behind the real-time broadcast (B): Replayed segment (C): Length stored in memory (D): Play/Pause icon

Audio/Information Screen

(C) (B)

(A)

(D)

The system can record up to the last 60 minutes broadcast of your currently tuned channel as well as the last 30 minutes broadcast of preset channels, starting from the moment you turn the vehicle on. If you tuned to preset channel, the system records up to 60 minutes of a broadcast instead of up to 30 minutes. You can rewind and replay the last 30 or 60 minutes of a broadcast.

Move the position you want to replay by selecting or .

To play or pause on playback mode, select the play/pause icon.

Returning to real-time broadcast Select and hold .

Replay Function

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio* Featu

res

1Live Sports Alert

The Pop-up appears and notifies you of a sports alert function.

1To set up a favorite team

Sports alerts cut in only when SiriusXM mode is on.

While listening to other channel, you can receive sports alerts such as scores from your favorite teams.

To set up a favorite team 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Sports Notifications Setup. 3. Select Favorite Teams. 4. Select + Add Favorite Team. 5. Select a team.

To set up an alert message 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Sports Notifications Setup. 3. Select Notifications. 4. Select Game Notifications or SportsFlash Game Play Notifications. 5. Select Notifications. 6. Select ON. 7. Select a favorite team.

Live Sports Alert

Continued 287

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio*

288

Featu res

1Traffic and Weather Information

When traffic and weather information is received, a notification is displayed in the header area.

2 Status Area P. 264

You can receive traffic and weather information. 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Traffic & Weather Now Setup. 3. Select Selected City. 4. Select the region.

Traffic and Weather Information

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio* Featu

res

1Channel Schedule

Select Keypad to use the on-screen keyboard for entering the channel number directly.

1To set up an alert message

The Pop-up appears and notifies you of an alert function.

Selecting Just Once disables the alert feature next time you turn the power mode to ON.

If you want to delete the alert, select Remove Alert.

To enable an alert message, change settings for the alert function.

2 To enable the alert function P. 290

You can view a channel schedule or receive an alert when your favorite program is about to start.

To view a channel schedule 1. Select More. 2. Select Channel Schedule.

To set up an alert message 1. Select More. 2. Select Channel Schedule. 3. Select a program. 4. Select Set Program Alert. 5. Select Just Once or Every Time.

Channel Schedule

Continued 289

290

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio*

Featu res

You can change settings for the alert function.

To enable the alert function 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Manage Program Alerts. 3. Select Notifications. 4. Select ON or OFF.

To remove an alert 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Manage Program Alerts. 3. Select Alerts Set. 4. Select on the alert you want to delete. u A confirmation message appears on the

screen. Select Yes.

Manage Program Alert

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio* Featu

res

1Scan

The Scan Songs in Presets function is based on TuneScanTM technology of SiriusXM.

The Featured Channels function is based on Featured FavoritesTM technology of SiriusXM.

TuneScanTM and Featured FavoritesTM are registered trademarks of SiriusXM Radio, Inc.

Sample each channel on the selected mode for 10 seconds. 1. Select More. 2. Select Scan.

You can change a scan mode by the following procedure. 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Scan Mode. 3. Select Channel or Preset.

To turn off scan, select Stop.

Scan

Continued 291

292

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio*

Featu res

Change the SiriusXM settings. 1. Select Settings. 2. Select an option.

TuneMix: Turns multiple channel mix preset on and off. Tune Mode: Choose whether to group by category or channel number when

changing channels. 2 To Change the Tune Mode P. 283

Scan Mode: Select the scan mode from all channels or presets. 2 Scan P. 291

Tune Start: Start the currently playing song at the beginning when you switch to a music channel preset.

2 Tune Start: P. 283

Sports Notifications Setup: Set to receive sports alerts such as scores from your favorite teams.

2 Live Sports Alert P. 287

Traffic & Weather Now Setup: Set to receive traffic and weather information. 2 Traffic and Weather Information P. 288

Manage Program Alerts: Change settings for the alert function. 2 Manage Program Alert P. 290

SiriusXM Settings

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod Featu

res

Audio/Information Screen

Sound Icon Select to display the sound settings.

Shuffle Icon Select to play all files in the current category in random order.

Repeat Icon Select to repeat the current file.

Selector knob Turn to change songs. Press, and then turn to select an item. After that, press again to make your selection.

Playing an iPod Using your USB connector, connect the iPod to the USB port(s), then select the iPod mode.

2 USB Ports P. 247

(Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display.

Track Buttons Press or to change songs. Select and hold to move rapidly within a song.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Push to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.

Cover Art

Play/Pause Icon

Track Icons Select or to change songs. Select and hold to move rapidly within a song.

Browse Icon Select to display the menu items.

293Continued

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

294

Featu res

1Playing an iPod

Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicles audio system.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.

2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 327

If you operate the music app on your iPhone/iPod while the phone is connected to the audio system, you may no longer be able to operate the same app on the audio/information screen. Reconnect the device if necessary.

If an iPhone is connected via Apple CarPlay, the iPod/ USB source will be unavailable and audio files on the phone will be playable only within Apple CarPlay.

1. Select Browse. 2. Select a search category (e.g., Artists,

Albums, etc.). 3. Continue making selections until you find

the song of your choice.

How to Select a Song from the Music Search List

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod Featu

res

1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items Shuffle

Shuffle off: Shuffle mode to off. Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available songs in a

selected list in random order.

Repeat Repeat off: Repeat mode to off. Repeat Song: Repeats the current song. Repeat all: Repeats the all songs.

You can select shuffle and repeat modes when playing a file. Shuffle/Repeat Repeatedly select the shuffle or repeat icon until you find a play mode option of your preference.

To turn off a play mode Select the mode you want to turn off.

How to Select a Play Mode

295

296

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

Featu res

iles. y within a track.

Audio/Information Screen

ause Icon

Random Icon Select to play all files in the current category in random order.

Sound Icon Select to display the sound settings.

peat Icon lect to repeat the current file.

Selector knob Turn to change files. Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection.

Playing a USB Flash Drive Your audio system reads and plays audio files on a USB flash drive in either MP3, WMA, AAC*1, FLAC, or WAV format. Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port(s), then select the USB mode.

2 USB Ports P. 247

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.

(Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display.

Track Icons Select or to change f Select and hold to move rapidl

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Push to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.

Play/P

Seek Buttons Press or to change files. Select and hold to move rapidly within a track.

Browse Icon Select to display the menu items.

Re Se

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive Featu

res

1Playing a USB Flash Drive

Use the recommended USB flash drives. 2 General Information on the Audio System

P. 329

WMA files protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played. The audio system displays The selected file cannot be played, then skips to the next file.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.

2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 327

1. Select Browse. 2. Select a search category (e.g., Artists,

Albums, etc.). 3. Continue making selections until you find

the song of your choice.

How to Select a File from the Music Search List

Continued 297

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

298

Featu res

1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items Random

Random off: Random mode to off. Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random

order. Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current

folder in random order.

Repeat Repeat off: Repeat mode to off. Repeat track: Repeats the current folder. Repeat all: Repeats the all songs.

You can select repeat and random modes when playing a file. Random/Repeat Select random or repeat icon repeatedly until a desired mode.

To turn off a play mode Select the mode you want to turn off.

How to Select a Play Mode

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth Audio Featu

res

1Playing Bluetooth Audio

Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the system. For a list of compatible phones: U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,

or call 1-888-528-7876. Canada: For more information on smartphone

compatibility, call 1-855-490-7351.

It may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving.

Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time. When there is more than one paired phone in the vehicle, the first paired phone the system finds is automatically connected.

The connected phone for Bluetooth Audio can be different.

If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there may be a delay before the system begins to play.

In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track may not appear correctly.

Some functions may not be available on some devices.

If a phone is currently connected via Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, Bluetooth Audio from that phone will be unavailable. However, you can have a second previously paired phone stream Bluetooth Audio by selecting from the Bluetooth device list.

2 Phone Setup P. 379

Playing Bluetooth Audio Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible phone. This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicles Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system.

2 Phone Setup P. 379

Audio/Information Screen (Back) Button

Press to go back to the previous display.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/ Power) Knob Push to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.

Play/Pause Icon

Bluetooth Indicator Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.

Track Icons Select or to change tracks.

Browse Icon Select to display the menu items.

Selector knob Turn to change groups. Press, and then turn to select an item. After that, press again to make your selection.

299Continued

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth Audio

300

Featu res

1To Play Bluetooth Audio Files

To play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone makers operating instructions.

Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone.

You can change the connected phone by selecting Change device.

2 Phone Setup P. 379

1Searching for Music

Depending on the Bluetooth device you connect, some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

1. Make sure that your phone is paired and connected to the system.

2 Phone Setup P. 379

2. Select the Bluetooth Audio mode.

If the phone is not recognized, another HFL- compatible phone, which is not compatible for Bluetooth Audio, may already be connected.

To play or pause a file Select the play/pause icon.

1. Select Browse. 2. Select a search category (e.g., Albums). 3. Select an item. u The selection begins playing.

To Play Bluetooth Audio Files

Searching for Music

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink Featu

res

1HondaLink

If your vehicle has a telematics control unit (TCU), you can use HondaLink without connecting the phone.

The HondaLink connect app is compatible with most iPhone and Android phones.

If the system is connected to the HondaLink connect app through Bluetooth and another Bluetooth audio device is connected, the Bluetooth connection to the HondaLink connect app will be severed.

Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and smartphone data use. Check your phones data subscription package.

HondaLink HondaLink connects you to the latest information from Honda. You can connect your phone wirelessly through Wi-Fi or Bluetooth.

2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 310 2 Phone Setup P. 379

Use the following procedure to connect to HondaLink.

To enable the HondaLink You must consent to location sharing to enable the HondaLink.

Disable: Does not allow this consent. Enable Once: Allows only one time. (Shows again next time.) Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Never show again.)

To Connect to HondaLink

301Continued

302

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink

Featu res

To link with HondaLink You may see the connection guide screen after launching HondaLink when there is no connection available.

Connect Displays instruction messages when the vehicle needs service.

Help & Support Displays tips for vehicle usage, and get support via roadside or customer service center.

HondaLink Menu

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink Featu

res

Message Displays helpful and important information from Honda.

You can check the messages that are received quickly in the shortcut operation. 1. A notification appears and notifies you of a

new message in the header area.

2. A notification is continuously displayed in the header area until the new message is read.

Vehicle Information and Message from Honda Tips

Notification

303Continued

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink

304

Featu res

1Vehicle Information and Message from Honda Tips

When you update HondaLink, you must keep the engine running and maintain a constant connection with HondaLink. If the update is interrupted, the system will automatically resume the process. If, however, a week has elapsed since the process was first interrupted, you must repeat the process from the beginning.

You can update HondaLink by selecting Message from Honda on the HondaLink menu.

3. Select the system status icon to see the messages.

4. Select a new message to open. u If you have selected the update option

for HondaLink, follow the directions on the screen to complete the process.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink Service* Featu

res

1HondaLink Service*

HondaLink also provides services you can operate from the Internet or your smartphone.

To subscribe to HondaLink, or to get more information about all of its features, contact a Honda dealer, or visit hondalink.honda.com

1In Case of Emergency

Your vehicle may not be able to connect to the operator if the battery level is low, the line is disconnected, or you do not have adequate cellular coverage.

You cannot use this emergency services when: You travel outside the HondaLink service coverage

areas. There is a problem with the connecting devices,

such as the microphones, speakers, or the unit itself.

You cannot operate other phone-related functions using the screen while talking to the operator. Only the operator can terminate the connection to your vehicle.

1Automatic collision notification

If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it repeatedly tries until it succeeds.

HondaLink Service*

Is a subscription-based service that provides convenient features such as voice communication in case of emergency, online security, and one-on-one operator assistance.

Automatic collision notification If your vehicles airbags deploy or if the unit detects that the vehicle is severely impacted, your vehicle automatically will attempt to connect to the HondaLink operator. If connected, information about your vehicle, its location, and its condition can be sent to the operator*1; you also can speak to the operator when connected.

IMPORTANT: In a crash, HondaLink will attempt to notify emergency services but NEITHER HONDA NOR ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS GUARANTEE THAT SUCH NOTIFICATION WILL OCCUR.

Honda reserves the right to terminate HondaLink services at any time or for any reason, and in the future may not be able to provide services due to changes in, or obsolescence of, technology integral to the service or changes in governmental regulation.

*1: Depending on your phone and adequate cellular coverage, your vehicles location may not be sent to the operator.

In Case of Emergency

305Continued* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink Service*

306

Featu res

1Manual operator connection

Do not press the button while driving. When you need to contact the operator, park the vehicle in a safe place.

If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it automatically cancels the action after three minutes.

If necessary, the cover can be broken to access the ASSIST button.

Manual operator connection If you need to talk to the HondaLink operator in a situation where no airbag has deployed, you can manually connect to them by pressing the ASSIST button with the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON. 1. Open the cover attached to the ceiling

console. 2. Press the ASSIST button. u You are connected to the HondaLink

operator.

ASSIST Button

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink Service* Featu

res

1Security Features

The contact information of your provider, your user ID and PIN will be given when you subscribe to HondaLink. If you forget any of the above, contact a Honda dealer, or go to hondalink.honda.com.

You can also activate the remote door lock/unlock and vehicle finder features from the Internet or using your smartphone app. Ask a dealer, or visit hondalink.honda.com.

1Vehicle finder

The lights will stop flashing and horn will stop sounding under the following: When conditions 30 seconds have elapsed. You unlock the doors using the remote transmitter. You unlock the doors using the keyless access

system. You unlock the doors using the built-in key. The power mode is set to ACCESSORY or ON.

Your subscribed telematics service provider can track your vehicles location, remotely lock or unlock doors, and help you find your vehicle. To use these features, you need your user ID and personal identification number (PIN).

Stolen vehicle tracking This feature searches and tracks down your vehicle position even if it is on the move. If you believe that your vehicle has been stolen, contact the police as well as the provider.

Remote door lock/unlock The provider can remotely lock or unlock doors upon your request.

Vehicle finder This feature is convenient to use when trying to locate your vehicle in large areas, such as a crowded parking lot. If you cannot locate your vehicle after using the remote transmitters answerback function, you can contact the provider which can then flash your vehicles exterior lights and sound the horn, and sends vehicle location via web/Smartphone.

Security alarm notification If the security system in your vehicle detects an abnormal condition, such as someone tampering with the lock on your vehicle, the provider notifies you by email.

Security Features

Continued 307

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink Service*

308

Featu res

1Operator Assistance

Remain attentive to road conditions and driving during operator assistance.

If you want to add or renew a subscription, call the Operator Assistance. 1. Press the button. 2. Select HondaLink. 3. Select HondaLink Subscription Status.

Connect to the HondaLink operator when trying to find a destination or for roadside assistance.

1. Press the LINK button. u Connection to the operator begins.

2. Talk to the operator. u To disconnect, select Hang Up on the

audio/information screen or press the button on the steering wheel.

Operator Assistance

LINK Button

Audio/information screen when connected to the HondaLink operator.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink Service* Featu

res

1Convenient Features

The contact information of your provider, your user ID and PIN will be given when you subscribe to HondaLink. If you forget any of the above, contact a Honda dealer, or go to hondalink.honda.com.

You cannot use Wi-Fi hotspots when you are connected wirelessly to Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.

Your subscribed telematics service provider can check your vehicles condition.

Virtual Dashboard You can remotely check the mileage, fuel range, and oil life in your app.

Remote Start and stop the engine You can remotely start and stop engine using your app as same as the keyless remote.

Geofence Alert You can receive a notification anytime your vehicle enters or leaves a region set by you.

Speed Alert You can receive a notification when your vehicle has exceeded a speed limit set by you.

Personal Data Wipe You can reset your audio and navigation system settings to factory defaults with the app.

Wi-Fi hotspot Vehicle provides 4G LTE network environment as Wi-Fi router to use tablet or smartphone in your vehicle.

Convenient Features

309

310

uuAudio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection

Featu res

1Wi-Fi Connection

Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Direct are registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance.

1Connect the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi Hotspot

You cannot go through the setting procedure while the vehicle is moving. Park in a safe place to set the audio system in Wi-Fi mode.

Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and smartphone data use. Check your phones data subscription package.

Check your phone manual to find out if the phone has Wi-Fi connectivity.

You can confirm whether Wi-Fi connection is on or off with the icon on the Wi-Fi network list. Transmission speed and others will not be displayed on this screen.

In case of Wi-Fi connection with your phone, make sure your phones Wi-Fi setting is in access point (tethering) mode.

Wi-Fi Connection This vehicle is equipped with Wi-Fi connectivity. You can connect to an external Wi- Fi hotspot or communication device.

1. Press the button. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Connections. 4. Select Wi-Fi. 5. Select Change Mode. 6. Select Network or Hotspot, then

Confirm. u To change the Wi-Fi settings, select

Options or Setup. u Select the access point you want to

connect to the system. 7. Select Connect. u Enter a password for the access point,

and select Done. u When the connection is successful, the

icon is displayed on the list. 8. Press the button to go back to the

home screen.

Connect the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi Hotspot

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAT&T Hotspot* Featu

res

1AT&T Hotspot*

To use AT&T Hotspot services, your vehicle must be subscribed to a data plan. If your vehicle is not subscribed to a data plan, you can visit www.att.com/ honda to add vehicle data services.

Hotspot username and password can be changed in the Settings of the AT&T Hotspot app. Settings cannot be accessed while driving. Park in a safe place to adjust Hotspot settings.

Alternatively, you can use your mobile hotspot to connect the vehicle and other mobile devices to the Internet.

2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 310

AT&T Hotspot*

If you have subscribed to AT&T hotspot services, your vehicle will provide data to connect your mobile devices to the Internet. You can use the AT&T Hotspot app to turn on/off vehicle data and monitor data usage left on your subscription.

AT&T Hotspot Menu

a Hotspot Enable Turn on/off AT&T Hotspot.

b Data Usage Bar Check the current status of your data plan. This Usage Bar will show your current plan and how much data remains on your plan. Subscription plans for AT&T Hotspot can be added/modified at www.att.com/honda.

c Plan Info Shows your current AT&T subscription plan for the vehicle.

d Settings Shows the current username and password for vehicle Hotspot. Settings can be changed while the vehicle is not in motion.

e Help

311* Not available on all models

312

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSiri Eyes Free*

Featu res

1Siri Eyes Free*

Siri is a trademark of Apple Inc.

Check Apple Inc. website for features available for Siri.

We recommend against using Siri other than in Siri Eyes Free while operating a vehicle.

1Using Siri Eyes Free

Some commands work only on specific phone features or apps.

Siri Eyes Free*

You can talk to Siri by pressing and holding the (Talk) button on the steering wheel when your iPhone is paired to the Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system.

2 Phone Setup P. 379

Using Siri Eyes Free

(Talk) Button Press and hold until the display changes as shown.

(Back) Button Press to deactivate Siri.

While in Siri Eyes Free: The display remains the same. No feedback or commands appear.

Appears when Siri is activated in Siri Eyes Free

* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay Featu

res

1Apple CarPlay

Only iPhone 5 or newer versions with iOS 8.4 or later are compatible with Apple CarPlay.

We recommend using the latest OS.

Park in a safe place before connecting your iPhone to Apple CarPlay and when launching any compatible apps.

While connected to Apple CarPlay, calls are only made through Apple CarPlay. If you want to make a call with HandsFreeLink, turn Apple CarPlay OFF.

2 Setting Up Apple CarPlay P. 315

When your iPhone is connected to Apple CarPlay, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth Audio or Bluetooth HandsFreeLink. However, other previously paired phones can stream audio via Bluetooth while Apple CarPlay is connected.

2 Phone Setup P. 379

Apple CarPlay and Android Auto cannot run at the same time.

For details on countries and regions where Apple CarPlay is available, as well as information pertaining to function, refer to the Apple homepage.

Apple CarPlay If you connect an Apple CarPlay-compatible iPhone to the system via the USB port in the center pocket or wirelessly*, you can use the audio/information screen, instead of the iPhone display, to make a phone call, listen to music, view maps (navigation), and access messages.

2 USB Ports P. 247

Phone Access the contact list, make phone calls, or listen to voicemail.

Messages Check and reply to text messages, or have messages read to you.

Apple CarPlay Menu

Home screen

Apple CarPlay icon

Apple CarPlay menu screen

: Go back to the Apple CarPlay Dashboard screen

: Go back to the Apple CarPlay menu screen

Select the Honda icon to go back to the home screen

313Continued* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay

314

Featu res

1Apple CarPlay

Apple CarPlay Operating Requirements & Limitations Apple CarPlay requires a compatible iPhone with an active cellular connection and data plan. Your carriers rate plans will apply.

Changes in operating systems, hardware, software, and other technology integral to providing Apple CarPlay functionality, as well as new or revised governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or cessation of Apple CarPlay functionality and services. Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or guarantee of future Apple CarPlay performance or functionality.

It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are compatible with Apple CarPlay. Refer to the Apple homepage for information on compatible apps.

Music Play music stored on your iPhone.

Maps Display Apple Maps and use the navigation function just as you would on your iPhone.

Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Apple CarPlay) can give directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are currently using will direct you to your destination.

Models with navigation system

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay Featu

res

1Setting Up Apple CarPlay

Only initialize Apple CarPlay when you are safely parked. When Apple CarPlay first detects your iPhone, you will need to set up your iPhone. Refer to the instruction manual that came with your iPhone.

You can also use the method below to set up Apple CarPlay:

Select HOME Settings Smartphone Connection Apple CarPlay Select device

Select HOME Settings Connections Smartphone Connection Apple CarPlay Select device

Use of user and vehicle information The use and handling of user and vehicle information transmitted to/from your iPhone by Apple CarPlay is governed by the Apple iOS terms and conditions and Apples Privacy Policy.

Models with wireless Apple CarPlay and wireless Android Auto

Models without wireless Apple CarPlay and wireless Android Auto

After you have connected your iPhone to the system via the front USB port or wirelessly*, use the following procedure to set up Apple CarPlay. Use of Apple CarPlay will result in the transmission of certain user and vehicle information (such as vehicle location, speed, and status) to your iPhone to enhance the Apple CarPlay experience. You will need to consent to the sharing of this information on the audio/ information screen.

Setting Up Apple CarPlay

Continued 315* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay

316

Featu res

1Connect Apple CarPlay Wirelessly*

Wireless Apple CarPlay and AT&T Hotspot cannot be used at the same time. When using Apple CarPlay and AT&T Hotspot at the same time, connect to Apple CarPlay with a USB cable.

1. Connect the iPhone to the USB port using the USB cable. 2 USB Ports P. 247

u The confirmation screen will be displayed. 2. Select Yes. u If you do not allow this consent, select No.

You may change the consent settings under the Connections*1/Smartphone Connection*2 settings menu.

Connect Apple CarPlay wirelessly on the home screen 1. Press the button. 2. Select Smartphone Connection. 3. Select + Connect New Device. 4. Pair the iPhone to the vehicles Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system.

2 Phone Setup P. 379

5. Select Yes. u If your iPhone asks for permission to accept an Apple CarPlay connection,

accept to connect.

*1: Models without wireless Apple CarPlay and wireless Android Auto *2: Models with wireless Apple CarPlay and wireless Android Auto

Connecting Apple CarPlay Using the USB Cable to the USB Port

Connect Apple CarPlay Wirelessly*

* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay Featu

res

Connect Apple CarPlay wirelessly on the Apple CarPlay device list 1. Press the button. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Smartphone Connection. 4. Select Apple CarPlay. 5. Select + Connect New Device. 6. Pair the iPhone to the vehicles Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system.

2 Phone Setup P. 379

7. Select Yes. u If your iPhone asks for permission to accept an Apple CarPlay connection,

accept to connect.

Connect Apple CarPlay wirelessly on the Bluetooth device list 1. Press the button. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Connections. 4. Select Bluetooth. 5. Select + Connect New Device. 6. Pair the iPhone to the vehicles Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system.

2 Phone Setup P. 379

7. Check the box on Apple CarPlay. u If you select Apple CarPlay, you cannot select Audio and Phone.

8. Select Connect. 9. Select Yes. u If your iPhone asks for permission to accept an Apple CarPlay connection,

accept to connect.

317Continued

318

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay

Featu res

Connect Apple CarPlay wirelessly with the steering wheel 1. Press and hold the (talk) button on the steering wheel. 2. Pair the iPhone to the vehicles Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system.

2 Phone Setup P. 379

3. Check the box on Apple CarPlay. u If you select Apple CarPlay, you cannot select Audio and Phone.

4. Select Connect. 5. Select Yes. u If your iPhone asks for permission to accept an Apple CarPlay connection,

accept to connect.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay Featu

res

1Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri

Below are examples of questions and commands for Siri: What movies are playing today? Call dad at work. What song is this? Hows the weather tomorrow? Read my latest email. Find a table for four tonight in Chicago.

For more information, please visit www.apple.com/ios/siri.

Press and hold the talk button to activate Siri.

Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri

(Talk) button: Press and hold to activate Siri. Press again to deactivate Siri. Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.

319

320

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto

Featu res

1Android Auto

To use Android Auto, you need to download the Android Auto app from Google Play to your smartphone.

Only Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or later versions are compatible with Android Auto. Bluetooth A2DP cannot be used while your phone is connected to Android Auto.

Park in a safe place before connecting your Android phone to Android Auto and when launching any compatible apps.

To directly access the Android Auto phone function, press Phone on the home screen.

2 Auto Pairing Connection P. 322

When your Android phone is connected to Android Auto, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth Audio. However, other previously paired phones can stream audio via Bluetooth while Android Auto is connected.

2 Phone Setup P. 379

Apple CarPlay and Android Auto cannot run at the same time.

Android Auto When you connect an Android phone to the audio system via the front USB port or wirelessly*, Android Auto is automatically initiated. When connected via Android Auto, you can use the audio/information screen to access the Phone, Google Maps (Navigation), Google Play Music, and Google Now functions. When you first use Android Auto, a tutorial will appear on the screen. We recommend that you complete this tutorial while safely parked before using Android Auto.

2 USB Ports P. 247 2 Auto Pairing Connection P. 322

* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto Featu

res

1Android Auto

For details on countries and regions where Android Auto is available, as well as information pertaining to function, refer to the Android Auto homepage.

Screens may differ depending on the version of the Android Auto app you are using.

Android Auto Operating Requirements & Limitations Android Auto requires a compatible Android phone with an active cellular connection and data plan. Your carriers rate plans will apply.

Changes in operating systems, hardware, software, and other technology integral to providing Android Auto functionality, as well as new or revised governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or cessation of Android Auto functionality and services. Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or guarantee of future Android Auto performance or functionality.

It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are compatible with Android Auto. Refer to the Android Auto homepage for information on compatible apps.

a Maps (Navigation) Display Google Maps and use the navigation function just as you would with your Android phone. When the vehicle is in motion, it is not possible to make keyboard entries. Stop the vehicle in a safe location to undertake a search or provide other inputs.

Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Android Auto) can give directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are currently using will direct you to your destination. The audio/Information screen shows you turn-by-turn driving directions to your destination. b Phone (Communication) Make and receive phone calls as well as listen to voicemail. c Google Now (Home screen) Display useful information organized by Android Auto into simple cards that appear just when theyre needed.

Android Auto Menu

: Go back to the home screen

Android Auto icon

6

Models with navigation system

Continued 321

322

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto

Featu res

d Music and audio Play Google Play Music and music apps that are compatible with Android Auto. To switch between music apps, press this icon. e Go back to the Home Screen. f Voice Operate Android Auto with your voice.

When you connect an Android phone to the unit via the front USB port or wirelessly*, Android Auto is automatically initiated.

Auto Pairing Connection

* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto Featu

res

1Connecting Android Auto Using the USB Cable to the USB Port

Only initialize Android Auto when you are safely parked. When Android Auto first detects your phone, you will need to set up your phone so that auto pairing is possible. Refer to the instruction manual that came with your phone.

You can use the method below to change Android Auto settings after you have completed the initial setup:

Select HOME Settings Smartphone Connection Android Auto Select device

Select HOME Settings Connections Smartphone Connection Android Auto Select device

Use of user and vehicle information The use and handling of user and vehicle information transmitted to/from your phone by Android Auto is governed by the Googles Privacy Policy.

Models with wireless Apple CarPlay and wireless Android Auto

Models without wireless Apple CarPlay and wireless Android Auto

1. Connect the Android phone to the USB port using the USB cable. 2 USB Ports P. 247

u The confirmation screen will be displayed. 2. Select Yes. u If you do not allow this consent, select No.

You may change the consent settings under the Connections*1/Smartphone Connection*2 settings menu.

*1: Models without wireless Apple CarPlay and wireless Android Auto *2: Models with wireless Apple CarPlay and wireless Android Auto

Connecting Android Auto Using the USB Cable to the USB Port

Continued 323

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto

324

Featu res

1Connect Android Auto Wirelessly*

Wireless Android Auto and AT&T Hotspot cannot be used at the same time. When using Android Auto and AT&T Hotspot at the same time, connect to Android Auto with a USB cable.

Connect Android Auto wirelessly on the home screen 1. Press the button. 2. Select Smartphone Connection. 3. Select + Connect New Device. 4. Pair the Android phone to the vehicles Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system.

2 Phone Setup P. 379

5. Select Yes. u If your Android phone asks for permission to accept an Android Auto

connection, accept to connect.

Connect Android Auto wirelessly on the Android Auto device list 1. Press the button. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Smartphone Connection. 4. Select Android Auto. 5. Select + Connect New Device. 6. Pair the Android phone to the vehicles Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system.

2 Phone Setup P. 379

7. Select Yes. u If your Android phone asks for permission to accept an Android Auto

connection, accept to connect.

Connect Android Auto Wirelessly*

* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto Featu

res

Connect Android Auto wirelessly on the Bluetooth device list 1. Press the button. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Connections. 4. Select Bluetooth. 5. Select + Connect New Device. 6. Pair the Android phone to the vehicles Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system.

2 Phone Setup P. 379

7. Check the box on Android Auto. u If you select Android Auto, you cannot select Audio and Phone.

8. Select Connect. 9. Select Yes. u If your Android phone asks for permission to accept an Android Auto

connection, accept to connect.

Connect Android Auto wirelessly with the steering wheel 1. Press and hold the (talk) button on the steering wheel. 2. Pair the Android phone to the vehicles Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system.

2 Phone Setup P. 379

3. Check the box on Android Auto. u If you select Android Auto, you cannot select Audio and Phone.

4. Select Connect. 5. Select Yes. u If your Android phone asks for permission to accept an Android Auto

connection, accept to connect.

325Continued

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto

326

Featu res

1Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition

Below are examples of commands you can give with voice recognition: Reply to text. Call my wife. Navigate to Honda. Play my music. Send a text message to my wife. Call flower shop.

For more information, please refer to the Android Auto homepage.

You can also activate the voice recognition function by pressing the icon in the upper-right corner of the screen.

Press and hold the talk button to operate Android Auto with your voice.

Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition

(Talk) button: Press and hold to operate Android Auto with your voice. Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.

Audio Error Messages

Featu

res

Solution

cknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.

sh drive are copyright protected or an unsupported or about five seconds, then plays the next file.

empty.

d on the device.

e is connected. If it appears when a supported evice. are in the device. Check that compatible files are

ommunicate with a connected device. If it appears your place of device purchase.

ted. If it appears, connect a USB flash drive to the

iPod/USB Flash Drive If an error occurs while playing an iPod or USB flash drive, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.

Error Message

Connect Retry Appears when the system does not a

Unplayable File Appears when the files in the USB fla format. This error message appears f

No Data

Appears when the iPod is empty.

Appears when the USB flash drive is

Check that compatible files are store

Unsupported

Appears when an unsupported devic device is connected, reconnect the d Appears when unsupported formats stored on the device.

Device No Response Appears when the system does not c when a device is connected, contact

USB hub not supported Appears when only a HUB is connec HUB.

iPod

USB flash drive

iPod and USB flash drive

327

328

uuAudio Error MessagesuAndroid/Apps

Featu res

on

n to close the app.

ittle longer. If it does not respond even if you keep e error message continues, perform Factory Data

Android/Apps If an error occurs while using the audio system or apps, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.

*1:****part is variable characters, and will change depending upon where an error occurs.

Error Message Soluti

Unfortunately, **** has stopped.*1 Error has occurred within app, select OK on the scree

**** is not responding. Would you like to close it?*1

App is not responding. Select Wait if you can wait for a response from app a l waiting, select OK to close the app and start it up. If th Reset.

2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 370

General Information on the Audio System

Featu

res

1Subscribing to SiriusXM Radio

Contact Information for SiriusXM Radio: US: SiriusXM Radio at

www.siriusxm.com/subscribenow, or 1-866-635- 2349

Canada: SiriusXM Canada at www.siriusxm.ca/subscribe-now, or 1-877-209- 0079

1Receiving SiriusXM Radio

The SiriusXM satellites are in orbit over the equator; therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and mountains the farther north you travel from the equator.

You may experience reception problems under the following circumstances: In a location with an obstruction to the south of

your vehicle. In tunnels. On the lower level of a multi-tiered road. Large items carried on the roof rack.

SiriusXM Radio Service*

1. You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID in the screen, select Channel to 0.

2. Have your radio ID ready, and either call or visit the SiriusXM website to subscribe.

Switch to the SiriusXM mode by using the audio remote controls on the steering wheel, or through the audio/information screen, and stay in this mode for about 30 minutes until the service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with good reception.

Channel **** is not subscribed. Call SiriusXM to subscribe.*1

You are not subscribed to the channel selected. Subscription updated: SiriusXM radio is receiving information update from the network. Channel Not Available: No such channel exits, or the artist or title information is unavailable. No Signal: The signal is too weak in the current location. Check Tuner: There is a problem with the SiriusXM tuner. Contact a dealer. Check Antenna: There is a problem with the SiriusXM antenna. Contact a dealer.

*1: ****part is variable characters, and will change depending upon where an subscribe.

Subscribing to SiriusXM Radio

Receiving SiriusXM Radio

SiriusXM Radio Display Messages

329* Not available on all models

330

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives

Featu res

1iPod, and iPhone Model Compatibility

This system may not work with all software versions of these devices.

The Lightning connector works with iPhone 5, iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 6, iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6S, iPhone 6S Plus, iPhone SE, iPhone 7, iPhone 7 Plus, iPhone 8, iPhone 8 Plus, iPhone X, iPhone XS, iPhone XS Max, iPhone XR, iPhone 11, iPhone 11 Pro, iPhone 11 Pro Max, iPod touch (5th to 7th generation), iPod nano (7th generation).

USB works with iPhone 5, iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 6, iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6S, iPhone 6S Plus, iPhone SE, iPhone 7, iPhone 7 Plus, iPhone 8, iPhone 8 Plus, iPhone X, iPhone XS, iPhone XS Max, iPhone XR, iPhone 11, iPhone 11 Pro, iPhone 11 Pro Max, iPod touch (5th to 7th generation), iPod nano (7th generation).

1USB Flash Drives

Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored order. This order may be different from the order displayed on your PC or device.

Compatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives

A USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher is recommended. Some digital audio players may not be compatible. Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work. Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display. Some versions of MP3, WMA, AAC, FLAC, or WAV formats may be unsupported.

iPod, and iPhone Model Compatibility

Model Made for iPod nano (7th generation) released in 2012 Made for iPod touch (5th to 7th generation) released between 2012 and 2019 Made for iPhone 5/iPhone 5s/iPhone 5c/iPhone 6/iPhone 6 Plus/iPhone 6S/ iPhone 6S Plus/iPhone SE/iPhone 7/iPhone 7 Plus/iPhone 8/iPhone 8 Plus/iPhone X/ iPhone XS/iPhone XS Max/iPhone XR/iPhone 11/iPhone 11 Pro/iPhone 11 Pro Max

USB Flash Drives

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement

Honda App License Agreement

Featu res

PLEASE CAREFULLY READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (THIS AGREEMENT) WHICH GOVERNS YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON YOUR HONDA OR ACURA VEHICLE (YOUR VEHICLE) AS WELL AS THE APPLICATIONS, SERVICES, FUNCTIONS, AND CONTENT PROVIDED THROUGH THE SOFTWARE (COLLECTIVELY, THE SERVICES). YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES WILL SERVE AS YOUR CONSENT TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE SOFTWARE IS OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR OPERATED BY AMERICAN HONDA MOTOR CO. INC., (HONDA, US, WE, OR OUR), WITH ITS BUSINESS ADDRESS AT 1919 TORRANCE BLVD., TORRANCE, CA 90501. REFERENCE TO HONDA IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES HONDAS PARENT COMPANY AND ITS AFFILIATES AND DESIGNATED AGENTS. THE SERVICES ARE OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR OPERATED BY HONDA OR A THIRD-PARTY SERVICE PROVIDER (A PROVIDER). REFERENCE TO A PROVIDER IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES SUCH PROVIDERS PARENT COMPANY, AFFILIATES, AND DESIGNATED AGENTS.

A. Description of the Software. The SOFTWARE includes the software, firmware and the like, installed and executing on your VEHICLE during manufacture, and thereafter updated from time to time by HONDA, you or an authorized HONDA dealer (a DEALER). The SOFTWARE allows you to access and use a variety of SERVICES, including but not limited to: (a) HONDA applications, services, and content provided through the SOFTWARE (together, HONDA SERVICES); and (b) PROVIDER applications, services, and content provided through the SOFTWARE (together, PROVIDER SERVICES), each of which may provide access to various information, media, content, and services.

B. SOFTWARE Licensing and Intellectual Property. 1. SOFTWARE. This AGREEMENT grants you a non-exclusive, limited, and revocable license to use the SOFTWARE and SERVICES solely (a) as installed on your VEHICLE by HONDA, (b) as updated on your Vehicle by HONDA, you (but only as and when directed by HONDA), or a DEALER and (c) as permitted under the terms of this AGREEMENT.

2. HONDA Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various HONDA SERVICES. Installation, activation, or use of HONDA SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies applicable to those HONDA SERVICES (the HONDA TERMS). You acknowledge and agree that any collection, use, sharing of data generated by your VEHICLE or your use of your VEHICLE, and your use of the HONDA SERVICES shall be subject to this AGREEMENT and any additional HONDA TERMS that may be specifically applicable to such HONDA SERVICES or data generation. The HONDA SERVICES may collect, use, and share such data while you are using the SOFTWARE.

END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT

331Continued

332

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement

Featu res

3. Open-Source Software. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may incorporate software licensed to HONDA under free or open-source licenses which govern HONDAs distribution and your use of such software. HONDA and the third-party authors, licensors, and distributors of such software disclaim all warranties and all liability arising from any and all use or distribution of the software. To the extent such software is provided under terms that differ from the applicable free or open-source licenses, those terms are offered by HONDA alone. Additional information regarding free and open-source software incorporated in the SOFTWARE and SERVICES is available in this manual or within the SOFTWARE.

4. Provider Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various PROVIDER SERVICES. Installation or use of such PROVIDER SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies of the applicable PROVIDER (the PROVIDER TERMS). This AGREEMENT restricts the manner in which you can install and use PROVIDER SERVICES but does not grant you a license or permission to use such PROVIDER SERVICES. Your permission to use PROVIDER SERVICES is limited and subject to any license grants, conditions, and limitations included in the PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge that any collection, use, sharing of your information, targeted advertising practices by PROVIDERS, and your use of the PROVIDER SERVICES shall be subject to both this AGREEMENT and any applicable PROVIDER TERMS. The PROVIDER SERVICES may collect, use, and share such information while you are using the SOFTWARE.

5. License Limitations and Restrictions on Use. (a) Limited License. You understand and agree that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are licensed, not sold, to you solely for use in accordance with this AGREEMENT and any applicable PROVIDER TERMS, and any documentation for the VEHICLE made available to you by HONDA (any DOCUMENTATION). HONDA and its licensors reserve all rights in the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES not expressly granted to you under this AGREEMENT. PROVIDERS and their licensors reserve all rights in the PROVIDER SERVICES not expressly granted to you under the applicable PROVIDER TERMS.

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement Featu

res

(b) Restrictions on Use. The licenses granted under this AGREEMENT do not permit you to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES on a device other than your VEHICLE. As a condition of using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, you agree that you may not and will not:

6. Intellectual Property Rights. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, the accompanying DOCUMENTATION, and all copies of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are owned by HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their suppliers or licensors. This AGREEMENT does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their licensors, affiliates, or suppliers.

(1) copy, download, distribute, modify, publish, sell, rent, lease, lend, license, sublicense, reuse, or create derivative works of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES or any of the content or other material within the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including without limitation, HONDA or PROVIDER names, logos, or any other trademarks of HONDA or PROVIDERS or used in association with the SOFTWARE or any SERVICES, except as required to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in accordance with this AGREEMENT, any applicable PROVIDER TERMS, and the DOCUMENTATION; (2) access or use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in any manner intended to damage or impair the operation of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES or interfere with anyone elses use and enjoyment of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES; (3) access or attempt to access any system or server on which the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is hosted or modify or alter the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in any way; (4) use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES for any unlawful purpose, or in violation of any third party rights; (5) use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in violation of any applicable traffic regulations, rules or laws, including but not limited to any driver distraction laws, rules or regulations; (6) violate the terms of this AGREEMENT, any HONDA TERMS, any PROVIDER TERMS or other applicable third-party terms, conditions, and privacy policies; or (7) reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, attempt to derive the source code of, nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble, or attempt to derive the source code of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted (a) by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation or (b) the terms of applicable free or opensource software licenses.

333Continued

334

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement

Featu res

7. Export Restrictions: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to U.S., European Union, and other export jurisdictions. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use, and destination restrictions issued by the U.S. and other governments.

C. SOFTWARE Operation 1. HONDA reserves the right to suspend or terminate your access to and use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES if you are found to be in violation of this AGREEMENT or as reasonably deemed necessary by HONDA.

2. Eligibility/Registration/Activation. The SOFTWARE is intended for and available to individuals who (a) are of legal age of majority in their jurisdiction of residence (and at least 18 years of age), or are younger than 18 years of age and possess a valid drivers license issued by their jurisdiction of residence, and (b) own or have permissive access to a compatible VEHICLE. We do not knowingly collect any information, including personal information, from children under 13. If we learn or are notified that we have collected personal information of a child under 13, we will immediately take steps to delete such information.

3. Use of PROVIDER SERVICES through the SOFTWARE. Certain PROVIDER SERVICES made available through the SOFTWARE may require that you register or otherwise have an account with the PROVIDER and agree to PROVIDER TERMS. Any use of any of such PROVIDER SERVICES within the SOFTWARE is subject to this AGREEMENT and the applicable PROVIDER TERMS. HONDA does not exercise control over such PROVIDER SERVICES and is not responsible or liable for the availability, security, or content of such PROVIDER SERVICES, and the inclusion of any PROVIDER SERVICES does not imply a referral from, the approval of, or the endorsement by HONDA of such PROVIDER SERVICES. HONDA is not responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for any damage relating to or resulting from your use of the PROVIDER SERVICES.

4. Links to Third Party Sites: The SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to access third-party sites and content through the use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. The third-party sites and content are not under the control of HONDA. HONDA is not responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for such third-party websites and their content or for any damage relating to or resulting from your access or use of such websites and content.

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement Featu

res

5. Unauthorized Use and Abuse. You are responsible for ensuring your (and any authorized third parties) use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES remains in compliance with this AGREEMENT and all other applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge and agree that any use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES occurring through your VEHICLE will be deemed your actions and that HONDA and PROVIDERS may rely upon such actions. You agree to immediately notify us if you suspect fraudulent or abusive activity involving the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. If you so notify us or if we otherwise suspect fraudulent or abusive activity, you agree to cooperate with us in any fraud investigation and to use any fraud prevention measures we prescribe. Your failure to immediately notify us or cooperate to use such measures will result in your liability for all fraudulent usage or abusive activity associated with your VEHICLE.

6. SOFTWARE Updates. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be updated when your VEHICLE is serviced by a DEALER or remotely, over-the- air, by HONDA from time to time; such updates may occur with or without further notice or your future consent. The SOFTWARE may be updated at HONDAs discretion and for any purpose including, without limitation, to patch or otherwise improve the SOFTWARE or SERVICES functionality, security, or stability. All updates to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to this AGREEMENT and any other applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS.

7. Uninstalling, Removing, and Replacing the SOFTWARE. Replacing SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES with software or firmware not provided and installed by HONDA or a DEALER will render all representations and warranties for the SOFTWARE, HONDA SERVICES, and VEHICLE functionality reliant upon the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES null and void.

D. SOFTWARE Operational Notices and Warnings 1. Vehicle Geolocation Information. You acknowledge that your VEHICLE may be equipped with certain traffic and map features. The traffic feature will automatically collect and transmit, through GPS technology, your Vehicles current location (longitude and latitude), travel direction and speed (VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION) to HONDA and PROVIDERS. The VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION is used by HONDA and PROVIDERS to provide traffic and navigation-related information to you, but may also be used to provide other SERVICES or offers to you. HONDA will not use such VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION for its own marketing efforts, or provide such information to unaffiliated third parties for their own purposes, without your express consent.

335Continued

336

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement

Featu res

2. Potential Map Inaccuracy and Route Safety. Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in roads, traffic controls, routing, or driving conditions. Always use good judgment and common sense when following suggested routes. Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal driving maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route you to emergency services. Not all emergency services such as police, fire stations, hospitals, or clinics are likely to be contained in the map database for such navigation features. Ask local authorities or an emergency services operator for such locations and routes. The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions. Any navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations. Navigation features are not a substitute for your personal judgment. Any route suggestions made by the SOFTWARE or SERVICES should never replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving practices.

3. Speech Recognition: You acknowledge and understand that HONDA and PROVIDERS may record, retain, and use voices commands when you use the speech recognition components of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. You and all VEHICLE operators and passengers (a) consent to the recording and retention of voice commands in support of providing speech recognition components and (b) release HONDA and PROVIDERS from all claims, liabilities, and losses that may result from any use of such recorded voice commands. Recognition errors are inherent in speech recognition. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech recognition functions included in the system and address any errors. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech recognition process.

4. Distraction Hazards. Navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) input or setup. Attempting to perform such set-up or insert data while driving can seriously distract your attention and could cause a crash or other serious consequences; the ability to undertake such interactions may also be limited by state or local law, which laws you are responsible to know and follow. Even occasional short scans of the screen may be hazardous if your attention has been diverted away from your driving at a critical time. Pull over and stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention. Do not raise the volume excessively. Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving. Driving while unable to hear these sounds could result in a crash.

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement Featu

res

E. Information Collection and Storage 1. Information Collection, Use, Transmission and Storage of Data. Consent to Use of Data: You agree that HONDA and PROVIDERS may collect and use your information gathered in any manner as part of product support services related to the SOFTWARE or related services. HONDA may share such information with third parties, including, without limitation, PROVIDERS, third party software and services suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agents, solely to improve their products or to provide services or technologies to you. HONDA, third party software and systems suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may disclose this information to others, but not in a form that personally identifies you.

2. Information Storage. Depending on the type of multimedia system you have in your VEHICLE, certain information may be stored for ease of use of the SOFTWARE including, without limitation, search history, location history in certain applications, previous and saved destinations, map locations within certain applications, and device numbers and contact information.

(a) Vehicle Health Information. Your VEHICLE may remotely transmit information regarding the status and health of your VEHICLE (VEHICLE INFORMATION) to HONDA without notification to you. VEHICLE INFORMATION may contain VEHICLE maintenance and malfunction status that is derived from VEHICLE diagnostic data and includes, but is not limited to, status of powered doors and windows, battery life data, battery charging data, VEHICLE speed, coolant temperature, air compressor revolution, output power, warning codes, diagnostic trouble codes, fuel injection volume, and engine rotations per minute. VEHICLE HEALTH INFORMATION may be used by HONDA for research and development, to deliver HONDA SERVICES and information to you, and to contact you, and is retained only for a period of time necessary to fulfill these goals.

(b) VEHICLE Geolocation Data (non-navigation/map based). If you opt-in to geolocation-based SERVICES, your vehicles geolocation data (latitude and longitude) will be automatically sent from your VEHICLE to HONDA and PROVIDERS.

(c) You understand that the inputting or uploading of information to your VEHICLEs multimedia system or the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is at your own risk and that HONDA is not responsible for unauthorized access to or use of any personal or other information. All information uploaded to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be stored on your VEHICLESs multimedia system and you understand that the security and safety of your VEHICLEs multimedia system is your sole responsibility.

337Continued

338

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement

Featu res

F. NO WARRANTY. You understand and agree that your use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are solely at your own risk and that you will be solely responsible for any damage to your VEHICLEs multimedia system or any other equipment or any loss of data that may result from your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. THE SOFTWARE AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED ON AN AS IS AND AS AVAILABLE BASIS WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESSED, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY. WE SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. HONDA makes no warranties that the SOFTWARE or SERVICES will meet your requirements, or that the SOFTWARE or SERVICES will be uninterrupted, timely, secure, non- infringing or error free. You understand and agree that you are responsible for any and all charges, costs or expenses associated with your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. Advice or information, whether oral or written, obtained by you from us or through the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are provided for informational purposes only and will not create any warranty not expressly made herein. You should not rely on any such information or advice. We assume no liability or responsibility for any errors or omissions in the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. We do not make any warranty or representation that your use of the material displayed on, or obtained through, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is non-infringing of any rights of any third party. Any decision or action taken by you on the basis of information or content provided via the application is at your sole discretion and risk. HONDA and PROVIDERS are not responsible or liable for any such decision, or for the accuracy, completeness, usefulness, or availability of any content or information displayed, transmitted, or otherwise made available via the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. To the extent jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of certain warranties, some of the above exclusions may not apply to you.

G. LIMITATIONS ON LIABILITY. You and HONDA are each waiving important rights. 1. Limitations on YOUR liability. HONDA cannot recover from you any consequential, indirect, incidental, or special damages, or attorneys fees in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES. HONDA WAIVES TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT.

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement Featu

res

2. Limitation on HONDA and PROVIDER liability. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable to you or any other party for consequential, indirect, incidental, special, or punitive damages (including without limitation lost profits) in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, even if HONDA or PROVIDERS are aware of the possibility of such damages. These limitations apply to all claims, including, without limitation, claims in contract and tort (such as negligence, product liability and strict liability). To the extent that a jurisdiction does not permit the exclusion or limitation of liability as set forth herein our liability is limited to the maximum extent permitted by law in such states. If HONDA or PROVIDERS are found liable to you for any reason, you agree that the aggregate liability of all these parties to you for any claim is limited to ten U.S. dollars (US $10.00). Neither HONDA nor any PROVIDER would have agreed to provide the SOFTWARE or SERVICES to you if you did not agree to this limitation. This amount is the sole and exclusive liability of HONDA and PROVIDERS to you, and is payable as liquidated damages and not as a penalty. Except where prohibited by law, you may not bring any claim against HONDA or any third-party beneficiary more than two (2) years after the claim arises. We do not have any liability for SOFTWARE or SERVICES interruptions of any length.

(a) Release of HONDA and PROVIDERS For yourself and anyone else claiming under you, you agree to release and discharge HONDA, PROVIDERS, their respective officers, directors, and employees, and each third-party beneficiary from all claims, liabilities and losses in connection with the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including, but not limited to claims for personal injury or property damage arising from the total or partial failure of performance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, even if caused by or based upon the negligence, gross negligence, strict products liability, Deceptive Trade Practices Act violations, bad faith, or breach of warranty of us or the malfunction of the SOFTWARE or SOFTWARE SERVICES. YOU AGREE TO WAIVE TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT. YOU HEREBY RELEASE AND DISCHARGE HONDA AND ITS LICENSORS AND CONTRACTORS (INCLUDING ANY THIRD PARTIES PROVIDING ALL OR PART OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES) FROM AND AGAINST ANY CLAIMS, DAMAGES, EXPENSES AND LIABILITY ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO ANY INJURIES, DAMAGES, OR LOSSES TO ANY PERSON (INCLUDING DEATH) OR PROPERTY OF ANY KIND RESULTING IN WHOLE OR PART, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, FROM YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES.

H. Survival. You agree that the limitations of liability and indemnities in this AGREEMENT will survive even after the AGREEMENT has ended. These limitations of liability apply not only to you, but to anyone using the SOFTWARE or SERVICES via your VEHICLE, to anyone making a claim on your behalf, and to any claims made by your family, employees, customers, or others arising out of or relating to your VEHICLE, the SOFTWARE, or SERVICES.

339Continued

340

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement

Featu res

I. Availability/Interruption. The SOFTWARE and certain SERVICES are made available through your VEHICLEs compatible multimedia system when the VEHICLE is turned on. Certain SERVICES may be available only through your compatible mobile device when it is within the operating range of the VEHICLE and a wireless carrier. The availability of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be subject to transmission limitation or interruption, including but not limited to technical obsolesce or sunsetting of the hardware, software or firmware, inside of or external to the Vehicle, required for data transmission or receipt. HONDA does not guarantee that the SOFTWARE, SERVICES, or any portion thereof will be available at all times or in all areas. You acknowledge and agree that HONDA is not responsible for performance degradation, interruption or delays. You acknowledge that HONDA shall not be liable to you if the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in a given location are not available. If the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are not available within your intended location, you agree that your sole remedy shall be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES.

J. PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support for the SOFTWARE is provided by HONDA. For product support, please refer to HONDA instructions provided in the DOCUMENTATION. Should you have any questions concerning this AGREEMENT, or if you desire to contact HONDA for any other reason, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION.

K. Termination and Transfer. 1. Termination. This AGREEMENT is effective until terminated by you or US. WE may terminate this AGREEMENT for any or no reason, and with or without notice to you. Your rights under this AGREEMENT will terminate automatically without notice from US if you fail to comply with any term of this AGREEMENT. Upon termination of this AGREEMENT, you shall cease all use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES.

2. Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights under this AGREEMENT only as part of a sale or transfer of the VEHICLE, provided you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES (including all component parts, the media and printed materials, and any upgrades), and the recipient agrees to the terms of this AGREEMENT. You agree to notify HONDA upon the sale or transfer of the VEHICLE. To contact HONDA, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION.

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement Featu

res

L. Changes to the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. WE may change, modify, or update the SOFTWARE or SERVICES from time to time. Unless explicitly stated otherwise, any new features or services that augment or enhance the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in the future shall respectively be considered part of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES and subject to this AGREEMENT. WE reserve the right at any time and from time to time to interrupt, restrict, modify, suspend, discontinue, temporarily or permanently, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES (or any portion thereof), with or without notice to you, and you agree that HONDA shall not be liable to you or to any third party for any modification, suspension or discontinuance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES.

M. ARBITRATION: PLEASE READ THIS ARBITRATION PROVISION CAREFULLY TO UNDERSTAND YOUR RIGHTS. YOU AGREE THAT ANY CLAIM THAT YOU MAY HAVE IN THE FUTURE MUST BE RESOLVED THROUGH BINDING ARBITRATION. YOU WAIVE THE RIGHT TO HAVE YOUR DISPUTE HEARD IN COURT AND WAIVE THE RIGHT TO BRING CLASS CLAIMS. YOU UNDERSTAND THAT DISCOVERY AND APPEAL RIGHTS ARE MORE LIMITED IN ARBITRATION. Arbitration is a method of resolving a claim, dispute or controversy without filing a lawsuit. By agreeing to arbitrate, the right to go to court is waived and instead claims, disputes or controversies are submitted to binding arbitration. This provision sets forth the terms and conditions of our agreement. YOU and HONDA agree and acknowledge that this Agreement affects interstate commerce and the Federal Arbitration Act (FAA) applies. By using the Software, Vehicle, or Services, YOU elect to have disputes resolved by arbitration. YOU, HONDA or any involved third party may pursue a Claim. Claim means any dispute between YOU, HONDA, or any involved third party relating to your use of the Software, the Vehicle, or the Services, this Agreement, or our relationship, including any representations, omissions or warranties. Claim does not include personal injury or wrongful death claims. YOU or HONDA may seek remedies in small claims court or provisional judicial remedies without arbitrating. In addition, notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, YOU or HONDA may seek equitable relief in a court of competent jurisdiction. YOU or HONDA may select arbitration with American Arbitration Association, JAMS or National Arbitration and Mediation. Contact these sponsors for their rules. The hearing will be in the federal district where YOU reside. If agreed, it may be by telephone or written submissions. Filing and arbitrator fees to be paid per the sponsor rules. You may contact the sponsor for a fee waiver. If no fee waivers, HONDA will pay filing and arbitrator fees up to $5,000, unless law requires more. Each party is responsible for other fees. Arbitrator may award costs or fees to prevailing party, if permitted by law. HONDA will not seek fees, unless the claims are frivolous.

341Continued

342

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement

Featu res

N. Miscellaneous: You may not assign this AGREEMENT without HONDAs prior written consent. This AGREEMENT and any additional HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS represents the entire agreement between you and US. HONDA may amend the terms of this AGREEMENT by providing you with notices of such updated terms. If you do not consent to be bound by the updated terms, your sole remedy will be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES. If any part of this AGREEMENT is found invalid, void, or unenforceable, the balance of the AGREEMENT will remain valid and enforceable according to its terms. To the fullest extent permitted by law, and except as explicitly provided otherwise, this AGREEMENT and any disputes arising out of or relating to it will be governed by the laws of the State of California, except that California laws concerning choice of law or conflicts shall not apply if they would cause the substantive law of another jurisdiction to apply. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Section M shall be governed by the Federal Arbitration Act and the laws of the State of California, as applicable, as set forth therein. The failure to enforce any term of this AGREEMENT on one occasion shall not prevent enforcement on any other occasion or the enforcement of any other term. Headings and captions shall not be considered included for purposes of interpretation or application hereof, but are for convenience only.

Arbitrator shall be an attorney or current or retired judge familiar with automotive or consumer software. The arbitrator shall follow substantive law, statute of limitations and decide all issues relating to the interpretation, construction, enforceability and applicability of this provision. The arbitrator may order relief permitted by law. This provision is governed and enforceable by the FAA. An award shall include a written opinion and be final, subject to appeal by the FAA. This provision survives termination of this Agreement or relationship, bankruptcy, assignment or transfer. If part of this provision is unenforceable, the remainder remains in effect. If unenforceability allows arbitration as a class action, then this provision is entirely unenforceable. YOU may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at Honda Financial Services, P.O. Box 165007, Irving, TX 75016. HONDA reserves the right to make changes to this provision after providing written notice and an opportunity to opt out.

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto

Legal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto

Featu res

USE OF APPLE CARPLAY IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE, WHICH ARE INCLUDED AS PART OF THE APPLE iOS TERMS OF USE. IN SUMMARY, THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF CARPLAY, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE APPLES PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING APPLES USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY CARPLAY.

USE OF ANDROID AUTO IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE WHICH MUST BE AGREED TO WHEN THE ANDROID AUTO APPLICATION IS DOWNLOADED TO YOUR ANDROID PHONE. IN SUMMARY, THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF ANDROID AUTO, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE GOOGLES PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING GOOGLES USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY ANDROID AUTO.

OWNERS MANUAL LICENSE/LIABILITY STATEMENTS

343Continued

344

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto

Featu res

YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF APPLE CARPLAY OR ANDROID AUTO (THE APPLICATIONS) IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, AND THAT THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS IS PROVIDED AS IS AND AS AVAILABLE, WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND HONDA HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ACCURACY, QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NON- INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY HONDA OR AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY. AS EXAMPLES, AND WITHOUT LIMITATION, HONDA DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF DATA PROVIDED BY THE APPLICATIONS, SUCH AS THE ACCURACY OF DIRECTIONS, ESTIMATED TRAVEL TIME, SPEED LIMITS, ROAD CONDITIONS, NEWS, WEATHER, TRAFFIC, OR OTHER CONTENT PROVIDED BY APPLE, GOOGLE, THEIR AFFILIATES, OR THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE AGAINST LOSS OF APPLICATION DATA, WHICH MAY BE LOST AT ANY TIME; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE THAT THE APPLICATIONS OR ANY SERVICES PROVIDED THROUGH THEM WILL BE PROVIDED AT ALL TIMES OR THAT ANY OR ALL SERVICES WILL BE AVAILABLE AT ANY PARTICULAR TIME OR LOCATION. FOR EXAMPLE, SERVICES MAY BE SUSPENDED OR INTERRUPTED WITHOUT NOTICE FOR REPAIR, MAINTENANCE, SECURITY FIXES, UPDATES, ETC., SERVICES MAY BE UNAVAILABLE IN YOUR AREA OR LOCATION, ETC. IN ADDITION, YOU UNDERSTAND THAT CHANGES IN THIRD PARTY TECHNOLOGY OR GOVERNMENT REGULATION MAY RENDER THE SERVICES AND/OR APPLICATIONS OBSOLETE AND/OR UNUSABLE.

TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA OR ITS AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, CORRUPTION OR LOSS OF DATA, FAILURE TO TRANSMIT OR RECEIVE ANY DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR ANY OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THE APPLICATIONS OR YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE APPLICATIONS OR INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, HOWEVER CAUSED, REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY (CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF HONDA WERE ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DISALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES, SO THESE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDAS TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL DAMAGES (OTHER THAN AS MAY BE REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN CASES INVOLVING PERSONAL INJURY) EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF FIVE DOLLARS ($5.00). THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS WILL APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE STATED REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.

DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES; LIMITATION ON LIABILITY

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuAbout Open Source Licenses Featu

res

1About Open Source Licenses

Free/Open Source Software Information

This product contains Free/Open Source Software(FOSS). The license information and/or the source code of such FOSS can be found at the following URL:

https://www.denso.com/global/en/opensource/tcu/ honda/

Models with Telematics Control Unit

About Open Source Licenses To see the open source license information, follow these steps.

1. Press the button. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select About. 5. Select Legal Information. 6. Select License.

345

346

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information*

Featu res

License Information*

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Audio, Pro Logic, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc.DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

DOLBY DIGITAL

DTS

* Not available on all models

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information* Featu

res

The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by PANASONIC CORPORATION is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft.

Bluetooth

Windows Media

347Continued

348

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information*

Featu res

Made for iPod, and Made for iPhone, mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, or iPhone, may affect wireless performance. Apple, the Apple Logo, iPhone, iPod nano, iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Apple CarPlay, and Lightning are trademarks of Apple Inc. App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.

Apple

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information* Featu

res

Mpeg4 Visual THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE MPEG-4 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER FOR (i) ENCODING VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUALA STANDARD (MPEG-4 VIDEO) AND/OR (ii) DECODING MPEG-4 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED BY MPEG LA TO PROVIDE MPEG-4 VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL, INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND LICENSING MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, LLC. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.

VC-1 THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE VC-1 PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE VC-1 STANDARD (VC-1 VIDEO) AND/OR (ii) DECODE VC-1 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE VC-1 VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.

MPEG

349Continued

350

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information*

Featu res

AVC/H.264 THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (AVC VIDEO) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.

microSDHC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

SDHC Memory Card

Customized Features

Featu

res

1Customized Features

When you customize settings: Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop. Shift to (P.

To customize features detail, refer to the following. 2 Customization flow P. 352 2 List of customizable options P. 358

Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.

How to customize With the power mode in ON, select Settings, then select a setting item.

Audio/Information Screen

351Continued

352

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

Customization flow

Select Settings.

Automatic Date & Time

Set Date Set Time

System

Press the button.

Automatic Time Zone*

Time Format

Time Zone

Set Date & Time

Touch Panel Sensitivity

System Volumes

Config. of Instrument Panel

Security

Day & Time

(Select time zone)

Language

Auto Daylight Saving Time

Date Format

Verbal Reminder

System Volumes

Reading/Warning

Unknown sources

Password

Select configuration

* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

Caption

Language

Caption style

Status

Information

Manager

nt Location uests Apps

aption

speech output

Text Size

Detail Information

Factory Data Reset

About

Refuel recommend*

Accessibility

Legal

App

Rece Req

C

Text-to-

353Continued* Not available on all models

354

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

+ Connect New Device

(Saved Devices)

Change Mode

ilable Networks/Connected Devices)

Android Auto

Treble

woofer*

idrange

Bass

Apple CarPlay

+ Connect New Device

(Saved Devices)

+ Connect New Device

(Saved Devices)

Connections Bluetooth

Wi-Fi

(Ava

Display

Sound

Day Mode

Night Mode

Sub

Bass / Treble

Speed Volume Compensation

Balance / Fader

DTS Neural Surround*

M

Smartphone Connection*2

*1: Models with wireless Apple CarPlay and wireless Android Auto *2: Models without wireless Apple CarPlay and wireless Android Auto

Smartphone Connection*1

Android Auto

Apple CarPlay

* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

resAdjust Outside Temp. Display

Trip A Reset Timing

Trip B Reset Timing

Reverse Alert Tone*

Config. of Instrument Panel

Adjust Alarm Volume

Turn By Turn Auto Display

Fuel Efficiency Backlight

Blind Spot Info*

Head-up Warning*

raffic Sign Recognition System

rward Collision Warning Distance CC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep

ne Keeping Assist Suspend Beep ad Departure Mitigation Setting

Driver Attention Monitor

Speed/Distance Units

Tachometer

Language Selection

Engine Idle Stop Guidance Screens*

Rear Seat Reminder*

Vehicle

Meter Setup

TPMS Calibration

Driver Assist System Setup

T

Fo A

La Ro

Auto

355Continued* Not available on all models

356

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

Interior Light Dimming Time

Headlight Auto OFF Timer

Auto Light Sensitivity*

Auto Door Lock

Auto Door Unlock

Key and Remote Unlock Mode Keyless Lock Answer Back

Security Relock Timer

Select Reset Items

Walk Away Auto Lock*

t Position Movement at Entry/Exit

Memory Position Link

Door Unlock Mode Smart Entry Light Flash

Smart Entry Beep

Remote Start System ON/OFF

to Headlight On with Wiper On

to Interior Illumination Sensitivity

Lighting Setup

Door/Window Setup

Maintenance Info.

Driving Position Setup* Sea

Keyless Access Setup*

Au

Au

* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

Fixed Guideline

Dynamic Guideline

Camera Rear Camera

Cross Traffic Monitor*

357Continued* Not available on all models

358

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

List of customizable options

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

System Day & Time

Set Date & Time

Automatic Date & Time

Selects ON to have the GPS automatically adjust the clock. Select OFF to cancel this function.

ON*1/OFF

Set Date Adjusts date. 2 Adjusting the Clock P. 166

Set Time Adjusts clock. 2 Adjusting the Clock P. 166

Time Zone

Automatic Time Zone*

Sets the navigation system to automatically adjust the clock when driving through different time zones.

ON*1/OFF

(Select time zone)

Changes the time zone manually.

Auto Daylight Saving Time

Select ON to have the GPS automatically adjust the clock to daylight savings time. Select OFF to cancel this function.

ON*1/OFF

Date Format Sets the date format. MM/DD/YYYY*1/ DD/MM/YYYY/ YYYY/MM/DD

Time Format Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H. 12H*1/24H

* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

System

Language Changes the display language. English (United States)*1/Espaol/ Franais

Touch Panel Sensitivity

Sets the sensitivity of the touch panel screen. High/Normal*1

System Volumes

System Volumes Changes the system sounds volume.

Reading/ Warning

Verbal Reminder

Turns the verbal reminders on and off. ON*1/OFF

Config. of Instrument Panel

Select configuration Selects whether the apps display comes on or not on the driver information interface.

Config.1*1/Config.2/ Config.3

Security Password Set the value of password display. ON*1/OFF

Unknown sources ON/OFF*1

359Continued

360

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

System Accessibility

Caption

Caption Turns the subtitles on and off. ON/OFF*1

Language Change the subtitle language. Default*1/English (United States)/ Espaol/Franais

Text Size Change the subtitle Text Size. Very small/Small/ Normal*1/Large

Caption style

Change the subtitle Caption style.

Use app defaults*1/ White on black/ Black on white/ Yellow on black/ Yellow on blue/ Custom

Text-to- speech output

Current TTS engine TtsService

TtsService

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

System

Refuel recommend*

Turns the refuel recommend function on and off. 2 Refuel Recommend P. 400

ON*1/OFF

About Status

Displays the Android setting items. Legal Information

Factory Data Reset

Resets all the settings to their factory default. 2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 370 Continue/Cancel

Detail Information

App Manager Displays the Android system memory and apps information.

Recent Location Requests Apps

Displays the recent location requests from apps.

361Continued* Not available on all models

362

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

*1:Default Setting *2:Models with wireless Apple CarPlay and wireless Android Auto *3:Models without wireless Apple CarPlay and wireless Android Auto

Setup Group

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Smartph- one Connect- ion*2

Apple CarPlay

+ Connect New Device

Pairs a new phone to Apple CarPlay. 2 Phone Setup P. 379

(Saved Devices) Connects, disconnects, or deletes a paired phone. 2 Phone Setup P. 379

Android Auto

+ Connect New Device

Pairs a new phone to Android Auto. 2 Phone Setup P. 379

(Saved Devices) Connects, disconnects, or deletes a paired phone. 2 Phone Setup P. 379

Connec- tions

Wi-Fi

Change Mode Changes the Wi-Fi mode. Network*1/Hotspot/ OFF

(Available Networks/ Connected Devices)

Displays the available network(s) or current connected device(s).

Bluetooth

+ Connect New Device

Pairs a new phone to HFL. 2 Phone Setup P. 379

(Saved Devices) Connects, disconnects, or deletes a paired phone. 2 Phone Setup P. 379

Smartphone Connection*3

Apple CarPlay Sets up the Apple CarPlay connection.

Android Auto Sets up the Android Auto connection.

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Display Day Mode Adjusts the settings of the audio/information

screen. 2 Display Setup P. 273

Night Mode

Sound

Bass / Treble

Treble

Adjusts the settings of the audio speakers sound. 2 Adjusting the Sound P. 272

Midrange

Bass

Subwoofer*

Balance / Fader

DTS Neural Surround*

Speed Volume Compensation

Vehicle

TPMS Calibration Cancels/Calibrates the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS).

Calibrate/Cancel

Driver Assist System Setup

Blind Spot Info* Changes the setting for the blind spot information. Audible And Visual Alert*1/Visual Alert

Head-up Warning* Turns the head-up warning on and off. ON*1/OFF

Traffic Sign Recognition System

Select On/Off to indicate small displaying traffic sign icon on the driver information interface and the head-up display*.

Small Icons ON*1/ Small Icons OFF

363Continued* Not available on all models

364

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Vehicle

Driver Assist System Setup

Forward Collision Warning Distance

Changes Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) alert distance.

Normal*1/Short/ Long

ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep

Causes the system to beep when the system detects a vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of the ACC with Low Speed Follow range.

ON/OFF*1

Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep

Causes the system to beep when Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) is suspended. ON/OFF*1

Road Departure Mitigation Setting

Changes the setting for the road departure mitigation system.

Normal*1/Wide/ Warning Only/ Narrow

Driver Attention Monitor

Changes the setting for the driver attention monitor.

OFF/Tactile Alert/ Tactile And Audible Alert*1

Meter Setup

Language Selection Changes the display language. English*1/Franais/ Espaol

Adjust Outside Temp. Display

Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.

-5F ~ 0F*1 ~ +5F (U.S.) -3C ~ 0C*1 ~ +3C (Canada)

Rear Seat Reminder* Turns the Rear Seat Reminder feature on and off. ON*1/OFF

Adjust Alarm Volume Changes the alarm volume, such as the buzzers, warnings, turn signal sound, and so on. High/Mid*1/Low

* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Vehicle Meter Setup

Reverse Alert Tone* Turns the reverse alert tone on and off. ON*1/OFF

Config. of Instrument Panel

Selects whether the apps display comes on or not on the driver information interface.

Config.1*1/Config.2/ Config.3

Fuel Efficiency Backlight

Turns the ambient meter feature on and off. ON*1/OFF

Trip A Reset Timing Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A and average fuel economy A.

When Fully Refueled/Manually Reset*1/IGN OFF

Trip B Reset Timing Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B and average fuel economy B.

When Fully Refueled/Manually Reset*1/IGN OFF

Auto Engine Idle Stop Guidance Screens*

Selects whether the Auto Idle Stop display comes on or not.

ON*1/OFF

Tachometer Selects whether the tachometer come on the driver information interface.

ON/OFF*1

Speed/Distance Units Selects the trip computer units.

km/h km/mph miles*1 (U.S.) km/h km*1/mph miles (Canada)

365Continued* Not available on all models

366

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Vehicle

Meter Setup Turn By Turn Auto Display

Selects whether the turn-by-turn display comes on during the route guidance.

ON*1/OFF

Driving Position Setup*

Memory Position Link

Turns the driving position memory system on and off.

ON*1/OFF

Seat Position Movement at Entry/ Exit

Moves the seat rearward when you get in/get out of the vehicle. Changes the setting for this feature.

ON*1/OFF

Keyless Access Setup*

Door Unlock Mode Changes which doors unlock when you grab the drivers door handle.

Driver Door Only*1/ All Doors

Smart Entry Light Flash

Causes some exterior lights to flash when you unlock/lock the doors.

ON*1/OFF

Smart Entry Beep Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock the doors.

ON*1/OFF

Remote Start System ON/OFF

Turns the remote engine start feature on and off. ON*1/OFF

* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Vehicle Lighting Setup

Headlight Auto OFF Timer

Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay on after you close the drivers door.

0 sec/15 sec*1/30 sec/ 60 sec

Interior Light Dimming Time

Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on after you close the doors.

15 sec/30 sec*1/60 sec

Auto Light Sensitivity* Changes the timing for the headlights to come on.

Min/Low/Mid*1/ High/Max

Auto Interior Illumination Sensitivity

Changes the sensitivity of the brightness of the instrument panel when the headlight switch is in AUTO.

Min/Low/Mid*1/ High/Max

Auto Headlight On with Wiper On

Used to automatically come on the headlights when the wipers are used several times within a certain number of intervals with the headlight switch is in AUTO.

ON*1/OFF

367Continued* Not available on all models

368

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Vehicle

Door/Window Setup

Auto Door Lock Changes the setting for the automatic locking feature.

OFF/With Vehicle Speed*1/Shift From P

Key and Remote Unlock Mode

Sets up either the drivers door or all doors to unlock on the first push of the keyless remote or built-in key.

Driver Door Only*1/ All Doors

Keyless Lock Answer Back

LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash. LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.

ON*1/OFF

Security Relock Timer Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock and the security system to set after you unlock the vehicle without opening any door.

30sec*1/60sec/90sec

Auto Door Unlock Changes the setting for when the doors unlock automatically.

OFF/All Doors When Drivers Door Opens*1/All Doors When Shifted to Park/All Doors With IGN OFF

Walk Away Auto Lock*

Changes the settings for the auto lock function when you walk away from the vehicle.

ON/OFF*1

Maintenance Info.

Select Reset Items Resets the engine oil life display when you have performed the maintenance service.

* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Camera Rear Camera

Fixed Guideline Selects whether the guidelines come on the rear camera monitor.

2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 529 ON*1/OFF

Dynamic Guideline Selects whether the guidelines come on the rear camera monitor.

2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 529 ON*1/OFF

Cross Traffic Monitor* Turns the cross traffic monitor on and off. ON*1/OFF

369* Not available on all models

370

uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings

Featu res

1Defaulting All the Settings

When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset all settings to default and delete all personal data.

If you perform Factory Data Reset, it will reset the preinstalled apps to their factory default.

If you perform Factory Data Reset, you cannot use the HondaLink because it goes offline.

2 HondaLink P. 301

Defaulting All the Settings Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.

1. Press the button. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select Factory Data Reset. u A confirmation message appears on the

screen. 5. Select Continue to reset the settings. 6. Select Continue again to reset the settings. u The system will reboot.

1. Press the button. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Vehicle. 4. Select Default. 5. Select Yes.

Defaulting System Settings

Defaulting Vehicle Settings

HomeLink Universal Transceiver*

Featu

res

1HomeLink Universal Transceiver*

Before programming HomeLink to operate a garage door opener, confirm that the opener has an external entrapment protection system, such as an electronic eye, or other safety and reverse stop features. If it does not, HomeLink may not be able to operate it.

NOTE: Some LED lightbulbs installed in the garage door opener can interfere with the training and consistent operation of your HomeLink device. Please consider use of Low RF interference bulbs in your garage door opener.

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver can be programmed to operate up to three remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or home security systems.

Refer to the safety information that came with your garage door opener to test that the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have the safety information, contact the manufacturer.

Before programming HomeLink, make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the garage or gate to prevent potential injury or damage.

When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage doors path.

Important Safety Precautions

371* Not available on all models

372

uuHomeLink Universal Transceiver*uTraining HomeLink

Featu res

Training HomeLink If it is necessary to erase a previously entered learned code: Press and hold the I and III HomeLink

buttons for about 10 seconds, until the green indicator blinks. Release the buttons, and proceed to step 1.

If you are training the second or third button, go directly to step 1.

The instructions on the next page should work for most gate or garage openers, but may not work for all. For detailed instructions about your specific remote opener, visit http://www.homelink.com or call (800) 355-3515.

Indicator

I HomeLink Button

III HomeLink Button

uuHomeLink Universal Transceiver*uTraining HomeLink Featu

res

1Training HomeLink

Reprogramming a Button If you want to retrain a programmed button for a new device, you do not have to erase all button memory. You can replace the existing memory code using this procedure:

Erasing Button Memory To erase programming from the buttons, press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons until the HomeLink indicator changes from orange to rapidly flashing green. This should take about 10 seconds. You should erase all programming before selling the vehicle.

Operating To operate, simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the trained device.

Questions For questions or comments, visit www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/ HomeLinkGentex, or by calling the HomeLink Hotline (North America only) at (800) 355-3515.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation.

2.

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the HomeLink indicator begins to slowly flash orange. This should take about 20 seconds.

Release the HomeLink button and position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 - 3 inches (3 - 8 cm) from the HomeLink button you want to program, then follow steps 3 - 6 under programming a button.

Programming a Button

Training Complete HomeLink LED is

continuously on green.

YES

YES

1. Position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 to 3 inches (3 - 8 cm) from the HomeLink button you want to program.

3b. Canadian Garage Door Opener A. Press and release the HomeLink button. Press, hold and release the button on the remote every 2 secs. Does the HomeLink indicator (LED) change from slowly flashing orange to rapidly flashing or continuously on green? The process should take less than 60 seconds.

NO

2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Is the HomeLink indicator (LED) slowly flashing orange?

NO

3a. Hold the button on the remote transmitter. Does HomeLink indicator (LED) change from slowly flashing orange to rapidly flashing green or continuously on green? The process should take less than 60 seconds.

5. Press and hold the HomeLink button again.

HomeLink indicator rapidly flashes green.

5a. The remote has a rolling code. Press the learn button on the remote-controlled device (e.g. garage door opener).

6. Press and hold the HomeLink button again. The remote-controlled device should operate.

Training Complete 5b. Within 30 secs, press and hold the

programmed HomeLink button for 2 secs.

4. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button for about a second. Does the device (garage door opener) work?

373

374

Featu res

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

1Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

Place your phone where you can get good reception.

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities: U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,

or call 1-888-528-7876. Canada: For more information on smartphone

compatibility, call 1-855-490-7351.

To use the system, the Bluetooth setting must be ON.

2 Phone Setup P. 379

Voice control tips Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the

windows, as noise coming from them may interfere with the microphones.

Press the button when you want to call a number using a phonebook name or a number. Speak clearly and naturally after a beep.

If the microphones pick up voices other than yours, the command may be misinterpreted.

To change the volume level, select the audio systems VOL (Volume) or use the remote audio controls on the steering wheel.

If there is no Favorite Contact entry in the system, the pop-up notification appears on the screen.

2 Favorite Contacts P. 385

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using your vehicles audio system, without handling your cell phone.

Using HFL

HFL Buttons

(Talk) Button

(Hang-up) Button (Pick-up) Button

(Back) Button

(home) Button

VOL (+/VOL (- (Volume) Buttons

Left Selector Wheel

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuUsing HFL Featu

res

1Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

Bluetooth Wireless Technology The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

HFL Limitations An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio system when it is playing. It will resume when the call is ended.

(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the phone menu on the driver information interface, or to answer an incoming call.

(Hang-up) button: Press to end a call. (Back) button: Press to go back to the previous screen, or cancel a command.

(Talk) button: Press to access Voice Portal. Left Selector Wheel: Press the (home) button, then roll up or down to select. Phone on the driver information interface, and then press the left selector wheel.

(home) button: Press to go back to the home screen of the driver information interface.

To go to the phone screen of the driver information interface: 1. Press the (home) button on the steering wheel. 2. Roll up or down the left selector wheel to select Phone, then push the left

selector wheel. u You can select Favorite Contacts or Recent Calls.

Continued 375

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuUsing HFL

376

Featu res

1HFL Status Display

The information that appears on the audio/ information screen varies between phone models.

The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.

Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion. You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.

Only previously stored phonebook names or numbers can be called using voice commands while the vehicle is in motion.

2 Favorite Contacts P. 385

HFL Status Display

Limitations for Manual Operation*

Bluetooth Indicator Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.

Signal Strength

HFL Mode

Battery Level Status

Callers Name (If registered)/ Callers Number (If not registered)

* Not available on all models

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

1HFL Menus

To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth- compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle is parked.

Some functions are limited while driving.

o the system.

ct, or delete a paired device.

atically imported when a phone is paired to HFL.

e to HFL when you enter the vehicle.

HFL Menus The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use the system.

Phone settings screen 1. Press the button. 2. Select Phone. 3. Select Settings.

Change Devices

(Existing entry list)

+ Connect New Device Pair a new phone t

Connect, disconne

Ringtone Select the ringtone.

Auto Sync Phone Set phonebook and call history data to be autom

Auto Phone Call Transfer Set calls to automatically transfer from your phon

HondaLink Assist* Turn HondaLink Assist on and off.

377Continued* Not available on all models

378

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

Featu res

Phone menu screen 1. Press the button. 2. Select Phone.

Display the last outgoing, incoming and missed calls.Recent Calls

Favorite Contacts

All

Dialed

Received

Display the last outgoing calls.

Display the last incoming calls.

Missed Display the last missed calls.

Keypad Enter a phone number to dial.

(Existing entry list) Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.

Contacts Display the phonebook of the paired phone.

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

Bluetooth setup You can turn Bluetooth function on and off. 1. Press the button. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Connections. 4. Select Bluetooth. 5. Select Options. 6. Select Bluetooth, then ON.

Phone Setup

379Continued

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

380

Featu res

1Phone Setup

Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to the system before you can make and receive hands- free calls.

Phone Pairing Tips: You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is

moving. Up to six phones can be paired. Your phones battery may drain faster when it is

paired to the system.

Once you have paired a phone, you can see it displayed on the screen with one or more icons on the right side. These icons indicate the following:

: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth Audio.

: The phone can be used with HFL. *: The phone is compatible with Apple CarPlay. *: The phone is compatible with Android Auto.

If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, pairing of additional Bluetooth compatible devices is unavailable.

To pair a cell phone (when there is no phone paired to the system)

1. Press the button. 2. Select Phone. 3. Select Connect Phone. 4. Make sure your phone is in search or

discoverable mode, then select + Connect New Device. u HFL automatically searches for a

Bluetooth device. 5. Select your phone when it appears on the

list. u If your phone still does not appear,

search for Bluetooth devices using your phone. From your phone, search for HandsFree Link.

6. The system gives you a pairing code on the audio/information screen. u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen

and your phone match. This may vary by phone.

7. Select desired functions and then select Connect.

* Not available on all models

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

1To change the currently paired phone

If no other phones are found or paired when trying to switch to another phone, HFL will inform you that the original phone is connected again.

To pair other phones, select + Connect New Device from the Bluetooth screen.

To change the currently paired phone 1. Go to the phone settings screen.

2 Phone settings screen P. 377

2. Select Change Devices. 3. Select a phone to connect. u HFL disconnects the connected phone

and starts searching for another paired phone.

4. Select , , * or *. u and can be selected

simultaneously, however, when * or * is selected, and cannot be

selected. 5. Select Apply.

Continued 381* Not available on all models

382

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

Featu res

To delete a paired phone 1. Go to the phone settings screen.

2 Phone settings screen P. 377

2. Select Change Devices. 3. Select a phone you want to delete.

4. Select Delete. 5. A confirmation message appears on the

screen. Select Yes.

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

1Ringtone

Vehicle: The fixed ringtone sounds from the speakers. Phone: Depending on the make and model of the mobile phone, the ringtone stored in the phone will sound if the phone is connected.

You can change the ringtone setting. 1. Go to the phone settings screen.

2 Phone settings screen P. 377

2. Select Ringtone. 3. Select Vehicle or Phone.

If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically transferred to HFL.

1. Go to the phone settings screen. 2 Phone settings screen P. 377

2. Select Auto Phone Call Transfer. 3. Select ON or OFF.

Ringtone

Automatic Transferring

Continued 383

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

384

Featu res

1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History

On some phones, you will be asked to allow your cellular phonebook to be imported.

When you select a name from the list in the cellular phonebook, you can see a category icon. The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored for that name.

On some phones, it may not be possible to import the category icons to the system.

The phonebook is updated after every connection. Call history is updated after every connection or call.

Home

Mobile Work

Other

Pager

Car

Pref

Fax

Voice

When Automatic Phone Sync is set to On:

When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are automatically imported to the system.

Changing the Automatic Phone Sync setting

1. Go to the phone settings screen. 2 Phone settings screen P. 377

2. Select Auto Sync Phone. 3. Select ON or OFF.

Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

To store a number as a favorite contact: 1. Go to the phone menu screen.

2 Phone menu screen P. 378

2. Select the Recent Calls, Contacts, or Keypad screen.

3. Select the star icon. u A notification appears on the screen if

the favorite contact is successfully stored. u To remove the favorite contact, select

the star icon again.

Favorite Contacts

Recent Calls Screen

Contacts Screen

Keypad Screen

Star Icon

Star Icon

Star Icon

385Continued

386

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

Featu res

To edit a favorite contact 1. Go to the phone menu screen.

2 Phone menu screen P. 378

2. Select Favorite Contacts. 3. Select Edit on the favorite contact entry

you want to edit. 4. Select a setting you want. 5. Select Save.

To delete a favorite contact 1. Go to the phone menu screen.

2 Phone menu screen P. 378

2. Select Favorite Contacts. 3. Select Edit on the favorite contact entry

you want to delete. 4. Select Remove. 5. A confirmation message appears on the

screen. Select Yes.

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

1Making a Call

Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of the person you are calling through the audio speakers.

While there is an active connection with Apple CarPlay, phone calls cannot be made with HandsFreeLink and are only made from Apple CarPlay.

You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported phonebook, call history, or favorite contact entries.

Making a Call

Continued 387

388

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

Featu res

To make a call using the imported phonebook

1. Go to the phone menu screen. 2 Phone menu screen P. 378

2. Select Contacts. 3. Select a name. u You can sort by First Name or Last

Name. Select the icon on the upper right of the screen.

4. Select a number. u Dialing starts automatically.

To make a call using a phone number 1. Go to the phone menu screen.

2 Phone menu screen P. 378

2. Select Keypad. 3. Select a number. u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for

entering numbers. 4. Select Call. u Dialing starts automatically.

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

1To make a call using the call history

The call history appears only when a phone is connected to the system.

To make a call using the call history Call history is stored by All, Dialed, Missed, and Received. 1. Go to the phone menu screen.

2 Phone menu screen P. 378

2. Select Recent Calls. u You can sort by All, Dialed, Missed, or

Received. Select the icon on the upper right of the screen.

3. Select a number. u Dialing starts automatically.

To make a call using a favorite contact entry

1. Go to the phone menu screen. 2 Phone menu screen P. 378

2. Select Favorite Contacts. u You can change the order of favorite

contact entries by selecting Reorder. 3. Select a number. u Dialing starts automatically.

Continued 389

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

390

Featu res

1Receiving a Call

Call Waiting Press the button to put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call. Press the button again to return to the current call.

Select Ignore to ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer it. Press the button if you want to hang up the current call.

You can select the icons on the audio/information screen instead of the and buttons.

1Options During a Call

You can select the icons on the audio/information screen.

When there is an incoming call, an audible notification sounds (if activated) and the Incoming Call... screen appears.

Press the button to answer the call. Press the button to decline or end the call.

The following options are available during a call. Mute: Mute your voice. Use Handheld: Transfer a call from the system to your phone. Keypad: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven phone system.

The available options are shown on the lower half of the screen.

Select the option. u The mute icon appears when Mute is

selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.

Receiving a Call

Options During a Call

Mute Icon

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

1To Set Up Text Message Options

To use the text message function, it may be necessary to set up on your phone.

1To turn on or off the text message notice

ON: A pop-up notification comes on every time you receive a new message. OFF: The message you receive is stored in the system without notification.

To turn on or off the text message notice

1. Press the button. 2. Select Messages. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Pop-up Notification. 5. Select ON or OFF.

To Set Up Text Message Options

Continued 391

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

392

Featu res

1Receiving a Text Message

Some mobile phones might not be able to read the transmission log of data sent and data received.

The system does not display any received messages while you are driving. You can only hear them read aloud.

The system can only receive messages that are sent as text (SMS) messages. The message sent using the data services will not be displayed in the list.

With some phones, you may be able to display up to 20 of the last text messages received.

State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text message feature. Only use the text message feature when conditions allow you to do so safely.

HFL can display newly received text messages as well as the last 20 messages received on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be read aloud and replied to using a fixed common phrase.

1. Select the system status icon. u The status area appears.

2. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new text message.

3. Select Open to display the message. u The text message is displayed.

4. Select Play to listen to the message. To discontinue the message read-out, select Stop.

Receiving a Text Message

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

1Selecting a Phone

You can only receive notifications from one phone at a time.

You can select one from the Bluetooth device list to be active and receive

notifications. 1. Press the button. 2. Select Messages. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Change Connected Phone. 5. Change a desired phone.

2 To change the currently paired phone P. 381

Selecting a Phone

Continued 393

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

394

Featu res

1Displaying Messages

The (blue) icon appears next to an unread message.

If you delete a message on the phone, the message will also be deleted from the system. If you send a message from the system, the message goes to your phones outbox.

To see the previous or next message, select Prev. or Next on the message screen.

1. Press the button. 2. Select Messages. u Select a phone if necessary.

3. Select a message. u The text message is displayed.

Displaying Messages

Message List

Text Message

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

1Reply to a message

The available reply messages are as follows: Talk to you later, Im driving. Im on my way. Im running late. OK Yes No

The default reply messages are displayed only in English. If you want to use reply messages in languages other than English, please edit them.

2 To edit a reply message P. 396

You can add a reply message by selecting + Create New Message.

2 To edit a reply message P. 396

Only certain phones receive and send messages when paired and connected. For a list of compatible phones: U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,

or call 1-888-528-7876. Canada: For more information on smartphone

compatibility, call 1-855-490-7351.

Read or Stop reading a message 1. Go to the text message screen. 2. Select Play. u The system starts reading the message

aloud. 3. Select Stop to stop reading.

Select Play again to start reading the message.

Reply to a message 1. Go to the text message screen. 2. Select Reply. 3. Select the reply message. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

4. Select Send to send the message. u Message sent appears on the screen

when the reply message was successfully sent.

Continued 395

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

396

Featu res

1To edit a reply message

You can change the order of reply messages by selecting Reorder.

To edit a reply message 1. Press the button. 2. Select Messages. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Edit Replies. 5. Select the reply message you want to edit

or + Create New Message. u The on-screen keyboard screen is

displayed. 6. Enter a reply message, and then select

Save.

To delete a reply message 1. Press the button. 2. Select Messages. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Delete Replies. 5. Select on the reply message you want to

delete. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

6. Select Yes.

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

Making a call to a sender 1. Go to the text message screen. 2. Select Call.

397

398

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHondaLink Assist*

Featu res

1HondaLink Assist*

HondaLink Assist also provides services you can operate from the Internet or your smartphone.

To subscribe to HondaLink Assist, or to get more information about all of its features, contact a Honda dealer, or visit hondalink.honda.com

1In Case of Emergency

Your vehicle may not be able to connect to the operator if the battery level is low, the line is disconnected, or you do not have adequate cellular coverage.

You cannot use this emergency services when: You travel outside the HondaLink service coverage

areas. There is a problem with the connecting devices,

such as the microphones, speakers, or the unit itself.

HondaLink Assist is not enabled. 2 To enable notification P. 399

You cannot operate other phone-related functions using the screen while talking to the operator. Only the operator can terminate the connection to your vehicle.

1Automatic collision notification

If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it repeatedly tries until it succeeds.

HondaLink Assist*

Automatic collision notification If your vehicles airbags deploy or if the unit detects that the vehicle is severely impacted, your vehicle automatically will attempt to connect to the HondaLink operator. If connected, information about your vehicle, its location, and its condition can be sent to the operator*1; you also can speak to the operator when connected.

IMPORTANT: For vehicles equipped with HondaLink Assist, owner activation constitutes authorization for Honda to collect information from your vehicle needed to provide the service, and agreement to the Terms of Use at www.hondalink.com/ TermsAndConditions. In a crash, HondaLink Assist will attempt to notify emergency services but NEITHER HONDA NOR ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS GUARANTEE THAT SUCH NOTIFICATION WILL OCCUR.

Honda reserves the right to terminate HondaLink Assist services at any time or for any reason, and in the future may not be able to provide services due to changes in, or obsolescence of, technology integral to the service or changes in governmental regulation.

*1: Depending on your phone and adequate cellular coverage, your vehicles location may not be sent to the operator.

In Case of Emergency

* Not available on all models

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHondaLink Assist* Featu

res

1To enable notification

Setting options: Yes: Notification is available. No: Disable the feature.

To enable notification 1. Go to the phone settings screen.

2 Phone settings screen P. 377

2. Select HondaLink Assist. 3. Select Yes or No.

399

400

Featu res

Refuel Recommend

1Refuel Recommend

You can turn the Refuel recommend function on and off.

2 Customized Features P. 351

When you turn off this feature, the refuel recommend notification will not display.

This feature can only be used when the gas tank fuel level is below 30 percent.

If you select Find Gas Station Now or put more than 5 liters of gasoline into the gas tank, the notification for refueling will disappear. If you prefer not to be notified, select OFF in the settings for Refuel recommend.

When you drive on a rough road or ascend or descend a hill for an extended period of time, the notification may disappear or may not be displayed at all.

Your vehicle is equipped with a feature that automatically calculates when to refuel. This feature will notify you when refueling is recommended as well as enable you to search for gas stations that are located in the vicinity of your vehicle.

1. When it is time to refuel the vehicle, a notification is displayed and a notification icon is displayed in the header.

2. Touch the box that contains the icon.

3. Select Find Gas Station Now.

4. Choose a gas station from the search screen of the navigation system. u For instructions on how to use the

navigation system, refer to the navigation system manual.

Models with navigation system

Notification icon

* Not available on all m

Driving

This chapter discusses driving and refueling.

Before Driving................................... 402 Towing a Trailer................................ 407 When Driving

Starting the Engine .......................... 412 Precautions While Driving................. 418 Transmission .................................... 419 Shifting............................ 420, 427, 429 SPORT Mode*.................................. 433 ECON Mode .................................... 434 Auto Idle Stop*................................ 435 Adaptive Damper System* ............... 440 Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System..............441

Agile Handling Assist..............................443

odels

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ....444 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation ......... 448

Blind spot information System* ...........450 Honda Sensing ................................ 453

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) ....................................... 456

Low Speed Braking Control*............ 465 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow ................................. 470

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).... 486 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System ....................................... 494

Traffic Sign Recognition System ....... 498

Front Sensor Camera ....................... 504 Radar Sensor ................................... 506 Sonar Sensors* ................................ 507

Braking Brake System................................... 508 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ........... 516 Brake Assist System ......................... 517

Parking Your Vehicle........................ 518 Multi-View Rear Camera.................. 529 Refueling........................................... 531 Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions.... 534 Turbo Engine Vehicle ....................... 535

401

402

D rivin

g

Before Driving

1Exterior Checks

NOTICE When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force them open, as this can damage the rubber trim around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid further freezing.

Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder. You will be unable to insert the key if the water freezes in the hole.

Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite flammable materials left under the hood, causing a fire. If youve parked your vehicle for an extended period, inspect and remove any debris that may have collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a small animal. Also, check under the hood for leftover flammable materials after you or someone else has performed maintenance on your vehicle.

Driving Preparation Check the following items before you start driving.

Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior lights, or other parts of the vehicle. u Remove any frost, snow, or ice. u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of

vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened. u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel

or wheel components. Make sure the hood is securely closed. u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.

Make sure the tires are in good condition. u Check air pressure, and check for damage and excessive wear.

2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 575

Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle. u There are blind spots from the inside.

Exterior Checks

uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation D

rivin g

1Interior Checks

The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry heavy items in the trunk or tow a trailer*, have the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician.

Store or secure all items on board properly. u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicles

handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe. 2 Maximum Load Limit P. 405

Do not pile items higher than the seat height. u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden

braking. Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor

mat. u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator

pedal operation while driving. If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle. u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.

Securely close and lock all doors and the trunk. 2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 177

Adjust your seating position properly. u Adjust the head restraint, too.

2 Seats P. 212 2 Adjusting the Front and Rear Outer* Head Restraint Positions P. 219

Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly. u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.

2 Mirrors P. 210 2 Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 209

Interior Checks

Continued 403* Not available on all models

404

uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation

D rivin

g

Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the seats. u They can interfere with the drivers ability to operate the pedals, or the

operation of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats. Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.

2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 42

Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the vehicle, and go off soon after. u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.

2 Indicators P. 82

uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit D

rivin g

1Maximum Load Limit

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all accessories, all cargo, and the tongue load*.

2 Specifications P. 632, 634

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.

2 Specifications P. 632, 634

3WARNING Overloading or improper loading can affect handling and stability and cause a crash in which you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and other loading guidelines in this manual.

Maximum Load Limit The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg). See the Tire and Loading Information label attached to the drivers doorjamb.

This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer*.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit - (1)Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs. on your vehicles placard.

(2)Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

(3)Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

(4)The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

Label Example

405Continued* Not available on all models

uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit

406

D rivin

g

1Maximum Load Limit

Towing a Trailer: See Towing a Trailer to determine whether your vehicle is designed to tow a trailer.

2 Towing a Trailer P. 407

(5)Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the drivers doorjamb.

Load Limits Example

Example1

Max Load 850 lbs (385 kg)

Passenger Weight 150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs (68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)

Cargo Weight 550 lbs

(249 kg)

Example2

Max Load 850 lbs (385 kg)

Passenger Weight 150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs (68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)

Cargo Weight 100 lbs (45 kg)

Towing a Trailer

D

rivin g

1Towing Load Limits

Check if all loads are within limits at a public scale. If a public scale is not available, add the estimated weight of your cargo load to the weight of your trailer (as quoted by the manufacturer), and the tongue load.

Break-in Period. Avoid towing a trailer during your vehicles first 600 miles (1,000 km).

Never exceed the gross weight ratings. Gross weight information

2 Vehicle Specifications P. 634

3WARNING Exceeding any load limit or improperly loading your vehicle and trailer can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Check the loading of your vehicle and trailer carefully before starting to drive.

Your vehicle is not designed to tow a trailer. Attempting to do so can void your warranties.

Towing Preparation

Your vehicle can tow a trailer if you carefully observe the load limits, use the proper equipment, and follow the towing guidelines. Check the load limits before driving.

Total trailer weight Maximum allowable weight of the trailer, cargo, and everything in or on it must not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg). Towing loads in excess of this can seriously affect vehicle handling and performance and can damage the engine and drivetrain.

Towing Load Limits

1.5 L engine models

2.0 L engine models

Total Load

407Continued

408

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation

D rivin

g

Tongue load The weight of the tongue with a fully loaded trailer on the hitch should be approximately 10% of the total trailer weight. Excessive tongue load reduces front tire

traction and steering control. Too little tongue load can make the trailer unstable and cause it to sway.

To achieve a proper tongue load, start by loading 60% of the load toward the front of the trailer and 40% toward the rear. Readjust the load as needed.

Tongue LoadTong d

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation D

rivin g

1Towing Equipment and Accessories

Make sure that all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province/ territory, and local regulations.

Consult your trailer maker for proper installation and setup of the equipment. Improper installation and setup can affect the handling, stability, and braking performance of your vehicle.

Consult your trailer sales or rental agency if any other items are recommended or required for your towing situation.

The lighting and wiring of trailers can vary by type and brand. If a connector is required, it should only be installed by a qualified technician.

Towing equipment varies by the size of your trailer, how much load you are towing, and where you are towing.

Hitches The hitch must be of an approved type and properly bolted to the underbody.

Safety chains Always use safety chains when you tow a trailer. Leave enough slack to allow the trailer to turn corners easily, but do not allow the chains to drag on the ground.

Trailer brakes There are two common types of trailer brakes: surge and electric. Surge brakes are common for boat trailers, since the brakes will get wet. If you choose electric brakes, be sure they are electronically actuated. Do not attempt to attach trailer brakes to your vehicles hydraulic system, as it will lower braking effectiveness and create a potential hazard.

Additional towing equipment Many states and provinces/territories require special outside mirrors when towing a trailer. Even if mirrors are not required in your locale, you should install special mirrors if visibility is restricted in any way.

Trailer light Trailer lights and equipment must comply with federal, state, province/territory, and local regulations. Check with your local trailer sales or rental agency for the requirements in the area where you plan to tow.

Towing Equipment and Accessories

409

410

uuTowing a TraileruDriving Safely with a Trailer

D rivin

g

1Driving Safely with a Trailer

Operating speed when towing a trailer must not exceed 62 mph (100 km/h).

Parking In addition to the normal precautions, place wheel chocks at each of the trailers tires.

1Towing Speeds and Gears

When towing a fixed-sided trailer (e.g., camper), do not exceed 55 mph (88 km/h). At higher speeds, the trailer may sway or affect vehicle handling.

Driving Safely with a Trailer

Have the trailer properly serviced and keep it in good condition. Make sure that all the weights and load in the vehicle and trailer are within limits.

2 Towing Load Limits P. 407

Securely attach the hitch, safety chains, and other necessary parts to the trailer. Securely store all the items in and on the trailer so that they do not shift while

driving. Check if the lights and brakes on the trailer are working properly. Check the pressure of the trailer tires, including the spare.

Turn off the Low Speed Braking Control system. It may activate if it detects the vehicle being towed as an obstacle.

2 System On and Off P. 467

Turn off the rear parking sensor system. 2 Turning off All Rear Sensors P. 524

Drive slower than normal. Obey posted speed limits for vehicles with trailers. Use the (D position when towing a trailer on level roads.

Turn more slowly and with a wider turning arc than normal. Allow more time and distance for braking. Do not brake or turn suddenly.

Things You Need To Know Before Towing a Trailer

Towing Speeds and Gears

Turning and Braking

2.0 L engine models

Models with Low Speed Braking Control

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Behind a Motorhome D

rivin g

Monitor your temperature gauge. If it nears the red (Hot) mark, turn off the climate control system and reduce speed. Pull to the side of the road safely to cool down the engine if necessary.

Towing Behind a Motorhome Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motorhome. If your vehicle needs to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.

2 Emergency Towing P. 626

Driving in Hilly Terrain

411

412

D rivin

g

When Driving

1Starting the Engine

Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when starting the engine.

The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400 meters).

When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all electrical accessories such as the lights, climate control system and rear defogger in order to reduce battery drain.

If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold, an engine block heater will improve starting and warming of the engine. Consult a dealer for details.

If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with the engine or exhaust system.

The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from theft. If an improperly coded device is used, the engines fuel system is disabled.

2 Immobilizer System P. 184

Starting the Engine 1. Make sure the parking brake is applied. u The parking brake and brake system

indicator (red) comes on for 30 seconds when you pull up the electric parking brake switch.

2. Depress the brake pedal.

2. Check that the transmission is in (P , then depress the brake pedal. u Although it is possible to start the vehicle

in (N , it is safer to start it in (P.

Electric Parking Brake Switch

Brake Pedal

Automatic transmission models

Brake Pedal

Continuously variable transmission models

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine D

rivin g

1Starting the Engine

Bring the keyless remote close to the ENGINE START/STOP button if the battery in the keyless remote is weak.

2 If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak P. 604

The engine may not start if the keyless remote is subjected to strong radio waves.

Do not hold the ENGINE START/STOP button to start the engine. If the engine does not start, wait at least 30 seconds before starting the engine again.

3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button without depressing the accelerator pedal.

All models

Continued 413

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

414

D rivin

g

1Remote Engine Start*

The remote engine start may violate local laws. Before using the remote engine start, check your local laws.

If there are buildings and obstacles between your vehicle and the keyless remote, the range will be reduced. This distance may vary by external electrical interference.

3WARNING Carbon monoxide gas is toxic and can rapidly accumulate in closed or even partly enclosed areas.

Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you.

Never use the remote engine starter with the vehicle parked in a garage or other areas with limited ventilation.

You can remotely start the engine using the keyless remote.

To start the engine

When started remotely, the engine automatically shuts off after 10 minutes of idling and/or the brake pedal and ENGINE START/STOP button have not been pressed simultaneously. To extend the run time for another 10 minutes during the first run, press the button, then press and hold the button. u Some exterior lights flash six times if a 10-minute extension request was

transmitted successfully.

Remote Engine Start*

Press the button, then press and hold the button. Some exterior lights flash once.

Go within the range, and try again.

LED: Blinks when any button is pressed.

Some exterior lights flash six times if the engine starts successfully.

Exterior lights will not flash if the engine does not start.

* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine D

rivin g

1Remote Engine Start*

The engine may not start by the remote engine start if: You have disabled a remote engine start setting

using the audio/information screen. 2 Customized Features P. 351

The power mode is not in VEHICLE OFF. The transmission is in a position other than (P. The hood is open, or any door or the trunk is

unlocked. You have already used the keyless remote twice to

start the engine. The battery charge is too low. Another registered keyless remote is in the vehicle. There is any antenna failure. The door is unlocked with the built-in key. The engine oil pressure is low. The engine coolant temperature is extremely high. The telematics unit* malfunctions. The security system alarm is not set.

To stop the engine

Press and hold the button for one second.

Go within the range, and try again.

The exterior lights flash once if the engine stops successfully.

The exterior lights will not flash when the keyless remote is out of the keyless access system range. The engine will not stop.

Continued 415* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

416

D rivin

g

1Remote Engine Start*

The engine may stop while it is running if: You do not start the vehicle within 10 minutes of

starting the engine with the keyless remote. The engine is stopped by using the keyless remote. The security system alarm is activated. The door is unlocked with the built-in key. The hood is open. The engine coolant temperature is extremely high. The battery is low. The engine oil pressure is low. The malfunction indicator lamp comes on if there is

a problem with the emissions control systems. You press the ENGINE START/STOP button

without depressing the brake pedal.

The transmission is in a position other than (P.

You press the shift lever release button.

While the engine is running, the vehicle will automatically precondition inside the vehicle. When it is warm outside: The climate control system is activated in auto mode. When it is cold outside: The defroster is activated at a moderately warm

temperature. The rear defogger and door mirror heaters are

activated. The seat heaters* and heated steering wheel* are

activated. 2 Heated Steering Wheel* P. 236 2 Front Seat Heaters* P. 237 2 Front Seat Heaters and Seat Ventilation*

P. 238

Automatic transmission models

Continuously variable transmission models

* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine D

rivin g

1Starting to Drive

The engine stops when the transmission is taken out of (P before the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed. Follow the step 1 when starting to drive.

You can also release the parking brake by pressing the electric parking brake switch while depressing the brake pedal. When facing downhill, you can start your vehicle more smoothly by manually releasing it with the electric parking brake switch than by releasing it with the accelerator pedal.

When the engine was started using the button on the keyless remote

1Hill start assist system

Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and will not operate on small inclines.

Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking brake.

Hill start assist will operate even when VSA is switched off.

1. Depress and hold the brake pedal, then press the ENGINE START/STOP button.

2. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, put the transmission into (D. Select (R when reversing.

3. With the parking brake applied, release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal. u Make sure the parking brake and brake system indicator (red) goes off.

2 Parking Brake P. 508

Hill start assist system Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.

Put the transmission into (D , (S * or (L * when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.

You can turn the engine off when the vehicle is completely stopped.

1. Put the transmission into (P . 2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button.

Starting to Drive

Stopping the Engine

When the engine was started using the button on the keyless remote

When the engine was started in any case

417* Not available on all models

418

uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving

D rivin

g

1Precautions While Driving

NOTICE Do not change the transmission while pressing the accelerator pedal. You could damage the transmission.

NOTICE If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel in the full left or right position for a while, the electric power steering (EPS) system heats up. The system goes into a protective mode, and limits its performance. The steering wheel becomes harder and harder to operate. Once the system cools down, the EPS system is restored. Repeated operation under these conditions can eventually damage the system.

If the power mode is set to ACCESSORY while driving, the engine will shut down and all steering and brake power assist functions will stop, making it difficult to control the vehicle.

Do not select (N while driving as you will lose engine braking (and acceleration) performance.

During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation, avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so as not to damage the engine or powertrain.

Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km) after purchasing your new vehicle or replacing the brake pads or rotors, to allow for proper break-in.

Precautions While Driving

Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine or driveline, or cause electrical component failure.

If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location. Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.

In Rain

Other Precautions

uuWhen DrivinguTransmission D

rivin g

Transmission

When the engine runs at higher idle speeds, the creeping force increases. Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.

Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the transmission to drop to a lower gear/ratio, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed. Depress the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves.

Creeping

Kickdown

419

420

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

D rivin

g

1Shifting

To prevent malfunction and unintended engagement: Do not spill any liquids on or around shift buttons. Do not place or drop any objects on or around shift

buttons. Do not let passengers or children operate the shift

buttons.

The beeper sounds and the message appears on the driver information interface when you depress the accelerator pedal with the transmission in (N.

2 Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages P. 109

Put the transmission into (D or (R with the brake pedal depressed.

When shifting gears in extremely low temperatures (22F/30C), there may be a short delay before the shift position is indicated in the display. Always confirm you are in the correct gear before driving.

3WARNING The vehicle can roll away if left unattended without confirming that Park is engaged.

A vehicle that rolls away could cause a crash resulting in serious injury or death.

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal until you have confirmed that (P is shown on the shift position indicator.

Shifting Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.

Shift button positions

(P (parking) button Park your vehicle in a safe place with the power mode in ON, then apply the brakes and press the (P button to put the transmission in Park. The indicators on the sides of the (P button come on.

Automatic transmission models

Park Used when parking or starting the engine Transmission is locked

Reverse Used when reversing Neutral Transmission is not locked

Drive Used for: Normal driving (gears change between 1st and

10th automatically) Temporarily driving in the sequential mode Driving in the sequential mode (when driving in

SPORT mode)

(P Button

uuWhen DrivinguShifting D

rivin g

1Shift Operation

NOTICE When you change (D to (R and vice versa, depress the brake pedal to come to a complete stop, then select the intended shift position while maintaining brake pressure.

Use the shift position indicator and the shift button indicator to check the shift position before selecting a shift button.

If the indicator of the currently selected shift position, or all the shift position indicators are blinking simultaneously, there is a problem with the transmission. Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine speeds in or over the tachometers red zone (engine speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a slight jolt.

When the engine speed is increased while the transmission is in (N, (P or (R, the fuel supply may be cut off even without the engine speed entering the tachometers red zone.

The beeper sounds once when you change to (R. 2 Customized Features P. 351

Shift Operation

Press the (P button.

Pull back the (R button.

Press the (N button.

Press the (D button.

Shift Button Indicator

M (sequential mode) Indicator

Tachometers red zone

Gear Selection Indicator

Shift Position Indicator

Continued 421

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

422

D rivin

g

1When opening the drivers door

While the system is designed to automatically put the transmission into (P under the described conditions, in the interest of safety you should always select (P before opening the drivers door. Make sure to park the vehicle in a safe place.

2 When Stopped P. 518

If you want to drive the vehicle after the transmission has automatically put into (P under the described conditions, close the door, fasten the seat belt, depress the brake pedal, then change the shift position.

If you leave the vehicle, turn off the engine and lock the doors.

When opening the drivers door If you open the drivers door under the following conditions, the transmission automatically puts into (P ; The vehicle is stationary with the engine running, or moving at 1 mph (2 km/h) or

slower. The transmission is in other than (P. You have unfastened the driver side seat belt. u If you manually put the transmission from (P with the brake pedal depressed,

the transmission will automatically return to (P once you release the brake pedal.

When turning off the power mode If you turn the engine off while the vehicle is stationary, and the transmission is in other than (P , the transmission automatically puts into (P .

uuWhen DrivinguShifting D

rivin g

1If you want to keep the transmission in (N position [car wash mode]

Note that the transmission may not stay in (N position while any of the following indicators is on: Transmission system indicator. Malfunction indicator lamp. Charging system indicator.

If you want to keep the transmission in (N position [car wash mode] With the engine running: 1. Press and hold the brake pedal. 2. Select (N, then release the button to display (N (Neutral) hold mode on the driver

information interface. 3. Press and hold (N again for two seconds. u This puts the vehicle in car wash mode which must be used when your vehicle

is pulled through a conveyor type automatic car wash where you or an attendant do not remain in the vehicle.

If the ENGINE STOP/START button is pressed after car wash mode has been activated, the power mode will change to ACCESSORY and a message will be displayed on the driver information interface. u For 15 minutes the transmission remains

in (N with the power mode in ACCESSORY. After that, the transmission automatically changes to (P and the power mode changes to OFF.

u Manually changing to (P cancels ACCESSORY mode. The (P indicator comes on and the power mode changes to OFF. You must always put the transmission into (P when car wash mode is no longer needed.

Continued 423

424

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

D rivin

g

Restrictions on selecting a shift position You cannot select a shift position under certain circumstances that may lead to a crash.

When the transmission is in:

1. Under these circumstances:

2. If you try to change to the following:

3. The shift position remains in/changes to:

How to change the shift position

(P

The brake pedal is not depressed.

Other shift position

(P

Release the accelerator pedal and depress the brake pedal.

The accelerator pedal is depressed.

(N

The vehicle is moving at low speed without the brake pedal depressed.

(N

The vehicle is moving at low speed with the accelerator pedal depressed.

(N or (D The vehicle is moving forward.

(R Stop your vehicle in a safe place, depress the brake pedal, and select the appropriate shift position.

(R or (N The vehicle is moving backward.

(D

(R, (N or (D The vehicle is moving. (P

uuWhen DrivinguShifting D

rivin g

Use the paddle shifters to change between 1st and 10th gears without removing your hands from the steering wheel. The transmission will switch to the sequential mode.

When the transmission is in (D : The vehicle will go into the sequential mode momentarily, and the gear selection indicator will come on. When the vehicle goes into the sequential mode by (- paddle shifter and the lower gear is available, the transmission properly selects single or double gear change.

Once you start traveling at a constant speed, the sequential mode will automatically switch off, and the gear selection indicator will go off.

Hold the (+ paddle shifter for two seconds to return to normal drive.

When the transmission is in (D with SPORT mode: The vehicle will go into the sequential mode, and the M (sequential mode) indicator and gear selection indicator will come on. If the vehicle speed increases and the engine speed reaches near the tachometers red zone, the transmission automatically shifts up to the next gear. You can cancel this mode by holding the (+ paddle shifter for two seconds. When the sequential mode is canceled, the sequential mode indicator and gear selection indicator go off.

Sequential Mode

425Continued

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

426

D rivin

g

1Sequential Mode Operation

Each paddle shift operation makes a single or double gear change. To change gears continuously, release the paddle shifter before pulling it again for the next gear.

If the gear selection indicator blinks when you try to shift up or down, this means your vehicle speed is not in its allowable gear range or the protection of transmission system is necessary. Slightly accelerate to shift up and decelerate to shift down while the indicator is blinking.

Gear Selection Indicator

Sequential Mode Operation

(- Paddle Shifter (Shift down)

(+ Paddle Shifter (Shift up)

Downshifting when pulling the (- paddle shifter. (Changes to a lower gear)

Upshifting when pulling the (+ paddle shifter. (Changes to a higher gear)

uuWhen DrivinguShifting D

rivin g

1Shifting

You cannot change the power mode from ON to VEHICLE OFF unless the shift position is in (P.

The vehicle may move very slightly even in (N while the engine is cold. Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary, apply the parking brake.

Shifting Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.

Shift lever positions

Continuously variable transmission models without paddle shifters

Reverse Used when reversing

Drive Used for normal driving

Park Used when parking or starting the engine

Neutral Transmission is not locked.

Release Button Drive (S) Used: For better acceleration To increase engine braking When going up or down hills

Low Used: To further increase engine braking When going up or down hills

427Continued

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

428

D rivin

g

1Shift Lever Operation

NOTICE When you change the shift position from (D to (R and vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the brake pedal depressed. Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.

Use the shift position indicator to check the lever position before pulling away.

If the transmission system indicator blinks when driving, in any shift position, there is a problem with the transmission. Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine speeds in or over the tachometers red zone (engine speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a slight jolt.

It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release button is held down. Depress the brake pedal first.

When shifting positions in extremely low temperatures (-22F/-30C), there may be a short delay before the shift position is displayed. Always confirm you are in the correct shift position before driving.

Shift Lever Operation

Depress the brake pedal and press the shift lever release button to shift.

Shift without pressing the shift lever release button.

Press the shift lever release button and shift.

Shift Position Indicator (Transmission System Indicator)

Tachometers red zone

uuWhen DrivinguShifting D

rivin g

1Shifting

You cannot change the power mode from ON to VEHICLE OFF unless the shift position is in (P.

The vehicle may move very slightly even in (N while the engine is cold. Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary, apply the parking brake.

Shifting Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.

Shift lever positions

Continuously variable transmission models with paddle shifters

Reverse Used when reversing

Drive Used: For normal driving When temporarily driving in the 7-speed

manual shift mode When driving in the 7-speed manual

shift mode (when driving in SPORT mode)

Neutral Transmission is not locked.

Release Button

Park Used when parking or starting the engine

429Continued

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

430

D rivin

g

1Shift Lever Operation

NOTICE When you change the shift position from (D to (R and vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the brake pedal depressed. Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.

Use the shift position indicator to check the lever position before pulling away.

If the transmission system indicator blinks when driving, in any shift position, there is a problem with the transmission. Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine speeds in or over the tachometers red zone (engine speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a slight jolt.

It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release button is held down. Depress the brake pedal first.

When shifting positions in extremely low temperatures (-22F/-30C), there may be a short delay before the shift position is displayed. Always confirm you are in the correct shift position before driving.

Shift Lever Operation

Depress the brake pedal and press the shift lever release button to shift.

Shift without pressing the shift lever release button.

Press the shift lever release button and shift.

Shift Position Indicator (Transmission System Indicator)

Tachometers red zone

M (7-Speed Manual Shift Mode) Indicator

Gear Selection Indicator

uuWhen DrivinguShifting D

rivin g

17-Speed Manual Shift Mode

In the 7-speed manual shift mode, the transmission shifts up or down by operating either paddle shifter under the following conditions: Shift Up: The engine speed reaches the lowest threshold of the higher speed position. Shift Down: The engine speed reaches the highest threshold of the lower speed position.

When the engine speed reaches near the tachometers red zone, the transmission shifts up automatically. When the engine speed reaches the lowest threshold of the selected speed position, the transmission shifts down automatically.

Operating the paddle shifters on slippery surfaces may cause the tires to lock up. In this case, the 7- speed manual shift mode is canceled and goes back to the normal (D driving mode.

Use the paddle shifters to change between 1st and 7th speeds without releasing your hands from the steering wheel. The transmission switches to the 7-speed manual shift mode when you pull a paddle shifter while driving. This mode is useful when engine braking is needed.

When the transmission is in (D : The shift mode goes into the 7-speed manual shift mode temporarily, and the number is displayed in the gear selection indicator. The 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled automatically if you drive at constant speed or accelerate, and the number in the gear selection indicator goes off. You can cancel this mode by pulling the (+ paddle shifter for a few seconds. The 7-speed manual shift mode is especially useful when reducing the vehicle speed temporarily before making a turn.

When the transmission is in (D with SPORT mode: The shift mode goes into the 7-speed manual shift mode. The M indicator and the speed number are displayed in the gear selection indicator. As the vehicle speed slows down, the transmission automatically shifts down accordingly. When the vehicle comes to a stop, it automatically shifts down into 1st.

If the vehicle speed increases and the engine speed reaches near the tachometers red zone, the transmission automatically shifts up.

You can only pull away in 1st speed.

When canceling the 7-speed manual shift mode, pressing the SPORT button. When the 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled, the M indicator and gear selection indicator go off.

7-Speed Manual Shift Mode

Continued 431

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

432

D rivin

g

17-Speed Manual Shift Mode Operation

Each paddle shift operation makes a single speed change. To change continuously, release the paddle shifter before pulling it again for the next speed.

The gear selection indicator blinks when you cannot shift up or down. It indicates that your vehicle speed is not in its allowable shifting range. Slightly accelerate to shift up and decelerate to shift down while the indicator is blinking.

7-Speed Manual Shift Mode Operation

(- Paddle Shifter (Shift down)

(+ Paddle Shifter (Shift up)

Downshifting when pulling the (- paddle shifter. (Changes to lower speed number)

Upshifting when pulling the (+ paddle shifter. (Changes to higher speed number)

uuWhen DrivinguSPORT Mode* D

rivin g

SPORT Mode*

To turn the SPORT mode on and off, press the SPORT button.

The SPORT mode increases engine performance, transmission and handling*. This mode is suitable for driving on hills or through curves on mountain roads.

The SPORT mode is turned off every time you start the engine, even if you turned it on the last time you drove the vehicle.

The ambient meter color changes to a constant red and the turbo meter appears on the driver information interface.

SPORT Button

SPORT Mode Indicator

Models with adaptive damper system

Models without adaptive damper system

433* Not available on all models

434

uuWhen DrivinguECON Mode

D rivin

g

1ECON Mode

While in ECON mode, the climate control system has greater temperature fluctuation.

ECON Mode

The ECON button turns the ECON mode on and off. The ECON mode helps you improve your fuel economy by adjusting the performance of the engine, transmission and climate control system.

*1: Models without the adaptive damper system *2: Models with the adaptive damper system *3: Models without SPORT mode *4: Models with SPORT mode

*1

*2

*3

*4

ECON Button ECON Mode Indicator

uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop* D

rivin g

1Auto Idle Stop*

The 12-volt battery installed in this vehicle is specifically designed for a model with Auto Idle Stop. Using a 12-volt battery other than this specified type may shorten the 12-volt battery life, and prevent Auto Idle Stop from activating. If you need to replace the 12-volt battery, make sure to select the specified type. Ask a dealer for more details.

The duration of the Auto Idle Stop operation: Increase in the ECON mode, compared to when the

ECON mode is off, with climate control in use. 2 ECON Mode P. 434

Auto Idle Stop*

To help maximize fuel economy, the engine automatically stops when the vehicle comes to a stop, depending on environmental and vehicle operating conditions. The indicator (green) comes on at this time.

The environmental and vehicle conditions that impact Auto Idle Stop system operation are varied.

2 Auto Idle Stop Activates When: P. 437

The engine then restarts once the vehicle is about to move again, and the indicator (green) goes off.

2 The Engine Automatically Restarts When: P. 439

If the drivers door is opened while the indicator (green) comes on, a buzzer sounds to notify you that the Auto Idle Stop function is in operation.

Auto Idle Stop Indicator (Green)

435Continued* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop*

436

D rivin

g

1Auto Idle Stop System ON/OFF

If you turn off the Auto Idle Stop system while it is activated, the engine will restart.

To turn the Auto Idle Stop system off, press

this button. The Auto Idle Stop system stops. u Auto Idle Stop system will stop and the

indicator (amber) will come on.

The Auto Idle Stop system is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.

Auto Idle Stop System ON/OFF

Auto Idle Stop OFF Button

Auto Idle Stop System Indicator (Amber)

uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop* D

rivin g

1Auto Idle Stop Activates When:

Do not open the hood while the Auto Idle Stop function is activated. If the hood is opened, the engine will not restart automatically.

In this case, restart the engine with the ENGINE START/STOP button.

2 Starting the Engine P. 412

When ACC with Low Speed Follow is in operation, the vehicle stops without depressing the brake pedal and Auto Idle Stop may activate. In such cases, the engine may restart if you change the shift position other than (D.

Pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button causes the engine to no longer restarts automatically. Follow the standard procedure to start the engine.

2 Starting the Engine P. 412

The vehicle stops with the shift position in (D and the brake pedal depressed. When you shift into (P quickly with depressing the brake pedal, the Auto Idle Stop continues to operate, even if the brake pedal is released. u If you move the shift lever slowly, the engine may automatically restart.

Auto Idle Stop does not activate when: The Auto Idle Stop OFF button is pressed. The drivers seat belt is not fastened. The engine is not adequately warmed up or coolant temperature is high. The engine is started with the hood open. u Turn off the engine. Close the hood before you restart the engine to activate

Auto Idle Stop. The battery charge is low. The internal temperature of the battery is 41F (5C) or less. The transmission fluid temperature is low or high. The transmission is in a position other than (D . The vehicle comes to a stop again before the vehicle speed reaches 3 mph (5 km/h)

after the engine starts. The vehicle is stopped on a steep incline. is on (indicator on). The climate control system is in use, and the temperature is set to Hi or Lo. The climate control system is in use, and the outside temperature is below -4F

(-20C) or over 104F (40C).

The SPORT mode is on.

Auto Idle Stop Activates When:

Models with SPORT mode

Continued 437

438

uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop*

D rivin

g

Auto Idle Stop may not activate when: The steering wheel is operated. Altitude is high. The vehicle is stopped by braking suddenly. The vehicle is repeatedly accelerated and decelerated at a low speed. The fan speed is high. The climate control system is in use, and there is a significant difference between

the set temperature and the actual interior temperature. The climate control system is in use, and humidity in the interior is high.

uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop* D

rivin g

1The Engine Automatically Restarts When:

If you are using an electronic device during Auto Idle Stop, the device may temporarily be turned off when the engine restarts.

1The engine restarts even if the brake pedal is depressed*1 when:

*1: With the automatic brake hold system activated, you can release the brake pedal while Auto Idle Stop is in operation.

If the automatic brake hold system has been turned off, or if there is a problem with the system, the engine will restart automatically when you release the brake pedal.

2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 513

The brake pedal is released (without the automatic brake hold system activated). The accelerator pedal is depressed (with the automatic brake hold system activated).

2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 513

The engine restarts even if the brake pedal is depressed*1 when: The Auto Idle Stop OFF button is pressed. A steering wheel is operated. The transmission is put into (R, (S *, and (L *, or when it is set from (N to (D . u If you put the transmission into (P after the Auto Idle Stop activates, the Auto

Idle Stop continues to operate. In this case, the engine restarts when you move the shift lever other than (P . When operating the shift lever, the brake pedal must be firmly depressed.

The pressure on the brake pedal is reduced and the vehicle starts moving while stopped on an incline.

The brake pedal is released slightly during a stop. The battery charge becomes low. The accelerator pedal is depressed. The drivers seat belt is unlatched. is on (indicator on). The climate control system is in use, and the difference between the set

temperature and actual interior temperature becomes significant. The climate control system is being used to dehumidify the interior. The vehicle ahead of you starts again when your vehicle stops automatically with

ACC with Low Speed Follow.

The SPORT mode is changed to on.

Briefly keeps the brake applied after releasing the brake pedal to restart the engine. This can keep your vehicle from unexpectedly moving while on an incline.

The Engine Automatically Restarts When:

Starting Assist Brake Function

Models with SPORT mode

439* Not available on all models

440

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Damper System*

D rivin

g

Adaptive Damper System*

Constantly controls your vehicles front and rear dampers according to current road conditions, vehicle speed and steering operation.

You can change handling response by turning the SPORT mode on. 2 SPORT Mode* P. 433

* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System D

rivin g

1Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

The VSA may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.

When the VSA system indicator comes on and stays on while driving, there may be a problem with the system. While this may not interfere with normal driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

VSA cannot enhance stability in all driving situations and does not control the entire braking system. You still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions and always leave a sufficient margin of safety.

The main function of the VSA system is generally known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The system also includes a traction control function.

The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) OFF, adaptive cruise control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, safety support and low tire pressure/TPMS indicators may come on in amber along with a message in the driver information interface when you set the power mode to ON after reconnecting the battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System VSA helps stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less than what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces. It does so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes.

When VSA activates, you may notice that the engine does not respond to the accelerator. You may also notice some noise from the hydraulic brake system. You will also see the indicator blink.

VSA Operation

VSA System Indicator

441Continued

uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

442

D rivin

g

1Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier to free it with the VSA temporarily switched off.

When the button is pressed, the traction control function becomes less effective. This allows for the wheels to spin more freely at low speed. You should only attempt to free your vehicle with the VSA off if you are not able to free it when the VSA is on.

Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to switch VSA on again. We do not recommend driving your vehicle with the VSA system switched off.

You may hear a motor sound coming from the engine compartment while system checks are being performed immediately after starting the engine or while driving. This is normal.

This button is on the driver side control panel. To partially disable VSA functionality/features, press and hold it until you hear a beep.

Your vehicle will have normal braking and cornering ability, but traction control function will be less effective.

To restore VSA functionality/features, press the (VSA OFF) button until you hear a beep.

VSA is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.

VSA On and Off

VSA OFF Indicator

uuWhen DrivinguAgile Handling Assist D

rivin g

1Agile Handling Assist

The agile handling assist cannot enhance stability in all driving situations. You still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions and always leave a sufficient margin of safety.

When the VSA system indicator comes on and stays on while driving, the agile handling assist does not activate.

You may hear a sound coming from the engine compartment while the agile handling assist is activated. This is normal.

Agile Handling Assist Lightly brakes the front wheels, as needed, when you turn the steering wheel, and helps support the vehicles stability and performance during cornering.

443

444

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

D rivin

g

1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

The system does not monitor the tires when driving at low speed.

Conditions such as low ambient temperature and altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can trigger the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on.

Tire pressure checked and inflated in: Warm weather can become under-inflated in

colder weather. Cold weather can become overinflated in warmer

weather. The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will not come on as a result of overinflation.

The TPMS may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire.

2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 575

The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on with a delay or may not come on at all when: You rapidly accelerate, decelerate, or turn the

steering wheel. You drive on snowy or slippery roads. Tire chains* are used.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Instead of directly measuring the pressure in each tire, the TPMS on this vehicle monitors and compares the rolling radius and rotational characteristics of each wheel and tire while you are driving to determine if one or more tires are significantly under-inflated.

This will cause the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on and a message to appear on the driver information interface.

Low Tire Pressure/ TPMS Indicator

* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) D

rivin g

1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on under the following conditions: A compact spare tire is used. There is a heavier and uneven load on the tires,

such as when towing a trailer*, than the condition at calibration.

Tire chains* are used.

The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) OFF, adaptive cruise control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, safety support and low tire pressure/TPMS indicators may come on in amber along with a message in the driver information interface when you set the power mode to ON after reconnecting the battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Continued 445* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

446

D rivin

g

1TPMS Calibration

TPMS cannot be calibrated if a compact spare tire is installed. The calibration process requires approximately 30 minutes of cumulative driving at speeds between 30- 60 mph (48-97 km/h). During this period, if the power mode is set to ON and the vehicle is not moved within 45 seconds, you may notice the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on briefly. This is normal and indicates that the calibration process is not yet complete.

You must start TPMS calibration every time you: Adjust the pressure in one or more tires. Rotate the tires. Replace one or more tires.

Before calibrating the TPMS: Set the cold tire pressure in all four tires.

2 Checking Tires P. 575

Make sure: The vehicle is at a complete stop. The transmission is in (P. The power mode is in ON.

TPMS Calibration

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) D

rivin g

1TPMS Calibration

If the tire chains* are installed, remove them before calibrating the TPMS.

If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on even when the properly inflated specified regular tires are installed, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

We recommend that the tires be replaced with the same brand, model, and size as the originals. Ask a dealer for details.

You can calibrate the system from the customized feature on the audio/information screen. 1. Set the power mode to ON. 2. Press the button. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Vehicle. 5. Select TPMS Calibration. 6. Select Calibrate.

If the Calibration Failed To Start. message appears, repeat steps 5-6.

The calibration process finishes automatically.

447* Not available on all models

448

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation

D rivin

g

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale

when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

U.S. models

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation D

rivin g

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

449

450

uuWhen DrivinguBlind spot information System*

D rivin

g

1Blind spot information System*

Important Safety Reminder Like all assistance systems, the blind spot information system has limitations. Overreliance on the blind spot information system may result in a collision.

The blind spot information system alert indicator may not come on under the following conditions: A vehicle does not stay in the alert zone for more

than two seconds. A vehicle is parked in a side lane. The speed difference between your vehicle and the

vehicle you are passing is greater than 6 mph (10 km/h).

An object not detected by the radar sensors approaches or passes your vehicle.

A vehicle running in the adjacent lane is a motorcycle or other small vehicle.

3WARNING Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to change lanes before doing so may result in a crash and serious injury or death. Do not rely only on the blind spot information system when changing lanes.

Always look in your mirrors, to either side of your vehicle, and behind you for other vehicles before changing lanes.

Blind spot information System*

Is designed to detect vehicles in specified alert zones adjacent to your vehicle, particularly in harder to see areas commonly known as blind spots.

When the system detects vehicles approaching from behind in adjacent lanes, the appropriate indicator comes on for a few seconds, providing assistance when you change lanes.

How the system works

Alert zone range A: Approx. 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) B: Approx. 10 ft. (3 m) C: Approx. 10 ft. (3 m)

Radar Sensors: underneath the rear bumper corners

Alert Zone A

B

C

Your vehicle speed is between 20 mph (32 km/h) and 100 mph (160 km/h).

The transmission is in (D.

* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguBlind spot information System* D

rivin g

1Blind spot information System*

The system is for your convenience only. Even if an object is within the alert zone, the following situations may occur. The blind spot information system alert indicator

may not come on due to obstruction (splashes, etc.) even without the Blind Spot Information System Not Available driver information interface appearing.

The blind spot information system alert indicator may come on even with the message appearing.

You can change the setting for the blind spot information system.

2 Customized Features P. 351

The system does not operate when in (R.

Turn the system off when towing a trailer. The system may not work properly for the following reasons: The added mass tilts the vehicle and changes the

radar coverage. The trailer itself can be detected by the radar

sensors, causing the blind spot information system alert indicators to come on.

2.0 L engine models

When the system detects a vehicle Blind spot information System Alert Indicator: Located on the outside rearview mirror on both sides.

Comes on when: A vehicle enters the alert zone from behind

to overtake you with a speed difference of no more than 31 mph (50 km/h) from your vehicle.

You pass a vehicle with a speed difference of no more than 12 mph (20 km/h).

Blinks and a beeper sounds when: You move the turn signal lever in the direction of the detected vehicle. The beeper sounds three times.

Comes On

Blinks

Continued 451* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguBlind spot information System*

452

D rivin

g

1Blind spot information System*

The blind spot information system may be adversely affected when: Objects (guard rails, poles, trees, etc.) are detected. An object that does not reflect radio waves well,

such as a motorcycle, is in the alert zone. Driving on a curved road. A vehicle is moving from a far lane to the adjacent

lane. The system picks up external electrical interference. The rear bumper or the sensors have been

improperly repaired or the rear bumper has been deformed.

The orientation of the sensors has been changed. In bad weather (Heavy rain, snow, and fog). Making a turn at an intersection. Driving on a bumpy road. Making a short turn that slightly tilts the vehicle.

For a proper blind spot information system operation: Always keep the rear bumper corner area clean. Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with

labels or stickers of any kind. Take your vehicle to a dealer if you need the rear

bumper corner area or the radar sensors to be repaired, or the rear bumper corner area is strongly impacted.

Blind spot information System On and Off When you turn the blind spot information system on and off, do the following. 1. Press the safety support switch. 2. Roll the left selector wheel to the

symbol and push it.

The blind spot information system is in the previously selected ON or OFF setting each time you start the engine.

Left Selector Wheel

Safety Support Switch

* Not available on all models

Honda Sensing

D

rivin g

Honda Sensing is a driver support system which employs the use of three distinctly different kinds of sensors: a radar sensor located at the lower part of the front bumper, a front sensor camera mounted to the interior side of the windshield, behind the rearview mirror, and the sonar sensors located in the front and rear bumpers.

Honda Sensing is a driver support system which employs the use of two distinctly different kinds of sensors: a radar sensor located at the lower part of the front bumper and a front sensor camera mounted to the interior side of the windshield, behind the rearview mirror.

Honda Sensing has following functions.

The functions which do not require switch operations to activate Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) 2 P. 456

Low Speed Braking Control* 2 P. 465

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System 2 P. 494

Traffic Sign Recognition System 2 P. 498

The functions which require switch operations to activate Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow 2 P. 470

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) 2 P. 486

Models with Low Speed Braking Control

Models without Low Speed Braking Control

453Continued* Not available on all models

454

uuHonda Sensingu

D rivin

g

Button Press to activate standby mode for ACC with Low Speed Follow. Or press to cancel the system.

LKAS Button Press to activate standby mode for LKAS. Or press to cancel the system.

RES/+ and SET/- Buttons Press RES/+ button to resume the ACC with Low Speed Follow or increase the vehicle speed. Press SET/ button to set the ACC with Low Speed Follow or decrease the vehicle speed.

Interval Button Press to change the ACC with Low Speed Follow following-interval.

CANCEL Button Press to cancel ACC with Low Speed Follow.

Operation Switches for the ACC with Low Speed Follow/ LKAS

button

Interval Button

CANCEL Button

LKAS Button

RES/+ Button

SET/- Button

uuHonda Sensingu D

rivin g

1Driver Information Interface Content

You can have the head-up display show you the current state of each function.

2 Head-Up Display* P. 159

Models with head-up display

You can see the current state of ACC with Low Speed Follow and LKAS.

a Indicates that ACC with Low Speed Follow is ready to be activated.

White: The system is standby. Green: The system is on. Amber: There is a problem with the system.

b Indicates that LKAS is ready to be activated. White: The system is standby. Green: The system is on. Amber: There is a problem with the system.

c Indicates that LKAS is activated and whether or not traffic lane lines are detected.

Solid lane outlines: The system is on. Lane outlines: The system is in standby.

d Indicates whether or not ACC with Low Speed Follow detects the vehicle ahead.

eShows vehicle set speed in ACC with Low Speed Follow.

fShows set vehicle interval in ACC with Low Speed Follow.

Driver Information Interface Content

6

455* Not available on all models

456

uuHonda SensinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

D rivin

g

1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

Important Safety Reminder The CMBSTM is designed to reduce the severity of an unavoidable collision. It does not prevent collisions nor stop the vehicle automatically. It is still your responsibility to operate the brake pedal and steering wheel appropriately according to the driving conditions.

The CMBSTM may not activate or may not detect a vehicle in front of your vehicle under certain conditions:

2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 460

For directions on the proper handling of the radar sensor, refer to the following page.

2 Radar Sensor P. 506

You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 504

When the CMBSTM activates, it may automatically apply the brake. It will be canceled when your vehicle stops or a potential collision is not determined.

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) The system can assist you when it determines there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a pedestrian detected in front of your vehicle. The CMBSTM is designed to alert you when the potential for a collision is determined, as well as to reduce your vehicle speed to help minimize collision severity when a collision is deemed unavoidable.How the system works

The radar sensor is at the lower part of the front bumper.

The camera is located behind the rearview mirror.

The system starts monitoring the roadway ahead when your vehicle speed is about 3 mph (5 km/h) or above and will search for a vehicle in front of you.

When to use

The CMBSTM activates when: The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian detected in

front of you becomes about 3 mph (5 km/h) and over with a chance of a collision. Your vehicle speed is about 62 mph (100 km/h) or less and the system determines

there is a chance of a collision with: - Vehicles detected in front of you that are stationary, oncoming, or traveling in your same direction. - A pedestrian who is detected in front of you. Your vehicle speed is above 62 mph (100 km/h), and the system determines there

is a chance of a collision with a vehicle detected in front of you traveling in your same direction.

uuHonda SensinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) D

rivin g

1When the system activates

The camera in the CMBSTM is also designed to detect pedestrians. However, this pedestrian detection feature may not activate or may not detect a pedestrian in front of your vehicle under certain conditions. Refer to the ones indicating the pedestrian detection limitations from the list.

2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 460

The head-up warning uses a lens located at the front end of the dashboard. Do not cover the lens or spill any liquid on it.

Models with head-up display

Lens

When the system activates

You can change the distance (Long/Normal/Short) between vehicles at which the system's earliest collision alert will come on through audio/information screen setting options.

2 Customized Features P. 351

The system provides visual and audible alerts of a possible collision, and stops if the collision is avoided. u Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change

lanes, etc.).

Beep

Head-up Warning Lights*

Visual Alerts

Audible Alert

Continued 457* Not available on all models

458

uuHonda SensinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

D rivin

g

The system has three alert stages for a possible collision. However, depending on circumstances, the CMBSTM may not go through all of the stages before initiating the last stage.

Collision Alert Stages

Distance between vehicles CMBSTM

The radar sensor detects a vehicle Audible & Visual WARNINGS Braking

Stage one

There is a risk of a collision with the vehicle ahead of you.

When in Long, visual and audible alerts come on at a longer distance from a vehicle ahead than in Normal setting, and in Short, at a shorter distance than in Normal.

Stage two

The risk of a collision has increased, time to respond is reduced.

Visual and audible alerts.

Lightly applied

Stage three

The CMBSTM determines that a collision is unavoidable.

Forcefully applied

Your Vehicle Vehicle Ahead

Normal ShortLong

Your Vehicle Vehicle Ahead

Your Vehicle

Vehicle Ahead

uuHonda SensinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) D

rivin g

1CMBSTM On and Off

The CMBSTM may automatically shut off, and the safety support indicator (amber) will come and stay on under certain conditions:

2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 460

When the CMBSTM is activated, it will continue to operate even if the accelerator pedal is partially depressed. However, it will be canceled if the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.

The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) OFF, adaptive cruise control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, safety support and low tire pressure/TPMS indicators may come on in amber along with a message in the driver information interface when you set the power mode to ON after reconnecting the battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

When you turn the CMBSTM on and off, do the following. 1. Press the safety support switch. 2. Roll the left selector wheel to the

symbol and push it. u A message appears on the driver

information interface when the system turns on or off.

The CMBSTM is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.

CMBSTM On and Off

Left Selector Wheel

Safety Support Switch

Continued 459

uuHonda SensinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

460

D rivin

g

1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning message appears too frequently).

The system may automatically shut off and the safety support indicator (amber) will come on under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other conditions may reduce some of the CMBSTM functions.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 504 2 Radar Sensor P. 506

Environmental conditions Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel. There is little contrast between objects and the background. Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). Strong light is reflected onto the roadway. Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as vehicles and pedestrians. Reflections on the interior of the windshield. Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions,

pedestrians or other vehicles may not be detected).

Roadway conditions Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,

reflected lights, road spray, high contrast). Driving on curvy, winding, or undulating roads. The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.

CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations

uuHonda SensinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) D

rivin g

Vehicle conditions Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted. The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc. The inside of the windshield is fogged. An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,

improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). When tire chains* are installed. The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications. The camera temperature gets too high. Driving with the parking brake applied. When the radar sensor at the lower part of the front bumper gets dirty. The vehicle is towing a trailer*. Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off.

Detection limitations A vehicle or pedestrian suddenly crosses in front of you. The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you is

too short. A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly. When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you

at high speed. The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter or other small

vehicle. When there are animals in front of your vehicle. When you drive on a curved, winding or undulating road that makes it difficult for

the sensor to properly detect a vehicle in front of you. The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian in front of

you is significantly large. An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you. Another vehicle suddenly comes in front of you at an intersection, etc. Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle. When driving through a narrow iron bridge. When the lead vehicle suddenly slows down.

461Continued* Not available on all models

462

uuHonda SensinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

D rivin

g

When there is a group of people in front of your vehicle walking together side by side.

Surrounding conditions or belongings of the pedestrian alter the pedestrians shape, preventing the system from recognizing that the person is a pedestrian.

When the pedestrian is shorter than about 3.3 feet (1 meter) or taller than about 6.6 feet (2 meters) in height.

When a pedestrian blends in with the background. When a pedestrian is bent over or squatting, or when their hands are raised or

they are running. When several pedestrians are walking ahead in a group. When the camera cannot correctly identify that a pedestrian is present due to an

unusual shape (holding luggage, body position, size).

Automatic shutoff The CMBSTM may automatically shut itself off and the safety support indicator (amber) comes and stays on when: The temperature inside the system is high. You drive off-road or on a mountain road, or curved and winding road for an

extended period. An abnormal tire condition is detected (incorrect tire size, flat tire, etc.). The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including

the windshield, gets dirty.

Once the conditions that caused the CMBSTM to shut off improve or are addressed (e.g., cleaning), the system comes back on.

Limitations applicable to pedestrian detection only

uuHonda SensinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) D

rivin g

The CMBSTM may activate even when you are aware of a vehicle ahead of you, or when there is no vehicle ahead. Some examples of this are:

When Passing Your vehicle approaches another vehicle ahead of you and you change lanes to pass.

At an intersection Your vehicle approaches or passes another vehicle that is making a left or right turn.

With Little Chance of a Collision

463Continued

464

uuHonda SensinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

D rivin

g

On a curve When driving through curves, your vehicle comes to a point where an oncoming vehicle is right in front of you.

Through a low bridge at high speed You drive under a low or narrow bridge at high speed.

Speed bumps, road work sites, train tracks, roadside objects, etc. You drive over speed bumps, steel road plates, etc., or your vehicle approaches train tracks or roadside objects (such as a traffic sign and guard rail) on a curve or, when parking, stationary vehicles and walls.

uuHonda SensinguLow Speed Braking Control* D

rivin g

1Low Speed Braking Control*

If the Low Speed Braking Control activates in a situation where you do not want automatic brake application (such as when the vehicle is between two railroad crossing gates), simply press the brake pedal to deactivate the system and then continue to drive as intended.

3WARNING The Low Speed Braking Control System cannot avoid all collisions and may not reduce damage in each situation where the accelerator is mistakenly or aggressively pressed. Overreliance on the system may result in a collision with serious injury or death. Always check your surroundings, your shift position, and your pedal use. Driver remains responsible for safely operating the vehicle.

Low Speed Braking Control*

Using sonar sensors located on the front and rear bumpers, the vehicle detects if there is danger of a potential collision with a wall or other obstacle. The system is designed to alert you when a potential collision is determined, as well as assist in reducing speed, avoiding collisions, and reducing collision severity.

465Continued* Not available on all models

uuHonda SensinguLow Speed Braking Control*

466

D rivin

g

1Low Speed Braking Control*

For directions on the proper handling of the sonar sensors, please refer to the following page.

2 Sonar Sensors* P. 507

The vehicle will release the brake and start moving a few seconds after the system is activated. To keep the vehicle stopped, keep the brake pedal depressed or put the transmission into (P.

In order to prevent the system from activating when not needed, always turn it off during vehicle maintenance, when loading on ships, trucks, and so on, when using a chassis dynamometer or free rollers for inspection or when putting your vehicle through a conveyor type car wash.

Do not make any modifications to the suspension or the system may not operate correctly.

Always use the size and type of tires recommended, make, and amount of wear. If these differ, the system may not operate correctly.

The Low Speed Braking Control provides a visual and audible alert when the vehicle is moving between approximately 1 and 6 mph (2 and 10 km/h) and there is the possibility of a collision with a detected wall or other obstacle, as well as providing assistance with braking.

If the only rear sensors are turned off using the parking sensor system, the assistive braking is not working when reversing.

2 Turning off All Rear Sensors P. 524

How the System Works

Beep Beep

The vehicle applies brake

Driver depresses brake pedal

Remove brake after maintaining stationary position

Stop

Audible Alert

* Not available on all models

uuHonda SensinguLow Speed Braking Control* D

rivin g

1System On and Off

If the battery is disconnected and reconnected, the Low Speed Braking Control may not turn on right away when you start the engine. The system will automatically turn ON after the vehicle has been moving at over 12mph (20km/h) for some time. If the system does not turn on, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

When you turn the system on and off, do the following. 1. Press the safety support switch. 2. Roll the left selector wheel to the

symbol and push it. u A message appears on the driver

information interface when the system turns on or off.

The system is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.

System On and Off

Left Selector Wheel

Safety Support Switch

Continued 467

uuHonda SensinguLow Speed Braking Control*

468

D rivin

g

1Conditions for Cancellation

After Low Speed Braking Control has activated once, it will not activate again for the same obstacle. The system can be activated again after driving for some time after the last activation.

Low Speed Braking Control activates separately when moving forward and reversing. (For example, if it activates when moving forward, it can be activated again immediately if reversing.)

A certain amount of time has passed since activation.

The system may not operate correctly under the following conditions:

Examples of obstacles the sonar sensors cannot detect Obstacles that do not reflect sound waves well, such as people, snow, cloth,

sponges, etc. Thin obstacles such as fences, bicycles, sign posts, etc. Short or small obstacles. Obstacles immediately in front of the bumper. Moving objects or obstacles that suddenly enter the road. Obstacles that are not perpendicular to the ground, such as a wall.

Conditions for Cancellation

Low Speed Braking Control System Conditions and Limitations

uuHonda SensinguLow Speed Braking Control* D

rivin g

Examples of situations where the sonar sensors cannot detect obstacles The sonar sensors are dirty (covered by snow, water, mud, etc.). The vehicle is too hot or cold. The steering wheel is turned sharply when approaching the obstacle at an angle.

Examples of other cases where the system may not work correctly The vehicle is tilted due to heavy load in the trunk or rear seats. Bad weather conditions such as heavy rain, fog, snow, sandstorms, etc. The ambient temperature/humidity is too high or low. When going down a very steep slope. When close to other vehicles with sonar sensors or other objects that emit

ultrasonic waves.

Situations where the system may activate even without risk of a collision When passing through short or narrow gates. When driving on uneven surfaces, grassy areas, or places with steps. When a sloped pillar or wall is protruding from a high position. When there are obstacles next to the road. When driving toward flags, curtains, tree branches, railroad crossing bars, etc. When driving on flooded roads.

469

470

uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

D rivin

g

1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

Important Reminder As with any system, there are limits to ACC with Low Speed Follow. Use the brake pedal whenever necessary, and always keep a safe interval between your vehicle and other vehicles.

3WARNING Improper use of ACC with Low Speed Follow can lead to a crash.

Use ACC with Low Speed Follow only when driving on expressways or freeways and in good road and weather conditions.

3WARNING ACC with Low Speed Follow has limited braking capability and may not stop your vehicle in time to avoid a collision with a vehicle that quickly stops in front of you.

Always be prepared to apply the brake pedal if the conditions require.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following-interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of yours and, if the detected vehicle comes to a stop, can decelerate and stop your vehicle, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the accelerator. When ACC with Low Speed Follow slows your vehicle by applying the brakes, your vehicles brake lights will illuminate.

When to use

Vehicle speed for ACC with Low Speed Follow: A vehicle is detected ahead within ACC with Low Speed Follow range ACC with Low Speed Follow operates at speeds up to 90 mph (145 km/h). No vehicle is detected within ACC with Low Speed Follow range ACC with Low Speed Follow operates at the speed of 25 mph (40 km/h) or above. Shift position for ACC with Low Speed Follow: In (D or (S *.

The radar sensor is at the lower part of the front bumper.

The camera is located behind the rearview mirror.

* Not available on all models

uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow D

rivin g

1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

For directions on the proper handling of the radar sensor, refer to the following page.

2 Radar Sensor P. 506 You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 504

ACC with Low Speed Follow may not work properly under certain conditions.

2 ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions and Limitations P. 476

When not using ACC with Low Speed Follow: Turn off adaptive cruise by pressing the button.

Do not use ACC with Low Speed Follow under the following conditions: On roads with heavy traffic or while driving in

continuous stop and go traffic. On roads with sharp turns. On roads with steep downhill sections, as the set

vehicle speed can be exceeded by coasting. In such cases, ACC with Low Speed Follow will not apply the brakes to maintain the set speed.

On roads with toll collection facilities or other objects between lanes of traffic, or in parking areas, or facilities with drive through access.

How to activate the system

How to use

Press the button on the steering wheel.

(white) is on in the instrument panel. ACC with Low Speed Follow is ready to use.

Continued 471

uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

472

D rivin

g

1To Set the Vehicle Speed

You can switch the displayed set speed measurements on the driver information interface or audio/information screen between mph and km/h.

2 Speed/Distance Units P. 151 2 Customized Features P. 351

The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) OFF, adaptive cruise control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, safety support and low tire pressure/TPMS indicators may come on in amber along with a message in the driver information interface when you set the power mode to ON after reconnecting the battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

When driving at about 25 mph (40 km/h) or above: Take your foot off the pedal and press the SET/ button when you reach the desired speed. The moment you release the button, the set speed is fixed, and ACC with Low Speed Follow begins. When driving slower than about 25 mph (40 km/h): If the vehicle is moving and the brake pedal is not depressed, pressing the button fixes the set speed to about 25 mph (40 km/h) regardless of current vehicle speed. If the vehicle is stationary, you can set the vehicle speed even with the brake pedal depressed.

When ACC with Low Speed Follow starts operating, the vehicle icon, interval bars and set speed appear on the driver information interface.

When you use ACC with Low Speed Follow, Straight Driving Assist (a feature of the Electric Power Steering system) is activated. By enabling the steering system to automatically compensate for natural steering pull, Straight Driving Assist makes it easier for you to keep your vehicle in a straight line.

To Set the Vehicle Speed

On when ACC with Low Speed Follow begins Press and release

SET/ button

(green)

Set Vehicle Speed

Set Vehicle Interval

(green)

uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow D

rivin g

1When in Operation

If the vehicle ahead of you slows down abruptly, or if another vehicle cuts in front of you, the beeper sounds, a message appears on the driver information interface, and the head-up warning lights* flash.

Depress the brake pedal, and keep an appropriate interval from the vehicle ahead.

Beep

Head-up Warning Lights*

There is a vehicle ahead ACC with Low Speed Follow monitors if a vehicle ahead of you enters the ACC with Low Speed Follow range. If a vehicle is detected doing so, the ACC with Low Speed Follow system maintains or decelerates your vehicles set speed in order to keep the vehicles set following interval from the vehicle ahead.

2 To Set or Change Following-interval P. 480

When a vehicle whose speed is slower than your set speed is detected in front of you, your vehicle starts to slow down.

When in Operation

ACC with Low Speed Follow Range: 394 ft. (120 m)

A vehicle icon appears on the driver information interface.

Continued 473* Not available on all models

uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

474

D rivin

g

1When in Operation

Even if the interval between your vehicle and the vehicle detected ahead is short, ACC with Low Speed Follow may start accelerating your vehicle under the following circumstances: The vehicle ahead of you is going at almost the

same speed as, or faster than, your vehicle. A vehicle that cuts in front of you is going faster

than your vehicle, gradually increasing the interval between the vehicles.

You can also set the system to beep when a vehicle in front of you comes in and goes out of the ACC with Low Speed Follow detecting range. A vehicle detect beep on and off can be selected.

2 Customized Features P. 351

Limitations You may need to use the brake to maintain a safe interval when using ACC with Low Speed Follow. Additionally, ACC with Low Speed Follow may not work properly under certain conditions.

2 ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions and Limitations P. 476

There is no vehicle ahead Your vehicle maintains the set speed without having to keep your foot on the brake or accelerator pedal. If there previously was a vehicle detected ahead that kept your vehicle from traveling at the set speed, ACC with Low Speed Follow accelerates your vehicle to the set speed, and then maintains it.

When you depress the accelerator pedal You can temporarily increase the vehicle speed. In this case, there is no audible or visual alert even if a vehicle is in the ACC with Low Speed Follow range. ACC with Low Speed Follow stays on unless you cancel it. Once you release the accelerator pedal, the system resumes an appropriate speed for keeping the following interval while a vehicle ahead is within the ACC with Low Speed Follow range.

A vehicle icon with dotted-line contour appears on the driver information interface.

uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow D

rivin g

1A vehicle detected ahead is within ACC with Low Speed Follow range and slows to a stop

3WARNING Exiting a vehicle that has been stopped while the ACC with Low Speed Follow system is operating can result in the vehicle moving without operator control.

A vehicle that moves without operator control can cause a crash, resulting in serious injury or death.

Never exit a vehicle when the vehicle is stopped by ACC with Low Speed Follow.

A vehicle detected ahead is within ACC with Low Speed Follow range and slows to a stop

Your vehicle also stops, automatically. The Stopped message appears on the driver information interface. When the vehicle ahead of you starts again, the vehicle icon on the driver information interface blinks. If you press the RES/+ or SET/ button, or depress the accelerator pedal, ACC with Low Speed Follow operates again within the prior set speed. If no vehicle is ahead of you before you resume driving, depressing the accelerator pedal will resume operation of ACC with Low Speed Follow within the prior set speed.

(green)

(green)

Continued 475

uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

476

D rivin

g

1ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions and Limitations

If you need the radar sensor to be repaired, or removed, or the radar sensor cover is strongly impacted, turn off the system by pressing the button and take your vehicle to a dealer.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning message appears too frequently).

The system may automatically shut off under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other conditions may reduce some of the ACC with Low Speed Follow functions.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 504 2 Radar Sensor P. 506

Environmental conditions Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).

Roadway conditions Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,

reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).

Vehicle conditions The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc. An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,

improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). The camera temperature gets too high. The parking brake is applied. When the radar sensor cover is dirty. The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications. When tire chains* are installed.

ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions and Limitations

* Not available on all models

uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow D

rivin g

Detection limitations A vehicle suddenly crosses in front of you. The interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short. A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly. You accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle ahead of you at high speed. The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small

vehicle. There are animals in front of your vehicle. You drive on a curved or winding or undulating road that makes it difficult for the

sensor to properly detect a vehicle in front of you.

The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle in front of you is significantly large.

An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you. Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle.

477Continued

478

uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

D rivin

g

Driving through a narrow metal bridge.

The vehicle ahead of you brakes suddenly. The vehicle ahead of you has a unique shape.

Your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you is driving on one edge of the lane.

Sensor detects upper section of an empty carrier truck.

Panel truck, tanker truck, etc.

uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow D

rivin g

1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

If a vehicle detected ahead is going at a speed slower than your increased set speed, ACC with Low Speed Follow may not accelerate your vehicle. This is to maintain the set interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.

You can switch the displayed set speed measurements on the driver information interface or audio/information screen between mph and km/h.

2 Speed/Distance Units P. 151 2 Customized Features P. 351

When you depress the accelerator pedal and then push and release the SET/ button, the current speed of the vehicle is set.

Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or SET/ button on the steering wheel.

Each time you press the RES/+ or SET/ button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.

If you keep the RES/+ or SET/ button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.

To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

To increase speed

To decrease speed

Continued 479

480

uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

D rivin

g

Press the Interval button to change the ACC with Low Speed Follow following-interval. Each time you press the button, the following- interval (the interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of you) setting cycles through extra long, long, middle, and short following- intervals.

Determine the most appropriate following- interval setting based on your specific driving conditions. Be sure to adhere to any following-interval requirements set by local regulation.

To Set or Change Following-interval

Interval Button

uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow D

rivin g

The higher your vehicles following-speed is, the longer the short, middle, long or extra long following-interval becomes. See the following examples for your reference.

When your vehicle stops automatically because a vehicle detected ahead of you has stopped, the interval between the two vehicles will vary based on the ACC with Low Speed Follow interval setting.

Following Interval When the Set Speed is:

50 mph (80 km/h) 65 mph (104 km/h)

Short 83 feet

25 meters 1.1 sec

100 feet 31 meters

1.1 sec

Middle 110 feet

33 meters 1.5 sec

137 feet 42 meters

1.5 sec

Long 154 feet

47 meters 2.1 sec

200 feet 61 meters

2.1 sec

Extra Long

207 feet 63 meters

2.9 sec

272 feet 83 meters

2.9 sec

481Continued

uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

482

D rivin

g

1To Cancel

Resuming the prior set speed: After you have canceled ACC with Low Speed Follow, you can resume the prior set speed while it is still displayed. Press the RES/+ button.

The set speed cannot be set or resumed when ACC with Low Speed Follow has been turned off using the

button. Press the button to activate the system, then set the desired speed.

To cancel ACC with Low Speed Follow, do any of the following: Press the CANCEL button. u The indicator (green) on the driver

information interface change to the indicator (white).

Press the button. u indicator (green) goes off.

Depress the brake pedal while the vehicle is moving forward. u The indicator (green) on the driver

information interface change to the indicator (white).

To Cancel

CANCEL Button

Button

uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow D

rivin g

1Automatic cancellation

Even though ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically canceled, you can still resume the prior set speed. Wait until the condition that caused ACC with Low Speed Follow to cancel improves, then press the SET/ button.

Automatic cancellation The beeper sounds and a message appears on the driver information interface when ACC with Low Speed Follow is automatically canceled. Any of these conditions may cause the ACC with Low Speed Follow to automatically cancel: Bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) When the radar sensor at the lower part of the front bumper gets dirty. The vehicle ahead of you cannot be detected. An abnormal tire condition is detected, or the tires are skidding. Driving on a mountainous road, or driving off road for extended periods. Abrupt steering wheel movement. When the ABS, VSA, CMBSTM, or Low Speed Braking Control system* is

activated. When the ABS or VSA system indicator comes on. When the vehicle is stopped on a very steep slope. When you manually apply the parking brake. When the detected vehicle within the ACC with Low Speed Follow range is too

close to your vehicle. The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including

the windshield, gets dirty. When the Maximum Load Limit is exceeded. When passing through an enclosed space, such as tunnel. The vehicle has repeatedly applied the brakes to maintain the set speed (for

example, you are descending a long slope).

The ACC with Low Speed Follow automatic cancellation can be also triggered by the following causes. In these cases, the parking brake will be automatically applied. The drivers seat belt is unfastened when the vehicle is stationary. The vehicle stops for more than 10 minutes. The engine is turned off.

Continued 483* Not available on all models

uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

484

D rivin

g

1To Switch ACC with Low Speed Follow to Cruise Control

Always be aware which mode you are in. When you are driving in Cruise mode, the system will not assist you to maintain a following interval from a vehicle ahead of you.

You can switch the displayed set speed measurements on the driver information interface or audio/information screen between mph and km/h.

2 Speed/Distance Units P. 151 2 Customized Features P. 351

Press and hold the interval button for one second. Cruise Mode Selected appears on the driver information interface for two seconds, and then the mode switches to Cruise. The indicator comes on. White: The system is standby. Green: The system is on. To switch back to ACC with Low Speed Follow, press and hold the interval button again for one second.

When to use Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h).

Take your foot off the pedal and press the SET/ button when you reach the desired speed. The moment you release the SET/ button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control begins. The color of indicator changes from white to green.

When you use cruise control, Straight Driving Assist (a feature of the Electric Power Steering system) is activated. By enabling the steering system to automatically compensate for natural steering pull, Straight Driving Assist makes it easier for you to keep your vehicle in a straight line.

To Switch ACC with Low Speed Follow to Cruise Control

ACC with Low Speed Follow ON

Cruise Control ON

(white) (white)

Interval Button

To Set the Vehicle Speed

uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow D

rivin g

1To Cancel

Resuming the prior set speed: After cruise control has been canceled, you can still resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+ button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.

You cannot set or resume in the following situations: When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h). When the button is turned off.

At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise control is canceled automatically.

Each time you press the RES/+ or SET/ button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h. If you keep the RES/+ or SET/ button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h.

To cancel cruise control, do any of the following: Press the CANCEL button. u The indicator (green) on the driver information interface changes to the

indicator (white). Press the button. u The indicator (green) goes off.

Depress the brake pedal. u The indicator (green) on the driver information interface changes to the

indicator (white).

To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

To Cancel

485

486

uuHonda SensinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

D rivin

g

1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Important Safety Reminders The LKAS is for your convenience only. It is not an autonomous driving system and always requires driver attention and control. The system does not work if you take your hands off the steering wheel or fail to steer the vehicle.

2 Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages P. 109

The LKAS is convenient when it is used on freeways.

Do not place objects on the instrument panel. Objects may reflect on the windshield and prevent correct detection of the traffic lanes.

The LKAS only alerts you when lane drift is detected without a turn signal in use. The LKAS may not detect all lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will vary based on weather, speed, and lane marker condition. It is always your responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid collisions.

The LKAS may not work properly or may work improperly under the certain conditions:

2 LKAS Conditions and Limitations P. 491

You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 504

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.

When you operate the turn signals to change lanes, the system is suspended, and resumes after the signals are off. If you make a lane change without operating the turn signals, the LKAS alerts activate, and torque is applied to the steering.

Front Sensor Camera Monitors the lane lines.

Tactile and visual alerts Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel and a warning display alert you that the vehicle is drifting out of a detected lane.

Steering input assist The system applies torque to the steering to keep the vehicle between the left and right lane lines. The applied torque becomes stronger as the vehicle gets closer to either of the lane lines.

uuHonda SensinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) D

rivin g

1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

The LKAS may not function as designed while driving in frequent stop and go traffic, or on roads with sharp curves.

When it fails to detect lanes, the system will temporarily be canceled. When a lane is detected, the system will recover automatically.

Provides assistance to keep the vehicle in the center of the lane. When the vehicle nears a white or yellow line, steering force of the electric power steering will become stronger.

When the vehicle enters the warning area, the LKAS alerts you with slight steering wheel vibration as well as a warning display.

Lane Keep Support Function

Lane Departure Warning Function

Warning Area

Warning Area

Continued 487

uuHonda SensinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

488

D rivin

g

1When the System can be Used

If the vehicle drifts toward either left or right lane line due to the system applying torque, turn off the LKAS and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

The system can be used when the following conditions are met. The lane in which you are driving has detectable lane markers on both sides, and

your vehicle is in the center of the lane. The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h). You are driving on a straight or slightly curved road. The turn signals are off. The brake pedal is not depressed. The wipers are not in high speed operation.

How to activate the system 1. Press the LKAS button. u indicator (white) and lane outlines

appear on the driver information interface. The system is activated.

When the System can be Used

LKAS Button

(white)

uuHonda SensinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) D

rivin g

2. Keep your vehicle near the center of the lane while driving. u The indicator changes from white to

green and the lane outlines change to solid ones once the system starts operating after detecting the left and right lane markings.

Press the LKAS button.

The LKAS is turned off every time you stop the engine, even if you turned it on the last time you drove the vehicle.

(green)

To cancel

LKAS Button

489Continued

uuHonda SensinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

490

D rivin

g

1The system operation is suspended if you:

You can change the setting for the LKAS. LKAS suspended beep ON and OFF can be selected.

2 Customized Features P. 351

The system operation is suspended if you:

Set the wipers to high speed. u Turning the wipers off, setting it to LO,

or the wipers are operating intermittently resumes the LKAS.

Decrease the vehicle speed to about 40 mph (64 km/h) or less. u Increasing the vehicle speed to about

45 mph (72 km/h) or more resumes the LKAS.

Depress the brake pedal. u The LKAS resumes and starts detecting

the lane lines again once you release the brake pedal.

Your vehicle is driving to the right or the left of the lane.

The LKAS may be automatically suspended when: The system fails to detect lane lines. The steering wheel is quickly turned. You fail to steer the vehicle. Driving through a sharp curve. Driving at a speed in excess of approximately 90 mph (145 km/h). Once these conditions no longer exist, the LKAS automatically resumes.

When the LKAS is suspended, the lane lines on the driver information interface change to lane outlines, and the beeper sounds (if activated).

uuHonda SensinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) D

rivin g

The LKAS may be automatically canceled when: The camera temperature gets extremely high or low. The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including

the windshield, gets dirty. The ABS or VSA system engages. The beeper sounds if the LKAS is automatically canceled.

The system may not detect lane markings and therefore may not keep the vehicle in the middle of the lane under certain conditions, including the following:

Environmental conditions Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel. There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface. Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). Strong light is reflected onto the roadway. Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings. Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers. Reflections on the interior of the windshield. Driving at night or in a dark condition such as a tunnel.

LKAS Conditions and Limitations

491Continued

492

uuHonda SensinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

D rivin

g

Roadway conditions Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,

reflected lights, road spray, high contrast). Driving on a road with temporary lane markings. Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road

repairs or old lane markings.

The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection or crosswalk).

The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.

The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines. The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill. Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.

Faded lines Duplicate lines Tire tracks

Very wide or narrow traffic lane

uuHonda SensinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) D

rivin g

When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white lines (or yellow lines).

Driving on roads with double lines.

Vehicle conditions Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted. The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet

snow, etc. The inside of the windshield is fogged. The camera temperature gets too high. An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,

improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications. The vehicle is towing a trailer*.

Lane void of lines at exit or interchange

493* Not available on all models

494

uuHonda SensinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

D rivin

g

1Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

Important Safety Reminder Like all assistance systems, the RDM system has limitations. Overreliance on the RDM system may result in a collision. It is always your responsibility to keep the vehicle within your driving lane.

The RDM system only alerts you when lane drift is detected without a turn signal in use. The RDM system may not detect all lane markings or lane or roadway departures; accuracy will vary based on weather, speed and lane marker condition. It is always your responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid collisions.

You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 504

The RDM system may not work properly or may work improperly under the certain conditions:

2 RDM Conditions and Limitations P. 496

There are times when you may not notice RDM functions due to your operation of the vehicle, or road surface conditions.

In the following case, a beeper sounds, a message related to the ACC with Low Speed Follow appears on the driver information interface, and the braking function controlled by the RDM system is canceled. The vehicle has repeatedly applied the brakes to

maintain the set speed (for example, you are descending a long slope).

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System Alerts and helps to assist you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle unintentionally crossing over detected lane markings and/or leaving the roadway altogether.

The front camera behind the rearview mirror monitors left and right lane markings (in white or yellow). If your vehicle is getting too close to detected lane markings without a turn signal activated, the system, in addition to a visual alert, applies steering torque and alerts you with rapid vibrations on the steering wheel, to help you remain within the detected lane.

2 Customized Features P. 351

As a visual alert, the Lane Departure message appears on the driver information interface.

If the system determines that its steering input is insufficient to keep your vehicle on the roadway, it may apply braking. u Braking is applied only when the lane markings are solid continuous lines.

The system cancels assisting operations when you turn the steering wheel to avoid crossing over detected lane markings.

If the system operates several times without detecting driver response, the system beeps to alert you.

How the System Works

uuHonda SensinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System D

rivin g

1Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

If LKAS is off and you have selected Narrow from the customized options using the audio/information screen, the message below will appear in case the system determines a possibility of your vehicle crossing over detected lane markings.

2 Customized Features P. 351

1How the System Activates

The RDM system may automatically shut off and the safety support indicator (amber) comes and stays on.

2 Indicators P. 82

RDM system function can be impacted when the vehicle is: Not driven within a traffic lane. Driven on the inside edge of a curve, or outside of

a lane. Driven in a narrow lane.

The system activates when all the following conditions are met: The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h). The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road. The turn signals are off. The brake pedal is not depressed. The wipers are not in high speed operation. The system makes a determination that the driver is not actively accelerating,

braking, or steering.

How the System Activates

Continued 495

uuHonda SensinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

496

D rivin

g

1RDM On and Off

When you have selected Warning Only from the customized options using the audio/information screen, the system does not operate the steering wheel and braking.

2 Customized Features P. 351

The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) OFF, adaptive cruise control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, safety support and low tire pressure/TPMS indicators may come on in amber along with a message in the driver information interface when you set the power mode to ON after reconnecting the battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

When you turn the RDM on and off, do the following. 1. Press the safety support switch. 2. Roll the left selector wheel to the

symbol and push it. u A message appears on the driver

information interface when the system turns on or off.

The RDM is in the previously selected ON or OFF setting each time you start the engine.

The system may not properly detect lane markings and the position of your vehicle under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below.

Environmental conditions Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel. There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface. Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). Strong light is reflected onto the roadway. Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings. Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers. Reflections on the interior of the windshield. Driving at night or in a dark condition such as a tunnel.

RDM On and Off

Safety Support Switch

Left Selector Wheel

RDM Conditions and Limitations

uuHonda SensinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System D

rivin g

Roadway conditions Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,

reflected lights, road spray, high contrast). Driving on a road with temporary lane markings. Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road

repairs or old lane markings. The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection

or crosswalk). The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing. The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines. The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill. Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces. When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white

(or yellow) lines. Driving on roads with double lines.

Vehicle conditions Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted. The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet

snow, etc. The inside of the windshield is fogged. The camera temperature gets too high. An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,

improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications. When tire chains* are installed. The vehicle is towing a trailer*.

497* Not available on all models

498

uuHonda SensinguTraffic Sign Recognition System

D rivin

g

1Traffic Sign Recognition System

Not all signs may be displayed, but any signs posted on roadsides should not be ignored. The system does not work on the designated traffic signs of all the countries you travel, nor in all situations. Do not rely too much on the system. Always drive at speeds appropriate for the road conditions.

Never apply a film or attach any objects to the windshield that could obstruct the cameras field of vision and cause the system to operate abnormally. Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield within the cameras field of vision can cause the system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we recommend that you replace the windshield with a genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making even minor repairs within the cameras field of vision or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield may also cause the system to operate abnormally. After replacing the windshield, have a dealer recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the camera is necessary for the system to operate properly.

Traffic Sign Recognition System Reminds you of road sign information, such as the current speed limit, your vehicle has just passed through, showing it on the driver information interface and the head-up display*.

When the camera located behind the rearview mirror captures traffic signs while driving, the system displays the ones that are recognized as designated for your vehicle. The sign icon will be displayed until the vehicle reaches a predetermined time and distance.

The sign icon also may switch to another one or disappear when:

The other designated limit is detected. You make a turn with a turn signal at an intersection.

How the System Works

Driver information interface Head-up display*

* Not available on all models

uuHonda SensinguTraffic Sign Recognition System D

rivin g

1Traffic Sign Recognition System

To help reduce the likelihood that high interior temperatures will cause the cameras sensing system to shut off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front of the vehicle away from the sun. If you use a reflective sun shade, do not allow it to cover the camera housing. Covering the camera can concentrate heat on it.

You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 504

If the system does not detect any traffic signs while you are driving, the image below may appear.

Driver information interface Head-up display*

Continued 499* Not available on all models

uuHonda SensinguTraffic Sign Recognition System

500

D rivin

g

1Traffic Sign Recognition System Conditions and Limitations

When the traffic sign recognition system malfunctions, appears on the driver information interface. If this message does not disappear, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Driver information interface

Head-up display*

The traffic sign recognition system may not be able to recognize a traffic sign in the following cases.

Vehicle conditions Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted. The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc. The inside of the windshield is fogged. There are portions remaining to be wiped. An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction,

improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.

Environmental conditions Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). Strong light is reflected onto the roadway. Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel. When you drive in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. Driving at night, in dark areas such as long tunnels. Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). A vehicle in front of you is kicking up spray or snow.

Traffic Sign Recognition System Conditions and Limitations

* Not available on all models

uuHonda SensinguTraffic Sign Recognition System D

rivin g

The position or the condition of the traffic sign A sign is hard to be found since it is in a complicated area. A sign is located far away from your vehicle. A sign is located where the beam of the headlight is hard to reach. A sign is on a corner or bend in the road. Faded or bent signs. Rotated or damaged signs. A sign is covered with mud, snow, or frost. A part of the sign is hidden by the trees, or the sign itself is hidden by a vehicle

and others. Light (a streetlight) or a shadow is reflected on the surface of the sign. A sign is too bright or too dark (an electric sign). A sign of a small size.

Other conditions When you are driving at a high speed.

501Continued

502

uuHonda SensinguTraffic Sign Recognition System

D rivin

g

The traffic sign recognition system may not operate correctly, such as displaying a sign that does not follow the actual regulation for the roadway or does not exist at all in the following cases. u A speed limit sign may display at a higher or lower speed than the actual speed

limit. There is a supplementary sign with further information such as weather, time,

vehicle type, school zone, etc. Figures on the sign are hard to read (electric signs, numbers on the sign are

blurred etc.). A sign is in the vicinity of the lane you are driving in, even though it is not for the

lane (speed limit sign situated at the junction between the side road and the main road, etc.).

There are things that look similar to the color or shape of the recognition object (similar sign, electric sign, signboard, structure, etc.).

A truck or another large vehicle with a sticker of the speed limit sign on the back is traveling in front of you.

uuHonda SensinguTraffic Sign Recognition System D

rivin g

The speed limit sign icon is displayed on the right half of the screen.

Selecting to display traffic signs when main mode is off You can continue displaying a reduced-size traffic sign icon on the driver information interface and head-up display* even while the main mode is not selected.

2 Customized Features P. 351

Signs Displayed on the Driver information interface and Head- Up Display*

When main mode is selected

When main mode is not selected

Speed Limit Sign

Speed Limit Sign

Driver information interface Head-up display*

Driver information interface Head-up display*

503* Not available on all models

504

uuHonda SensinguFront Sensor Camera

D rivin

g

1Front Sensor Camera

Never apply a film or attach any objects to the windshield, the hood, or the front grille that could obstruct the cameras field of vision and cause the system to operate abnormally. Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield within the cameras field of vision can cause the system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we recommend that you replace the windshield with a genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making even minor repairs within the cameras field of vision or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield may also cause the system to operate abnormally. After replacing the windshield, have a dealer recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the camera is necessary for the system to operate properly.

Do not place an object on the top of the instrument panel. It may reflect onto the windshield and prevent the system from detecting lane lines properly.

Front Sensor Camera The camera, used in systems such as Lane Keeping Assist System, Road Departure Mitigation system, Adaptive Cruise Control with Low Speed Follow, Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM and traffic sign recognition system, is designed to detect an object that triggers any of the systems to operate their functions.

This camera is located behind the rearview mirror.

To help reduce the likelihood that high interior temperatures will cause the cameras sensing system to shut off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front of the vehicle away from the sun. If you use a reflective sun shade, do not allow it to cover the camera housing. Covering the camera can concentrate heat on it.

Camera Location and Handling Tips

Front Sensor Camera

uuHonda SensinguFront Sensor Camera D

rivin g

1Front Sensor Camera

If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: Camera Temperature Too High message appears: Use the climate control system to cool down the

interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode with the airflow directed towards the camera.

Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield temperature, which cools down the area around the camera.

If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: Clean Front Windshield message appears: Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the

windshield. If the message does not disappear after you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

505

506

uuHonda SensinguRadar Sensor

D rivin

g

1Radar Sensor

Avoid strong impacts to the radar sensor cover.

For the CMBSTM to work properly: Always keep the radar sensor cover clean. Never use chemical solvents or polishing powder

for cleaning the sensor cover. Clean it with water or a mild detergent.

Do not put a sticker on the radar sensor cover or replace the radar sensor cover.

If you need the radar sensor to be repaired, or removed, or the radar sensor cover is strongly impacted, turn off the system by using the safety support switch and take your vehicle to a dealer.

2 CMBSTM On and Off P. 459

If the vehicle is involved in any of the following situations, the radar sensor may not work properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer: Your vehicle is involved in a frontal collision. Your vehicle drives through deep water or is

submerged in deep water. Your vehicle strongly strikes a bump, curb, chock,

or embankment that could jar the radar sensor.

Radar Sensor The radar sensor is at the lower part of the front bumper.

Do not change the position of the radar sensor or any of the surrounding parts.

Do not apply paint, stickers, or attach non- genuine accessories to the front part of the radar sensor or the surrounding area. Be particularly careful that any custom license plate frame or other accessory does not block any part of the radar beam path (see adjacent illustration).

Radar Sensor

Do not apply paint, stickers, or attach accessories to the front part of the radar sensor or the surrounding area.

uuHonda SensinguSonar Sensors* D

rivin g

1Sonar Sensors*

For the sonar sensors to work properly, do not: Place stickers or other objects on or around the

sensors. Hit the area around the sensors. Attempt to take apart any sensor. Put any accessories on or around the sensors.

Consult with a dealer if: A sensor has been subjected to shock. Work needs to be done to the area around a

sensor.

In the following cases, the sonar sensors may not work properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. The front or rear bumper has made contact with a

hill, parking block, curb, embankment, etc. The vehicle has been involved in frontal or rear

collision. The vehicle has been driven through a deep

puddle.

Sonar Sensors*

Location and range of sensors The sonar sensors are situated in the front and rear bumpers.

Sonar Sensors Sonar Sensors

Sensor Range

507* Not available on all models

508

D rivin

g

Braking

1Braking

When you depress the brake pedal, you may hear a whirring sound from the engine compartment. This is because the brake system is in operation, and it is normal.

1Parking Brake

You may hear the electric parking brake system motor operating from the rear wheel area when you apply or release the parking brake. This is normal.

The brake pedal may slightly move due to the electric parking brake system operation when you apply or release the parking brake. This is normal.

You cannot apply or release the parking brake if the battery goes dead.

2 If the Battery Is Dead P. 606

If you pull up and hold the electric parking brake switch while driving, the brakes on all four wheels are applied by the VSA system until the vehicle comes to a stop. The electric parking brake then applies, and the switch should be released.

Brake System

Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parked. When the parking brake is applied, you can manually or automatically release it.

To apply The electric parking brake can be applied any time the vehicle has battery, no matter which position the power mode is in.

Pull the electric parking brake switch up gently and securely. u The indicator in the switch comes on. u The parking brake and brake system

indicator (red) comes on. To release The power mode must be in ON in order to release the electric parking brake. 1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Press the electric parking brake switch. u The indicator in the switch goes off. u The parking brake and brake system

indicator (red) goes off.

Manually releasing the parking brake using the switch helps your vehicle start slowly and smoothly when facing downhill on steep hills.

Parking Brake

Electric Parking Brake Switch

Electric Parking Brake Switch

uuBrakinguBrake System D

rivin g

1Parking Brake

In the following situations, the parking brake automatically operates. When the vehicle stops more than 10 minutes

while ACC with Low Speed Follow is activated. When the drivers seat belt is unfastened while

your vehicle is stopped automatically by ACC with Low Speed Follow.

When the engine is turned off while ACC with Low Speed Follow is activated.

When the vehicle stops with the automatic brake hold system activated for more than 10 minutes.

When the drivers seat belt is unfastened while your vehicle is stopped and brake hold is applied.

When the engine is turned off while brake hold is applied.

When there is a problem with the automatic brake hold system while brake hold is applied.

When the engine is turned off, except by Auto Idle Stop system, while ACC with Low Speed Follow is activated.

When the engine is turned off, except by Auto Idle Stop system, while brake hold system is applied.

1.5 L engine models

Continued 509

uuBrakinguBrake System

510

D rivin

g

1Parking Brake

If the parking brake cannot be released automatically, release it manually.

When the vehicle is traveling uphill, the accelerator pedal may need to be pressed farther to automatically release the electric parking brake.

The parking brake cannot be released automatically while the following indicators are on: Malfunction indicator lamp Transmission system indicator

The parking brake may not be released automatically while the following indicators are on: Parking brake and brake system indicator VSA system indicator ABS indicator Supplemental restraint system indicator

Automatic parking brake feature operation If the automatic parking brake feature has been activated: The parking brake is applied automatically when you set the power mode to

VEHICLE OFF. To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake and brake

system indicator (red) is on. 2 Activating and deactivating the automatic parking brake feature P. 511

To release automatically Depressing the accelerator pedal releases the parking brake.

Use the accelerator pedal to release the brake when you are starting the vehicle facing uphill, or in a traffic jam.

Gently depress the accelerator pedal. When on a hill, it may require more accelerator input to release. u The parking brake and brake system

indicator (red) goes off.

You can release the parking brake automatically when: You are wearing the drivers seat belt. The engine is running. The transmission is not in (P or (N .

Accelerator Pedal

uuBrakinguBrake System D

rivin g

1Parking Brake

In cold climates, the parking brake may freeze in place if applied. When parking the vehicle, chock the wheels and make sure the automatic parking brake feature is deactivated. Also, when putting your vehicle through a conveyor- type car wash or when having your vehicle towed, deactivate the automatic parking brake feature and leave the parking brake released.

Activating and deactivating the automatic parking brake feature With the power mode is in ON, carry out the following steps to either activate or deactivate the automatic parking brake feature. 1. Put the transmission into (P . 2. Without depressing the brake pedal, pull up and release the electric parking brake

switch. u Check that the parking brake and brake system indicator (red) has come on.

3. Pull up and hold the electric parking brake switch. When you hear a beeping sound, release the switch and within 3 seconds pull up and hold the switch again.

4. When you hear a sound indicating that the procedure is completed, release the switch. u Two beeps indicates that the feature has been activated. u One beep indicates that the feature has been deactivated. u When you have completed activating the feature, the parking brake will

remain applied after you turn off the engine. u To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake and

brake system indicator (red) is on.

If you need to temporarily deactivate the feature while putting your vehicle through a conveyor type car wash, you can follow the procedure explained below. 1. Depress the brake pedal and bring the vehicle to a stop. 2. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF and then within 2 seconds push down the

electric parking brake switch. u Activation and deactivation settings for the feature will not be affected. u Before temporarily deactivating the feature, make sure to first turn off both

ACC with Low Speed Follow and the automatic brake hold system. u To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake and

brake system indicator (red) is on.

Automatic transmission models

Continued 511

uuBrakinguBrake System

512

D rivin

g

1Foot Brake

Check the brakes after driving through deep water, or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the pedal several times.

If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when applying the brakes, this is caused by the brake wear indicator rubbing on the brake rotor and indicates that the brake pads need to be replaced. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer. If you hear only an occasional squeak or squeal when you initially apply the brake pedal, this may be normal and caused by high frequency vibration of the brake pads against the rotating brake disc.

Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a lower gear/speed position.

Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.

Whenever the brakes are activated by CMBSTM or another system that automatically controls braking, the brake pedal is depressed and released in accordance with braking function.

Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. The brake assist system increases the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when braking very hard.

2 Brake Assist System P. 517 2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 516

Foot Brake

uuBrakinguBrake System D

rivin g

1Automatic Brake Hold

3WARNING Activating the automatic brake hold system on steep hills or slippery roads may still allow the vehicle to move if you remove your foot from the brake pedal.

If a vehicle unexpectedly moves, it may cause a crash resulting in serious injury or death.

Never activate the automatic brake hold system or rely on it to keep a vehicle from moving when stopped on a steep hill or slippery roads.

3WARNING Using the automatic brake hold system to park the vehicle may result in the vehicle unexpectedly moving.

If a vehicle moves unexpectedly, it may cause a crash, resulting in serious injury or death.

Never leave the vehicle when braking is temporarily kept by automatic brake hold and always park the vehicle by putting the transmission in (P and applying the parking brake.

Keeps the brake applied after releasing the brake pedal until the accelerator pedal is pressed. You can use this system while the vehicle is temporarily stopped, like at traffic lights and in heavy traffic.

Automatic Brake Hold

Turning on the system

Fasten your seat belt properly, then start the engine. Press the automatic brake hold button. The automatic brake

hold system indicator comes on. The system is turned on.

Activating the system

Depress the brake pedal to come to a complete stop. The transmission must not be in (P or (R. The automatic brake

hold indicator comes on. Braking is kept for up to 10 minutes.

Release the brake pedal after the automatic brake hold indicator comes on.

Canceling the system

Depress the accelerator pedal while the transmission is in a position other than (P or (N. The system is canceled and the vehicle starts to move. The automatic brake

hold indicator goes off. The system continues to be on.

Accelerator PedalBrake PedalAutomatic Brake Hold Button

Goes Off

U.S.

Canada

OnOn

Comes On

Comes On

Comes On

Continued 513

uuBrakinguBrake System

514

D rivin

g

1Automatic Brake Hold

While the system is activated, you can turn off the engine or park the vehicle through the same procedure as you normally do.

2 When Stopped P. 518

Whether the system is on, or the system is activated, the automatic brake hold turns off once the engine is off.

The system automatically cancels when: You engage the parking brake. You depress the brake pedal and put the transmission into (P or (R .

The system automatically cancels and the parking brake is applied when: Braking is kept for more than 10 minutes. The drivers seat belt is unfastened. The engine is turned off. There is a problem with automatic brake hold system.

uuBrakinguBrake System D

rivin g

1Turning on the system

Make sure to turn off the automatic brake hold system before using an automated car wash.

You may hear an operating noise if the vehicle moves while the automatic brake hold system is in operation.

Turning off the automatic brake hold system While the system is on, press the automatic brake hold button again. u The automatic brake hold system

indicator goes off.

If you want to turn off automatic brake hold while the system is in operation, press the automatic brake hold button with the brake pedal depressed.

Automatic Brake Hold Button

Goes Off

515

516

uuBrakinguAnti-lock Brake System (ABS)

D rivin

g

1Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

NOTICE The ABS may not function correctly if you use a tire of the incorrect size or type.

If the ABS indicator comes on while driving, there may be a problem with the system. While normal braking will not be affected, there is a possibility that the ABS will not be operating. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

The ABS is not designed for the purpose of reducing the time or distance it takes for a vehicle to stop: It is designed to limit brake lockup which can lead to skidding and loss of steering control.

In the following cases, your vehicle may need more distance to stop than a vehicle without the ABS: You are driving on rough or uneven road surfaces,

such as gravel or snow. The tires are equipped with tire chains*.

The following may be observed with the ABS system: Motor sounds coming from the engine

compartment when the brakes are applied, or when system checks are being performed after the engine has been started and while the vehicle accelerates.

Brake pedal and/or the vehicle body vibration when ABS activates.

These vibrations and sounds are normal to ABS systems and are no cause for concern.

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you can.

The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.

You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as stomp and steer.

ABS operation The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Depress the brake pedal and keep holding the pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.

ABS may activate when you depress the brake pedal when driving on: Wet or snow covered roads. Roads paved with stone. Roads with uneven surfaces, such as potholes, cracks, manholes, etc.

When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.

ABS

* Not available on all models

uuBrakinguBrake Assist System D

rivin g

Brake Assist System Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.

Brake assist system operation Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.

When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.

517

518

D rivin

g

Parking Your Vehicle

1Parking Your Vehicle

Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects, such as dry grass, oil, or timber. Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.

3WARNING The vehicle can roll away if left unattended without confirming that Park is engaged.

A vehicle that rolls away could cause a crash resulting in serious injury or death.

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal until you have confirmed that (P is shown on the shift position indicator.

When Stopped 1. Depress the brake pedal firmly. 2. With the brake pedal depressed, pull up the electric parking brake switch slowly,

but fully. 3. Put the transmission into (P . 4. Turn off the engine. u The parking brake and brake system indicator (red) goes off in about 30

seconds.

Always set the parking brake, in particular if you are parked on an incline.

uuParking Your VehicleuWhen Stopped D

rivin g

1When Stopped

NOTICE The following can damage the transmission: Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals

simultaneously. Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by

depressing the accelerator pedal. Putting the transmission into (P before the vehicle

stops completely.

In extremely cold temperatures, the parking brake may freeze up if applied. If such temperatures are expected, do not apply the parking brake but, if parking on a slope, either turn the front wheels so they will contact the curb if the vehicle rolls down the slope or block the wheels to keep the vehicle from moving. If you do not take either precaution, the vehicle may roll unexpectedly, leading to a crash.

519

520

uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*

D rivin

g

1Parking Sensor System*

Even when the system is on, always confirm if there is no obstacle near your vehicle before parking.

The system may not work properly when: The sensors are covered with snow, ice, mud, or

dirt. The vehicle is on uneven surface, such as grass,

bumps, or a hill. The vehicle has been out in hot or cold weather. The system is affected by devices that emit

ultrasonic waves. Driving in bad weather.

The system may not sense: Thin or low objects. Sonic-absorptive materials, such as snow, cotton,

or sponge. Objects directly under the bumper.

Do not put any accessories on or around the sensors.

Parking Sensor System*

The corner and center sensors monitor obstacles around your vehicle, and the beeper, driver information interface and audio/information screen let you know the approximate distance between your vehicle and the obstacle.

The sensor location and range

Within about 24 in (60 cm) or less

Front Corner Sensors Rear Corner Sensors

Front*: Within about 39 in (100 cm) or less Rear: Within about 43 in (110 cm) or less

Rear Center Sensors

Front Center Sensors*

* Not available on all models

uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System* D

rivin g

1Parking Sensor System*

When you set the power mode to ON, the system will be in the previously selected condition.

Parking sensor system on and off With the power mode in ON, press the parking sensor system button to turn on or off the system. The indicator in the button comes on when the system is on.

The front corner, rear corner and rear center sensors start to detect an obstacle when the transmission is in (R, and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

The front corner and front center* sensors start to detect an obstacle when the transmission is in any position other than (P or (R, and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

Continued 521* Not available on all models

uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*

522

D rivin

g

1Screen Operation

The split screen tab disappears, and the split view returns to the last camera view mode under the following conditions: If the parking sensor system is turned off. If there is a malfunction in the system.

Screen Operation You can switch between split view off and split view on by touching the split screen tab.

Split Screen Tab

Split View Off

Split View On

uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System* D

rivin g

When the distance between your vehicle and detected obstacles becomes shorter

*1:At this stage, only the center sensors detect obstacles.

Interval between beeps

Distance between the Bumper and Obstacle Indicator

Driver information interface/ Audio/Information ScreenCorner Sensors Center Sensors

Moderate

Front*: About 39-24 in (100-60 cm)

Rear: About 43-24 in (110-60 cm)

Comes on in Yellow*1

Short About 24-18 in

(60-45 cm) About 24-18 in

(60-45 cm) Comes on in Amber

Very short About 18-14 in

(45-35 cm) About 18-14 in

(45-35 cm)

Continuous About 14 in

(35 cm) or less About 14 in

(35 cm) or less Comes on in Red

Indicators light up where the sensor detects an obstacle.

Indicators light up where the sensor detects an obstacle.

Audio/Information Screen

Driver information interface

523Continued* Not available on all models

uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*

524

D rivin

g

1Turning off All Rear Sensors

When you put the transmission into (R, the indicator in the parking sensor system button blinks as a reminder that the rear sensors have been turned off.

1. Make sure that the parking sensor system is not activated. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.

2. Press and hold the parking sensor system button, and set the power mode to ON. 3. Keep pressing the button for 10 seconds. Release the button when the indicator

in the button flashes. u The beeper sounds once.

4. Press the button again. The indicator in the button goes off. u The beeper sounds twice. The rear sensors are now turned off.

To turn the rear sensors on again, follow the above procedure. The beeper sounds three times when the rear sensors come back on.

Turning off All Rear Sensors

uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor* D

rivin g

1Cross Traffic Monitor*

The parking sensor systems alerting buzzer overrides the Cross Traffic Monitor buzzer when the sensors are detecting obstacles at the closest range.

3CAUTION Cross Traffic Monitor cannot detect all approaching vehicles and may not detect an approaching vehicle at all.

Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to back up the vehicle before doing so may result in a collision.

Do not solely rely on the system when reversing; always also use your mirrors, and look behind and to the sides of your vehicle before reversing.

Models with parking sensor system

Cross Traffic Monitor*

Monitors the rear corner areas using the radar sensors when reversing, and alerts you if a vehicle approaching from a rear corner is detected.

The system is convenient when you are backing out of a parking space.

525Continued* Not available on all models

uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor*

526

D rivin

g

1Cross Traffic Monitor*

Cross Traffic Monitor may not detect or may delay alerting an approaching vehicle, or may alert without an approaching vehicle under the following conditions: An obstacle, such as another vehicle and a wall,

near your vehicles rear bumper, is blocking the radar sensors scope.

Your vehicle is moving at the speed of about 3 mph (5 km/h) or higher.

A vehicle is approaching at the speed other than between about 6 mph (10 km/h) and 16 mph (25 km/h).

The system picks up external interference such as other radar sensors from another vehicle or strong radio wave transmitted from a facility nearby.

Either corner of the rear bumper is covered with snow, ice, mud or dirt.

When there is bad weather. Your vehicle is on an incline. Your vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load in the rear. Your vehicle is reversing towards a wall, a pole, a

vehicle, and so on.

The rear bumper or the sensors have been improperly repaired or the rear bumper has been deformed. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

For proper operation, always keep the rear bumper corner area clean. Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with labels or stickers of any kind.

The system activates when: The power mode is in ON. The Cross Traffic Monitor is turned on.

2 Cross Traffic Monitor On and Off P. 528

The transmission is in (R. Your vehicle is moving at 3 mph (5 km/h) or

lower.

When a vehicle is detected approaching from a rear corner, Cross Traffic Monitor alerts you with a buzzer and a displayed warning.

The system will not detect a vehicle that approaches from directly behind your vehicle, nor will it provide alerts about a detected vehicle when it moves directly behind your vehicle.

The system does not provide alerts for a vehicle that is moving away from your vehicle, and it may alert for pedestrians, bicycles, or stationary objects.

How the System Works

Radar sensors: Underneath the rear bumper corners

* Not available on all models

uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor* D

rivin g

1When the System Detects a Vehicle

If the on the lower right changes to in amber when the transmission is in (R, mud, snow or ice, etc. may have accumulated in the vicinity of the sensor. The system is temporarily canceled. Check the bumper corners for any obstructions, and thoroughly clean the area if necessary.

If the comes on when the transmission is in (R, there may be a problem with the Cross Traffic Monitor system. Do not use the system and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

If the display remains the same with the transmission in (R, there may be a problem with the rear camera system and the Cross Traffic Monitor system. Do not use the system and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

An arrow icon appears on the side a vehicle is approaching on the audio/information screen.

When the System Detects a Vehicle

Wide ViewNormal View

Arrow Icon

Top Down View

Continued 527

528

uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor*

D rivin

g

You can switch the system on and off using the audio/information screen. 2 Customized Features P. 351

The system can also be turned on and off on the audio/information screen by pressing the Cross Traffic Monitor icon.

Cross Traffic Monitor On and Off

Check Your Surroundings

Cross Traffic Monitor icon

Multi-View Rear Camera

D

rivin g

1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera

The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects appear closer or farther than they actually are.

Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do not rely on the rearview display which does not give you all information about conditions at the back of your vehicle.

If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of debris.

You can change the Fixed Guideline and Dynamic Guideline settings.

2 Customized Features P. 351

Fixed Guideline ON: Guidelines appear when you put the transmission into (R. OFF: Guidelines do not appear. Dynamic Guideline ON: Guidelines move according to the steering wheel direction. OFF: Guidelines do not move.

About Your Multi-View Rear Camera The audio/information screen can display your vehicles rear view. The display automatically changes to the rear view when the transmission is put into (R .

Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area

Top Down View Mode

Normal View Mode

Wide View Mode

Guidelines

Bumper

Camera

Approx. 39 inches (1 m)

Approx. 20 inches (50 cm)

529Continued

530

uuMulti-View Rear CamerauAbout Your Multi-View Rear Camera

D rivin

g

You can view three different camera modes on the audio/information screen.

Touch the appropriate icon to switch the mode. : Wide view mode : Normal view mode : Top down view mode

If you were last using Wide view mode or Normal view mode, the same view mode will be activated the next time you put the transmission into (R .

If you were using Top down view mode before turning off the engine, the next time you set the power mode to ON and put the transmission into (R , the view mode you were using just before using Top down view mode (Wide view mode or Normal view mode) will be activated.

If you were using Top down view mode and 10 seconds elapsed after you took the transmission out of (R , the view mode you were using just before selecting Top down view mode (Wide view mode or Normal view mode) will be activated the next time you put the transmission into (R .

Refueling

D

rivin g

1Fuel Information

NOTICE We recommend quality gasoline containing detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain good performance, fuel economy, and emissions control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is available.

Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely affect performance, and cause the malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on. If this happens, contact a dealer for service. Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on oxygenated gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol. If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try another service station or switch to another brand of gasoline.

Fuel Information Fuel recommendation

Use of a lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise that can lead to engine damage.

Top tier detergent gasoline Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda endorses the use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline where available to help maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive manufacturers to meet the needs of todays advanced engines.

Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards at the retail location. This fuel is guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic additives in gasoline, help avoid buildup of deposits in your engine and emission control system.

For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit www.honda.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.

Fuel tank capacity: 14.8 US gal (56 L)

Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher

531

532

uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel

D rivin

g

1How to Refuel

The fuel filler opening is designed to accept only service station filler nozzles for refueling. Use of smaller diameter tubes (e.g., those used to siphon fuel for other uses) or other non-service station devices can damage the area in and around the filler opening.

Use the master door lock switch to unlock the fuel fill door. The vehicle doors and fuel fill door automatically relock if the keyless remote unlock function is used. This can be deactivated by briefly opening then closing the drivers door.

3WARNING Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks, and flames away.

Handle fuel only outdoors. Wipe up spills immediately.

How to Refuel Your fuel tank is not equipped with a fuel filler cap. You can insert the filler nozzle directly into the filler neck. The tank seals itself again when you pull out the filler nozzle.

1. Stop your vehicle with the service station pump on the left side of the vehicle in the rear.

2. Turn off the engine. 3. Unlock the drivers door. u The fuel fill door on the outer side of the

vehicle will unlock. 4. Press and release the area indicated by the

arrow to release the fuel fill door. You will here a click and the lid will open slightly.

5. Manually pull the fuel fill door to a fully open position.

Press

Fuel Fill Door

uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel D

rivin g

1How to Refuel

If the filler nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is not full, there may be a problem with the pumps fuel vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.

The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result of changes in air temperature.

Do not continue to add fuel after the filler nozzle has automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed the full tank capacity.

If you have to refuel your vehicle from a portable container, use the funnel provided with your vehicle.

2 Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container P. 630

If you repeatedly fill the tank with less than the specified minimum amount of fuel, the malfunction indicator lamp may come on. If this happens, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

1.5 L engine models

6. Place the end of the filler nozzle on the lower part of filler opening, then insert it slowly and fully. u Make sure that the end of the filler

nozzle goes down along with the filler pipe.

u Keep the filler nozzle level. u When the tank is full, the filler nozzle will

click off automatically.

u If you do not fill up the tank to full, always add a minimum of 1.3 US gal (5 L) of fuel.

u After filling, wait about five seconds before removing the filler nozzle.

7. Shut the fuel fill door by hand.

1.5 L engine models

All models

533

534

D rivin

g

Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions

1Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2 Emissions

Direct calculation is the recommended method to determine actual fuel consumed while driving.

In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are established following a simulated test. For more information on how this test is performed, please visit https://www.nrcan.gc.ca and search for fuel consumption testing in the search field at the top of the page.

Miles driven Gallons of fuel

Miles per Gallon

100 Liters of fuel Kilometers driven

L per 100 km

Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2 Emissions Achieving fuel economy and reducing CO2 emissions is dependent on several factors, including driving conditions, load weight, idling time, driving habits, and vehicle condition. Depending on these and other factors, you may not achieve the rated fuel economy of this vehicle.

You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle. Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the driver information interface. Use engine oil with the viscosity recommended.

2 Recommended Engine Oil P. 551

Maintain the specified tire pressure. Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo. Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicles underside

adds weight and increases wind resistance.

Maintenance and Fuel Economy

Turbo Engine Vehicle

D

rivin g

1Turbo Engine Vehicle

The scheduled maintenance intervals for replacing the filter is indicated on the driver information interface. Follow the information on replacement timing.

2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 541

The temperature gauge pointer is at the mark when you restart the engine after driving under high load conditions such as at high speed or in hilly terrain. This is normal. The gauge goes down after you idle or drive the vehicle for about one minute.

H

Handling Precautions The turbocharger is a high-precision device to obtain greater horsepower by delivering a large volume of compressed air into the engine using a turbine driven by the engines exhaust gas pressure.

When the engine is cold just after starting, avoid revving the engine or sudden acceleration.

Always replace the engine oil and engine oil filter according to the Maintenance MinderTM. The turbine rotates at very high speeds over 100,000 rpm and its temperature reaches over 1,292F (700C). It is lubricated and cooled by engine oil. If you fail to replace the engine oil and filter at the scheduled distance or interval, deteriorated engine oil may cause failure such as sticking and abnormal noise of the turbine bearing.

535

536

lank.

This page intentionally left b

Maintenance

This chapter discusses basic maintenance.

Before Performing Maintenance Inspection and Maintenance ............ 538 Safety When Performing Maintenance..... 539 Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service ........................................... 540

Maintenance MinderTM ..................... 541 Maintenance Under the Hood

Maintenance Items Under the Hood..... 548 Opening the Hood ........................... 550 Recommended Engine Oil ................ 551 Oil Check......................................... 552 Adding Engine Oil ............................ 554 Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter ..... 555

Engine Coolant ................................ 559 Transmission Fluid............................ 561 Brake Fluid....................................... 562 Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 563

Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 564 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades .......................................... 572

Checking and Maintaining Tires Checking Tires ................................. 575 Tire and Loading Information Label ...... 576 Tire Labeling .................................... 576 DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles).......578 Wear Indicators................................ 580

Tire Service Life................................ 580 Tire and Wheel Replacement ........... 581 Tire Rotation.................................... 582 Winter Tires ..................................... 583

Battery............................................... 584 Remote Transmitter Care

Replacing the Remote Battery .......... 586 Climate Control System Maintenance ....587 Cleaning

Interior Care .................................... 588 Exterior Care.................................... 590

Accessories and Modifications ........ 593

537

538

M ain

ten an

ce

Before Performing Maintenance

1Inspection and Maintenance

Maintenance, replacement, or repair of emissions control devices and systems may be done by any automotive repair establishment or individuals using parts that are certified to EPA standards.

According to state and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on the maintenance main items marked with # will not void your emissions warranties. However, all maintenance services should be performed in accordance with the intervals indicated by the driver information interface.

2 Maintenance Service Items P. 545

If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a subscription to the Service Express website at www.techinfo.honda.com.

2 Authorized Manuals P. 644

If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first. After performing maintenance, update the records in the separate maintenance booklet.

U.S. models

Inspection and Maintenance For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. (Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in effect.)

Routine inspections Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when refueling.

2 Maintenance P. 28

Periodic inspections Check the brake fluid level monthly.

2 Brake Fluid P. 562

Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects. 2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 575

Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly. 2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 564

Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months. 2 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 572

Types of Inspection and Maintenance

uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance M

ain ten

an ce

1Safety When Performing Maintenance

3WARNING Improperly maintaining this vehicle or failing to correct a problem before driving can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspection and maintenance recommendations according to the schedules in this owners manual.

3WARNING Failure to properly follow maintenance instructions and precautions can cause you to be seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the procedures and precautions in this owners manual.

Safety When Performing Maintenance Some of the most important safety precautions are given here. However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether you should perform a given task.

To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames away from the battery and all fuel related parts.

Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood. u Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them, causing a fire.

To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not gasoline.

Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or compressed air.

Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you. u Only operate the engine if there is sufficient ventilation.

The vehicle must be in a stationary condition. u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and

the engine is off. Be aware that hot parts can burn you. u Make sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before

touching vehicle parts. Be aware that moving parts can injure you. u Do not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away

from moving parts.

u Do not open the hood while the Auto Idle Stop function is activated.

Maintenance Safety

Vehicle Safety

Models with Auto Idle Stop

539

540

uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service

M ain

ten an

ce

1Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service

Do not press the engine cover forcibly. This may damage the engine cover and component parts.

2.0 L engine models

Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service The use of Honda genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Honda genuine parts are manufactured according to the same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles.

Maintenance MinderTM

M

ain ten

an ce

If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages appear on the driver information interface every time you set the power mode to ON. The messages notify you when to change the engine oil, or when to bring your vehicle to a dealer for indicated maintenance services.

541

542

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

M ain

ten an

ce

1Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information

Based on the engine operating conditions, the remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed as a percentage.

There is a list of maintenance main and sub items you can view on the driver information interface.

2 Maintenance Service Items P. 545

Displayed Engine Oil Life (%)

Calculated Engine Oil Life (%)

100 100 to 91 90 90 to 81 80 80 to 71 70 70 to 61 60 60 to 51 50 50 to 41 40 40 to 31 30 30 to 21 20 20 to 16 15 15 to 11 10 10 to 6 5 5 to 1 0 0

To Use Maintenance MinderTM

Maintenance items, which should be serviced at the same time that you replace the engine oil, appear on the driver information interface. You can view them on the engine oil life screen at any time. 1. Set the power mode to ON. 2. Press the (home) button. 3. Roll the left selector wheel until is displayed. 4. Press the left selector wheel to go to the Maintenance Minder screen. The

engine oil life appears on the driver information interface along with maintenance items due soon.

Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information

(home) Button

Engine Oil Life

Main Item Sub ItemLeft Selector Wheel

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM M

ain ten

an ce

Maintenance Minder Messages on the Driver Information Interface

Maintenance Message Oil Life Display Explanation Information

-

When you select the Maintenance Minder screen, it displays codes for maintenance items due at the next engine oil change, along with the percentage of engine oil life remaining.

-

Maintenance Due Soon 15 % The engine oil life indicator starts to appear along with other due-soon maintenance item codes when the remaining oil life drops to 15 percent.

The engine oil is approaching the end of its service life.

543Continued

544

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

M ain

ten an

ce

is 5 to 1

e) r display.

The engine oil has almost reached the end of its service life, and the maintenance items should be inspected and serviced as soon as possible.

s service appears U.S. n nce on

The engine oil life has passed. The maintenance items must be inspected and serviced immediately.

Information

The system message indicator ( ) comes on along with the Maintenance Minder message.

Maintenance Due Now 5 % The remaining engine oil life

percent. Press the (hom button to switch to anothe

Maintenance Past Due Negative Distance The engine oil has passed it life, and a negative distance after driving over 10 miles ( models) or 10 km (Canadia models). The negative dista the display blinks.

Maintenance Message Oil Life Display Explanation

5 %

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM M

ain ten

an ce

1Maintenance Service Items

Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.

us areas at very low vehicle speeds results in higher transmission temperatures. ssion fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance rly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission fluid changed 0,000 km). der message does not appear more than 36 months after the display for item 7 is ke fluid every 3 years.

Maintenance Sub Items te tires ace air cleaner element*2

ace dust and pollen filter*3

ct drive belt ace transmission fluid*4

ace spark plugs ct valve clearance

ace engine coolant ace brake fluid*5

ariable transmission models

Maintenance Service Items

Maintenance Minder MessageSystem Message Indicator

Sub ItemsMain Item

U.S. models

*1: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first column on page 641.

*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). *3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and

from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

CODE Maintenance Main Items A Replace engine oil*1

B Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter Inspect front and rear brakes Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots Inspect suspension components Inspect driveshaft boots Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA) Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids Inspect exhaust system#

Inspect fuel lines and connections#

*4: Driving in mountaino This requires transmi Minder. If you regula every 25,000 miles (4

*5: If a Maintenance Min reset, change the bra

CODE 1 Rota 2 Repl

Repl Inspe

3 Repl 4 Repl

Inspe 5 Repl 7 Repl

Continuously v

545Continued

546

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

M ain

ten an

ce

1Maintenance Service Items

Adjust the valves during services A, 0, 9, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.

Maintenance Sub Items te tires ace air cleaner element*2

ace dust and pollen filter*3

ct drive belt ace transmission fluid*4

ace spark plugs ct valve clearance

ace engine coolant ace brake fluid*5

ce front and rear brakes ct tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots ct suspension components ct driveshaft boots ct brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA) ct all fluid levels and condition of fluids ct exhaust system #

ct fuel lines and connections #

Canadian models

*1: If a Maintenance Minder Message does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). *3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and

from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). *4:

Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds results in higher transmission temperatures. This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission fluid changed every 25,000 miles (40,000 km).

*5: If a Maintenance Minder Message does not appear more than 36 months after the display for item 7 is reset, change the brake fluid every 3 years.

# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first column on page 641.

CODE Maintenance Main Items A Replace engine oil*1

0 Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter

Continuously variable transmission models

CODE 1 Rota 2 Repl

Repl Inspe

3 Repl 4 Repl

Inspe 5 Repl 7 Repl 9 Servi

Inspe Inspe Inspe Inspe Inspe Inspe Inspe

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM M

ain ten

an ce

1Resetting the Display

NOTICE Failure to reset the Maintenance MinderTM display after a maintenance service results in the system showing incorrect maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious mechanical problems.

The dealer will reset the Maintenance MinderTM display after completing the required maintenance service. If someone other than a dealer performs maintenance service, reset the Maintenance MinderTM display yourself.

You can also reset the Maintenance MinderTM display using the audio/information screen.

2 Customized Features P. 351

Reset the maintenance minder information display if you have performed the maintenance service.

1. Set the power mode to ON. 2. Press the (home) button. 3. Roll the left selector wheel until is displayed. 4. Press the left selector wheel to go to the Maintenance Minder screen. 5. Press the left selector wheel to enter the reset mode. 6. Roll the left selector wheel select a maintenance item to reset, or to select All Due

Items (You can also select Cancel to end the process). 7. Press the left selector wheel to reset the selected item. 8. Repeat from step 5 for other items you wish to reset.

Resetting the Display

Left Selector Wheel

(home) Button

547

548

M ain

ten an

ce

Maintenance Under the Hood

Brake Fluid (Black Cap)

Battery

Maintenance Items Under the Hood 1.5 L engine models

Engine Coolant Reserve Tank

Radiator Cap

Washer Fluid (Blue Cap)

Engine Oil Dipstick (Orange)

Engine Oil Fill Cap

uuMaintenance Under the HooduMaintenance Items Under the Hood M

ain ten

an ce

Brake Fluid (Black Cap)

Battery

2.0 L engine models

Engine Oil Dipstick (Orange)

Washer Fluid (Blue Cap)

Engine Coolant Reserve Tank

Radiator Cap

Engine Oil Fill Cap

549

550

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood

M ain

ten an

ce

1Opening the Hood

NOTICE Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are raised. The hood will strike the wipers, resulting in possible damage to the hood and/or the wipers.

Do not press the engine cover forcibly. This may damage the engine cover and component parts.

When closing the hood, check that the hood is securely latched.

If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.

Do not open the hood while the Auto Idle Stop function is activated.

3WARNING The hood support rod can become very hot due to heat from the engine.

To ensure against possible burns, do not handle the metal section of the rod: Use the foam grip instead.

2.0 L engine models

Models with Auto Idle Stop

Opening the Hood 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set

the parking brake. 2. Pull the hood release handle under the

drivers side lower corner of the dashboard. u The hood will pop up slightly.

3. Push the hood latch lever (located under the front edge of the hood to the center) to the side and raise the hood. Once you have raised the hood slightly, you can release the lever.

4. Remove the support rod from the clamp using the grip. Mount the support rod in the hood.

When closing, remove the support rod, and stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the hood. Remove your hand at a height of approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the hood close.

Hood Release Handle

Pull

Lever

Support Rod

Grip

Clamp

uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil M

ain ten

an ce

1Recommended Engine Oil

Engine Oil Additives Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact, they may adversely affect the engine performance and durability.

Recommended Engine Oil

Oil is a major contributor to your engines performance and longevity. If you drive the vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil, the engine may fail or be damaged.

This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving and that it meets the American Petroleum Institutes latest requirements.

Use Honda Genuine Motor Oil or another commercial engine oil of suitable viscosity for the ambient temperature as shown.

Synthetic oil You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal and is the specified viscosity grade.

Honda Genuine Motor Oil Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil with an API Certification Seal on the

container.

Ambient Temperature

551

552

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check

M ain

ten an

ce

1Oil Check

If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly add oil, being careful not to overfill.

Oil Check We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel. Park the vehicle on level ground. Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check the oil.

1. Remove the dipstick (orange). 2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or

paper towel. 3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its

hole.

1.5 L engine models

2.0 L engine models

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check M

ain ten

an ce

1Oil Check

NOTICE Under certain driving conditions, it is normal for the engine oil level to rise above the upper mark. If you have a concern, consult a dealer for details.

4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the level. It should be between the upper and lower marks. Add oil if necessary.

1.5 L engine models

2.0 L engine models

Upper Mark

Lower Mark

Upper Mark

Lower Mark

553

554

uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil

M ain

ten an

ce

1Adding Engine Oil

NOTICE Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark. Overfilling the engine oil may result in leaks and engine damage.

If any oil spills, wipe it away immediately. Spilled oil may damage the engine compartment components.

Adding Engine Oil 1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap. 2. Add oil slowly. 3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten

it securely. 4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the

engine oil dipstick.

1.5 L engine models

2.0 L engine models

Engine Oil Fill Cap

Engine Oil Fill Cap

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter M

ain ten

an ce

1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

NOTICE You may damage the environment if you do not dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away into a garbage can or onto the ground.

Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the engines lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.

Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the driver information interface.

1. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature, and then turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil fill cap.

3. Remove the Phillips-head screws and slotted head screws by turning 90 counter-clockwise on the undercarriage and remove the under cover.

1.5 L engine models

2.0 L engine models

Under Cover

Screw

Under Cover

Screw

555Continued

556

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

M ain

ten an

ce

4. Remove the drain bolt and washer from the bottom of the engine, and drain the oil into a suitable container.

1.5 L engine models

2.0 L engine models

Drain Bolt

Washer

Drain Bolt

Washer

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter M

ain ten

an ce

5. Remove the slotted head screws by turning 90 counter-clockwise on the undercarriage and remove the under cover.

1.5 L engine models

2.0 L engine models

Under Cover

Screw

Under Cover

Screw

557Continued

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

558

M ain

ten an

ce

1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

You will need a special wrench to replace the oil filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.

When installing the new oil filter, follow the instructions supplied with the oil filter.

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. If the low oil pressure warning appears, turn off the engine, and check your work.

6. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the remaining oil.

7. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to the engine contact surface. u If it is stuck, you must detach it.

8. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the contact surface of the engine block, and install a new oil filter. u Apply a light coat of new engine oil to

the filter gasket. 9. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then

reinstall the drain bolt. u Tightening torque:

30 lbfft (40 Nm, 4.0 kgfm) 10. Pour the recommended engine oil into the

engine. u Engine oil change capacity (including

filter):

3.7 US qt (3.5 L)

5.0 US qt (4.8 L) 11. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and

start the engine. 12. Run the engine for a few minutes, and

then check that there is no leak from the drain bolt or oil filter.

13. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes, and then check the oil level on the dipstick. u If necessary, add more engine oil.

1.5 L engine models

2.0 L engine models

Oil Filter

Oil Filter 1.5 L engine models

2.0 L engine models

uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant M

ain ten

an ce

1Engine Coolant

NOTICE Genuine Honda engine coolant is a 50/50 mixture of antifreeze and water that can withstand freezing at temperatures as low as about -31F (-35C). If your vehicle is consistently subjected to temperatures below this, the concentration of antifreeze in the coolant should be increased. Consult a dealer for details.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may use another major brand of non-silicate coolant as a temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality coolant recommended for aluminum engines. Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.

Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your vehicles cooling system. They may not be compatible with the coolant or with the engine components.

3WARNING Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.

Engine Coolant

This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any straight antifreeze or water.

We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly.

1. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool.

2. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve tank. u If the coolant level is below the MIN

mark, add the specified coolant until it reaches the MAX mark.

3. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2

Reserve Tank

Reserve Tank

MAX MIN

559Continued

uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant

560

M ain

ten an

ce

1Radiator

NOTICE Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can damage components in the engine compartment.

1. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool.

2. Turn the radiator cap 1/8 turn counter- clockwise and relieve any pressure in the cooling system.

3. Push down and turn the radiator cap counter-clockwise to remove it.

4. The coolant level should be up to the base of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.

5. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it fully.

Radiator

Radiator Cap

uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid M

ain ten

an ce

1Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid*

NOTICE Do not mix Honda HCF-2 with other transmission fluids. Using a transmission fluid other than Honda HCF-2 may adversely affect the operation and durability of your vehicles transmission, and damage the transmission. Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that is not equivalent to Honda HCF-2 is not covered by Hondas new vehicle limited warranty.

1Automatic Transmission Fluid*

NOTICE Do not mix Honda ATF-Type 2.0 with other transmission fluids. Using a transmission fluid other than Honda ATF-Type 2.0 may adversely affect the operation and durability of your vehicles transmission, and damage the transmission. Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that is not equivalent to Honda ATF-Type 2.0 is not covered by Hondas new vehicle limited warranty.

Transmission Fluid

Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.

Do not attempt to check or change the continuously variable transmission fluid yourself.

Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.

Do not attempt to check or change the automatic transmission fluid yourself.

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid*

Specified fluid: Honda HCF-2

Automatic Transmission Fluid*

Specified fluid: Honda Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF-Type 2.0

561* Not available on all models

562

uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake Fluid

M ain

ten an

ce

1Brake Fluid

NOTICE Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your vehicles braking system and can cause extensive damage.

If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed container as a temporary replacement.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.

If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark, have a dealer inspect the vehicle for leaks or worn brake pads as soon as possible.

Brake Fluid

The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reserve tank.

Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

Checking the Brake Fluid

Reserve Tank

MIN

MAX

uuMaintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid M

ain ten

an ce

1Refilling Window Washer Fluid

NOTICE Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water solution in the windshield washer reservoir. Antifreeze can damage your vehicles paint. A vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield washer pump. Use only commercially available windshield washer fluid. Avoid prolonged use of hard water to prevent lime scale buildup.

Refilling Window Washer Fluid Check the amount of window washer fluid.

If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir.

If the washer fluid is low, a message appears on the driver information interface.

Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir.

Canadian models

All models

563

564

M ain

ten an

ce

Replacing Light Bulbs

1Headlight Bulbs

NOTICE Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to overheat and shatter.

The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry heavy items in the trunk or tow a trailer*, have the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician.

When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its base, and protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

Models with halogen high beam headlights

All models

Models with halogen high beam headlights

Headlight Bulbs When replacing, use the following bulbs.

High beam headlight: LED*

High beam headlight: 60 W (HB3 for halogen bulb type)*

Low beam headlight: LED

* Not available on all models

uuReplacing Light BulbsuHeadlight Bulbs M

ain ten

an ce

1High Beam Headlights

High beam headlights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

When removing the clip, insert a flat-tip screwdriver, then lift and remove the clip.

Insert the clip with the pin raised, and push until it is flat.

Models with LED high beam headlights

Push until the pin is flat.

1. Remove the hose and the holding clip using a flat-tip screwdriver, then remove the upper part of the window washer reserve tank. u Check the amount of window washer

fluid is below the upper part of the window washer reserve tank and remove it.

2. Push the tab to remove the coupler. 3. Rotate the old bulb counter-clockwise to

remove. 4. Insert a new bulb into the headlight

assembly and turn it clockwise. 5. Insert the coupler into the connector of the

bulb.

Low beam headlights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

High Beam Headlights Models with halogen high beam headlights

Holding clip

Hose

Passenger side

Tab Coupler

Bulb

Both sides

Low Beam Headlights

565

566

uuReplacing Light BulbsuFog Lights*

M ain

ten an

ce

Fog Lights*

Fog lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Parking/Daytime Running Lights Parking/daytime running lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Front Turn Signal Lights Front turn signal lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Front Side Marker Lights Front side marker lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights*

Door mirror side turn lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

* Not available on all models

uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake Lights, Taillights, Rear Side Marker Lights and Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs M

ain ten

an ce

1Brake Lights, Taillights, Rear Side Marker Lights and Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs

Brake and rear side marker/taillights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Brake Lights, Taillights, Rear Side Marker Lights and Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs When replacing, use the following bulbs.

1. Pry on the edge of the cover using a flat-tip screwdriver to remove the cover. u Wrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth

to prevent scratches. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Pull the light assembly out of the rear pillar.

Brake Light: LED Taillight: LED Rear Side Marker Light: LED Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W (Amber)

Cover

Bolts

567Continued

568

uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake Lights, Taillights, Rear Side Marker Lights and Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs

M ain

ten an

ce

4. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and remove it.

5. Push and turn the old bulb clockwise and remove it, and insert a new bulb.Bulb

Socket

uuReplacing Light BulbsuTaillight, Brake Light* and Back-Up Light Bulbs M

ain ten

an ce

1Taillight, Brake Light* and Back-Up Light Bulbs

Taillights and brake lights* are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

When removing the clip, insert a flat-tip screwdriver, then lift and remove the clip.

Insert the clip with the pin raised, and push until it is flat.

Clip

Push until the pin is flat.

Taillight, Brake Light* and Back-Up Light Bulbs When replacing, use the following bulbs.

1. Remove the holding clips using a flat-tip screwdriver, then pull the lining back.

2. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and remove it.

3. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.

Taillight: LED Brake Light*: LED Back-Up Light: 16 W

Holding Clip

Bulb Socket

Driver side

569Continued* Not available on all models

570

uuReplacing Light BulbsuTaillight, Brake Light* and Back-Up Light Bulbs

M ain

ten an

ce

2. Turn the socket clockwise and remove it. 3. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.

Bulb

Socket

Passenger side

uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear License Plate Light M

ain ten

an ce

Rear License Plate Light Rear license plate light is LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

High-Mount Brake Light High-mount brake light is LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

571

572

M ain

ten an

ce

Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades

1Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber

NOTICE Avoid dropping the wiper arm onto the windshield, it may damage the wiper arm and/or the windshield.

Checking Wiper Blades If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks, become noisy, and the hard surfaces of the blade may scratch the window glass.

Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber 1. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF. 2. While holding the wiper switch in the

MIST position, set the power mode to ON, then to VEHICLE OFF. u Both wiper arms are set to the

maintenance position as shown in the image.

3. Lift the driver side wiper arm first, then the passenger side.

uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Wiper Blade Rubber M

ain ten

an ce

4. Press up on and hold the tab, then slide the holder off the wiper arm.

5. Pull the end of the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow in the image until it is out of the holders end cap.

6. Pull the wiper blade in the opposite direction to slide it out of the holder.

Tab

Holder

Wiper Arm

Wiper Blade

End cap at the bottom

Wiper Blade

Holder

573Continued

574

uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Wiper Blade Rubber

M ain

ten an

ce

7. Insert the flat side of the new wiper blade onto the bottom part of the holder. Insert the blade all the way.

8. Install the end of the wiper blade into the cap.

9. Slide the holder onto the wiper arm until it locks.

10. Lower the passenger side wiper arm first, then the driver side.

11. Set the power mode to ON and hold the wiper switch in the MIST position until both wiper arms return to the standard position.

Holder

Wiper Blade

Cap

Checking and Maintaining Tires

M

ain ten

an ce

1Checking Tires

Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This means the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If necessary, add or release air until the specified pressure is reached.

If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as 46 psi (3040 kPa, 0.30.4 kgf/cm2) higher than if checked when cold.

Whenever tire pressure is adjusted, you must calibrate the TPMS.

2 TPMS Calibration P. 446

Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent vibration while driving. New tires and any that have been removed and reinstalled should be properly balanced.

Check the spare tire pressure once a month or before long trips.

3WARNING Using tires that are excessively worn or improperly inflated can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owners manual regarding tire inflation and maintenance.

Checking Tires To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.

Inflation guidelines Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort. Refer to the drivers doorjamb label or specifications page for the specified pressure.

Under inflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from overheating.

Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards, and wear unevenly.

Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.

At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in all tires, including the spare. Even tires in good condition can lose 12 psi (1020 kPa, 0.10.2 kgf/cm2) per month.

Inspection guidelines Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems. Look for: Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts,

splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord. Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks. Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment. Excessive tread wear.

2 Wear Indicators P. 580

Cracks or other damage around valve stem.

575

576

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label

M ain

ten an

ce

1Tire and Loading Information Label

The tire and loading information label attached to the drivers doorjamb contains: a The number of people your vehicle can carry. b The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not

exceed this weight. c The original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare. d The proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and

spare.

1Tire Sizes

Following is an example of tire size with an explanation of what each component means. P235/60 R18 102T P: Vehicle type (P indicates passenger vehicle). 235: Tire width in millimeters. 60: Aspect ratio (the tires section height as a percentage of its width). R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial). 18: Rim diameter in inches. 102: Load index (a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can carry). T: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the maximum speed rating).

Tire and Loading Information Label The label attached to the drivers doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading information.

Tire Labeling The tires that came on your vehicle have a number of markings. Those you should be aware of are described as shown.

Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.

Label Example

Example Tire Size Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Maximum Tire Load

Maximum Tire Pressure

Tire Size

Tire Sizes

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling M

ain ten

an ce

1Tire Identification Number (TIN)

DOT B97R FW6X 2209 DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. B97R: Manufacturers identification mark. FW6X: Tire type code. 22 09: Date of manufacture.

Year Week

The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.

Cold Tire Pressure The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Load Rating Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure. Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can hold. Maximum Load Rating Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire. Recommended Inflation Pressure The cold tire inflation pressure recommended by the manufacturer. Treadwear Indicators (TWI) Means the projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Glossary of Tire Terminology

577

578

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

M ain

ten an

ce

1Uniform Tire Quality Grading

For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles) The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction, and temperature performance according to Department of Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these gradings.

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles) M

ain ten

an ce

1Traction

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

1Temperature

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Traction

Temperature

579

580

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators

M ain

ten an

ce

1Checking Tires

High speed driving We recommend that you do not drive faster than the posted speed limits and conditions allow. If you drive at sustained high speeds (over 99 mph or 160 km/h), adjust the cold tire pressures as shown below to avoid excessive heat buildup and sudden tire failure.

Tire Size 225/50R17 94V Pressure Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2)

Rear: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)

Tire Size 235/40R19 96V Pressure Front: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2)

Rear: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2)

Models with 225/50R17 tires

Models with 235/40R19 tires

Wear Indicators The groove where the wear indicator is located is about 1/16 inch (about 1.6 mm) shallower than elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire. Worn out tires have poor traction on wet roads.

Tire Service Life The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).

In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five years old. All tires, including the spare, should be removed from service after 10 years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.

Example of a Wear Indicator mark

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement M

ain ten

an ce

1Tire and Wheel Replacement

3WARNING Installing improper tires on your vehicle can affect handling and stability. This can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Always use the size and type of tires recommended in this owners manual.

Tire and Wheel Replacement Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tires sidewall). Using tires of a different size or construction can cause certain vehicle systems such as the ABS and Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) system to work incorrectly.

It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isnt possible, replace the front or rear tires in pairs.

Make sure that the wheels specifications match those of the original wheels.

581

582

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation

M ain

ten an

ce

1Tire Rotation

Tires with directional tread patterns should only be rotated front to back (not from one side to the other). Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation indication mark facing forward, as shown below.

Whenever tires are rotated, you must calibrate the TPMS.

2 TPMS Calibration P. 446

Front

Direction Mark

Tire Rotation Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the driver information interface helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life.

Tires without rotation marks Rotate the tires as shown here.

Tires with rotation marks Rotate the tires as shown here.

Front

Front

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires M

ain ten

an ce

1Winter Tires

NOTICE Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly installed can damage your vehicles brake lines, suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are hitting any part of the vehicle.

When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain manufacturers instructions regarding vehicle operational limits.

If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be aware that these tires are not designed for winter driving conditions. For more information, contact a dealer.

3WARNING Using the wrong chains, or not properly installing chains, can damage the brake lines and cause a crash in which you can be seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owners manual regarding the selection and use of tire chains.

Winter Tires If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked M+S tires, snow tires, or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when driving.

Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent skidding.

Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law.

When mounting, refer to the following points.

For winter tires: Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires. Mount the tires to all four wheels. For tire chains: Install them on the front tires only. Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the

chains listed below:

Follow the chain manufacturers instruction when installing. Mount them as tightly as you can.

Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension. Drive slowly.

Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1036

Not recommended to use any type of chains

Models with 225/50R17 tires

Models with 235/40R19 tires

583

584

M ain

ten an

ce

Battery

1Battery

WARNING: Battery post, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling.

When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals by applying a baking powder and water solution. Clean the terminals with a damp towel. Cloth/towel dry the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to help prevent future corrosion.

3WARNING The battery gives off explosive hydrogen gas during normal operation.

A spark or flame can cause the battery to explode with enough force to kill or seriously hurt you.

When conducting any battery maintenance, wear protective clothing and a face shield, or have a skilled technician do it.

Checking the Battery The condition of the battery is monitored by a sensor located on the negative terminal of the battery. If there is a problem with this sensor, the driver information interface will display a warning message. If this happens, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

Check the battery terminals for corrosion monthly.

If your vehicles battery is disconnected or goes dead: The audio system is disabled.

2 Reactivating the audio system P. 249

The clock resets. 2 Clock P. 166

The immobilizer system needs to be reset. 2 Immobilizer System Indicator P. 98

Models without navigation system

Canadian models

uuBatteryuCharging the Battery M

ain ten

an ce

1Charging the Battery

When replacing the battery, the replacement must be of the same specifications. Consult a dealer for more information.

The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) OFF, adaptive cruise control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, safety support and low tire pressure/TPMS indicators may come on in amber along with a message in the driver information interface when you set the power mode to ON after reconnecting the battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

The battery installed in this vehicle is specifically designed for a model with Auto Idle Stop. Using a battery other than this specified type may shorten the battery life, and prevent Auto Idle Stop from activating. If you need to replace the battery, make sure to select the specified type and size. Ask a dealer for more details.

Models with Auto Idle Stop

Charging the Battery Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicles electrical system. Always disconnect the negative () cable first, and reconnect it last.

585

586

M ain

ten an

ce

Remote Transmitter Care

1Replacing the Remote Battery

NOTICE An improperly disposed of battery can damage the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal.

Replacement batteries are commercially available or at a dealer.

3WARNING CHEMICAL BURN HAZARD The battery that powers the remote transmitter can cause severe internal burns and can even lead to death if swallowed. Keep new and used batteries away from children. If you suspect that a child has swallowed the battery, seek medical attention immediately.

Replacing the Remote Battery If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery.

1. Remove the built-in key.

2. Remove the upper half of the cover by carefully prying on the edge with a coin. u Wrap a coin with a cloth to prevent

scratching the keyless remote. u Remove carefully to avoid losing the

buttons. 3. Make sure to replace the battery with the

correct polarity.

Battery type: CR2032

Battery

Climate Control System Maintenance

M

ain ten

an ce

1Air Conditioning

NOTICE Vented refrigerant is harmful to the environment. To avoid refrigerant from venting, never replace the evaporator with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle.

Refrigerant in your vehicles air conditioning system is flammable and can be ignited during servicing if proper procedures are not followed.

The air conditioner label is found under the hood: 2 Safety Labels P. 79 2 Specifications P. 632, 634

Canadian models

: Caution

: Flammable Refrigerant

: Requires Registered Technician to Service

: Air Conditioning System

1Dust and Pollen Filter

If the airflow from the climate control system deteriorates noticeably, and the windows fog up easily, the filter may need to be replaced. Please contact a dealer for replacement.

Air Conditioning To ensure proper and safe operation, the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE J2845) recommends that the refrigerant system only be serviced by trained and certified technicians.

Never repair or replace the air conditioning evaporator (cooling coil) with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle.

New replacement mobile air conditioning evaporators must be certified (and labeled) as meeting SAE Standard J2842.

Dust and Pollen Filter The climate control system is equipped with a dust and pollen filter that collects pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The Maintenance MinderTM messages will let you know when to replace the filter.

We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.

587

588

M ain

ten an

ce

Cleaning

1Interior Care

Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle. Electrical devices and systems may malfunction if liquids are splashed on them.

Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices such as audio devices and switches. Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or cause a fire inside the vehicle. If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on electrical devices, consult a dealer.

Depending on their composition, chemicals and liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles, and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles. Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as benzene or gasoline.

After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them away using a dry cloth. Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts or textiles for long periods of time without washing.

1Cleaning the Window

Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window. Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a soft cloth so as not to damage them.

Be careful not to spill fluids, such as water or glass cleaner, on or around the cover of both the front sensor camera and the rainfall/light sensor*.

Interior Care Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt. Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.

Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts. Let the belts air dry. Wipe the openings of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.

Wipe using a glass cleaner.

Cleaning Seat Belts

Opening

Cleaning the Window

* Not available on all models

uuCleaninguInterior Care M

ain ten

an ce

1Floor Mats

If you use any floor mats that were not originally provided with your vehicle, make sure they are designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and are securely anchored by the floor anchors. Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere with the front seat functions.

1Maintaining Genuine Leather

It is important to clean or wipe away dirt or dust as soon as possible. Spills can soak into leather resulting in stains. Dirt or dust can cause abrasions in the leather. In addition, please note that some dark colored clothing can rub onto the leather seats resulting in discoloration or stains.

The drivers floor mat hooks over floor anchors, which keep them from sliding forward. To remove a mat for cleaning, turn the anchor knobs to the unlock position. When reinstalling the mat after cleaning, turn the knobs to the lock position.

Do not put additional floor mats on top of the anchored mat.

To properly clean leather: 1. Use a vacuum or soft dry cloth first to remove any dirt or dust. 2. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a solution comprised of 90%

water and 10% neutral soap. 3. Wipe away any soap residue with a clean damp cloth. 4. Wipe away residual water and allow leather to air dry in the shade.

Floor Mats

Lock

Unlock

Maintaining Genuine Leather

589

590

uuCleaninguExterior Care

M ain

ten an

ce

1Washing the Vehicle

Do not spray water into the air intake vents. It can cause a malfunction.

Do not spray water onto the fuel fill door directly. A high-pressure spray may cause it to open.

Do not spray water onto the capless unit when the fuel fill door is open. It can cause damage to the fuel system or engine.

If you need to lift the wiper arms away from the windshield, first set the wiper arms to the maintenance position.

2 Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber P. 572

Air Intake Vents

1Using an Automated Car Wash

When using an automated car wash that pulls the vehicle through with a conveyor, make sure the transmission in (N position.

2 If you want to keep the transmission in (N position [car wash mode] P. 423

Automatic transmission models

Exterior Care Dust off the vehicle body after you drive. Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.

Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following conditions: If driving on roads with road salt. If driving in coastal areas. If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.

Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the automated car wash. Fold in the door mirrors. For models equipped with automatic intermittent wipers, turn the wipers off.

Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body. Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to

enter the vehicle interior. Do not spray high pressure water directly into the engine compartment. Instead,

use low pressure water and a mild detergent.

Washing the Vehicle

Using an Automated Car Wash

Using High Pressure Cleaners

uuCleaninguExterior Care M

ain ten

an ce

1Applying Wax

NOTICE Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe away spills immediately.

1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts

Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when you want to repair the painted surface of the parts made of resin.

A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicles paint from the elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicles paint to the elements, so reapply as necessary.

If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and clean water.

Wipe using a glass cleaner.

Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road contaminants. When necessary, as early as possible use a sponge and mild detergent to wipe away these contaminants. Do not use a stiff brush or harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners). These can damage the protective finish on aluminum alloy wheels, resulting in corrosion. Depending on the type of finish, the wheels also may lose their luster or appear burnished. To avoid water stains, wipe the wheels dry with a cloth while they are still wet.

Applying Wax

Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts

Cleaning the Window

Maintaining Aluminum Wheels

Continued 591

592

uuCleaninguExterior Care

M ain

ten an

ce

The inside lenses of exterior lights (headlights, brake lights, etc.) may fog temporarily if you have driven in the rain, or after the vehicle has been run through a car wash. Dew condensation also may build up inside the lenses when there is a significant enough difference between the ambient and inside lens temperatures (similar to vehicle windows fogging up in rainy conditions). These conditions are natural processes, not structural design problems in the exterior lights.

Lens design characteristics may result in moisture developing on the light lens frame surfaces. This also is not a malfunction.

However, if you see large amounts of water accumulation, or large water drops building up inside the lenses, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

Fogged Exterior Light Lenses

Accessories and Modifications

M

ain ten

an ce

1Accessories and Modifications

Honda Genuine accessories are recommended to ensure proper operation on your vehicle.

3WARNING Improper accessories or modifications can affect your vehicles handling, stability, and performance, and cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owners manual regarding accessories and modifications.

Accessories When installing accessories, check the following: Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and

delay your reaction to driving conditions. Do not install any accessories over areas marked SRS AIRBAG, on the sides or

backs of the front seats, on front or side pillars, or near the side windows. Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the vehicles airbags or may be propelled into you or another occupant if the airbags deploy.

Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with proper operation of your vehicle.

2 Fuses P. 620

Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.

593

594

uuAccessories and ModificationsuModifications

M ain

ten an

ce

Modifications Do not modify your vehicle in a manner that may affect its handling, stability, or reliability, or install non-genuine Honda parts or accessories that may have a similar effect.

Even minor modifications to vehicle systems can affect overall vehicle performance. Always make sure all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and do not make any modification to your vehicle or its systems that might cause your vehicle to no longer meet federal, state, province, territory, and local regulations.

The on-board diagnostic port (OBD-II/SAE J1962 connector) installed on this vehicle is intended to be used with automobile system diagnostic devices or with other devices that Honda has approved. Use of any other type of device may adversely affect the vehicles electronic systems or allow them to be compromised, possibly resulting in a system malfunction, drained battery, or other unexpected problems.

Do not modify or attempt to repair any of the electrical components.

Handling the Unexpected

This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.

Tools Types of Tools .................................. 596

If a Tire Goes Flat Changing a Flat Tire ......................... 597

Engine Does Not Start Checking the Engine........................ 603 If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak ....604 Emergency Engine Stop ................... 605

If the Battery Is Dead ....................... 606 Shift Lever Does Not Move .............. 609 Overheating

How to Handle Overheating............. 611

Indicator, Coming On/Blinking If the Low Oil Pressure Warning Appears ...613 If the Charging System Indicator Comes On ................................................. 613

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks ................................... 614

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks ................................... 615

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On.... 616

If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On ....................... 617

If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks ....................... 618

If the Transmission System Indicator Blinks along with the Warning Message... 619

Fuses Fuse Locations ................................. 620 Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 625

Emergency Towing........................... 626 If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door ....627 If You Cannot Open the Trunk ........... 628 Refueling........................................... 630

595

596

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

Tools

1Types of Tools

The tools are stored in the trunk.

Types of Tools

Wheel Nut Wrench/ Jack Handle

FunnelJack Handle Bar

Tool Case Jack

If a Tire Goes Flat

H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

1Changing a Flat Tire

Follow these compact spare precautions: Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact spare. It should be set to the specified pressure. Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)

When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with a full-size tire as soon as possible.

The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are specifically for this model. Do not use them with another vehicle. Do not use another type of compact spare tire or wheel with your vehicle.

Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire. If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it with the full-size tire that was removed from the rear. Mount the tire chains on the front tire.

NOTICE Do not use the jack if it doesnt work properly. Call your dealer or a professional towing service.

Do not mount the compact spare on the front. If either front tire goes flat, remove the rear tire on the same side, and mount the compact spare on the rear and the rear tire on the front.

Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a compact spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full-size tire repaired or replaced.

1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level, and non-slippery surface, and apply the parking brake.

2. Put the transmission into (P . 3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.

597Continued

598

uu If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

1. Open the trunk floor lid.

2. Take the tool case out of the trunk. 3. Take the jack, wheel nut wrench and jack

handle bar out of the tool case. 4. Unscrew the wing bolt, and remove the

spacer cone. Then, remove the spare tire.

5. Place a wheel block or rock in the front and rear of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.

Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire

Tool Case

Spare Tire

Wheel Blocks

The tire to be replaced.

uu If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

6. Place the compact spare tire (wheel side up) under the vehicle body, near the tire that needs to be replaced.

7. Loosen each wheel nut about one turn using the wheel nut wrench.

599Continued

uu If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

600

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

1How to Set Up the Jack

Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the vehicle.

Use the jack provided in your vehicle. Other jacks may not support the weight (load) or may not fit the jacking point.

The following instructions must be followed to use the jack safely: Do not use while the engine is running. Use only where the ground is firm and level. Use only at the jacking points. Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack. Do not put anything on top of or underneath the

jack.

3WARNING The vehicle can easily roll off the jack, seriously injuring anyone underneath.

Follow the directions for changing a tire exactly, and never get under the vehicle when it is supported only by the jack.

1. Place the jack under the jacking point closest to the tire to be changed.

2. Turn the end bracket clockwise (as shown in the image) until the top of the jack contacts the jacking point. u Make sure that the jacking point tab is

resting in the jack notch.

3. Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar and the jack handle, until the tire is off the ground.

How to Set Up the Jack

Jacking Points

Jacking Point

Jack Handle Bar

Wheel Nut Wrench as Jack Handle

uu If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

1Replacing the Flat Tire

Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra torque using your foot or a pipe.

1. Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire.

2. Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel with a clean cloth.

3. Mount the compact spare tire. 4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch the

lips around the mounting holes, then stop rotating.

5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack. Tighten the wheel nuts in the order indicated in the image. Go around, tightening the nuts, two to three times in this order. Wheel nut torque: 80 lbfft (108 Nm, 11 kgfm)

Replacing the Flat Tire

Continued 601

uu If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

602

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

1Storing the Flat Tire

3WARNING Loose items can fly around the interior in a crash and can seriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely before driving.

1. Remove the center cap.

2. Place the flat tire face down in the spare tire well.

3. Remove the spacer cone from the wing bolt, flip it over, and insert it back on the bolt. Secure the flat tire with the wing bolt.

4. Securely put the jack and wheel nut wrench back in the tool case. Store the case in the trunk.

If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), Tire Pressure Monitor System Problem. Check Tire Pressure. See Your Dealer. will appear on the driver information interface and the indicator will start blinking for a short time and then stay on; however, this is normal and is no cause for concern.

Calibrate the TPMS when you replace the tire with a specified regular tire. 2 TPMS Calibration P. 446

Storing the Flat Tire

Center Cap

Spacer Cone Wing Bolt

For compact spare tire

For full-size tire

TPMS and the Compact Spare Tire

Engine Does Not Start

H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

cklist ion interface. tton message appears 604 g range. ange P. 191

ess. at all

e again. 2 Starting the Engine P. 412

g, the engine cannot be started.

Gauge P. 139

dealer.

1Checking the Engine

If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an assisting vehicle or booster battery to jump start it.

2 If the Battery Is Dead P. 606

Checking the Engine If the engine does not start, check the starter.

Starter condition Che Starter doesnt turn or turns over slowly. The battery may be dead. Check each of the items on the right and respond accordingly.

Check for a message on the driver informat If the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Bu

2 If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak P. uMake sure the keyless remote is in its operatin

2 ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating R Check brightness of the interior lights. Turn on the interior lights and check the brightn If the interior lights are dim or do not come on

2 Battery P. 584 If the interior lights come on normally

2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 625

The starter turns over normally but the engine doesnt start. There may be a problem with a fuse. Check each of the items on the right and respond accordingly.

Review the engine start procedure. Follow its instructions, and try to start the engin Check the immobilizer system indicator. When the immobilizer system indicator is blinkin

2 Immobilizer System P. 184

Check the fuel level. There should be enough fuel in the tank. 2 Fuel

Check the fuses. Check all fuses, or have the vehicle checked by a

2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 625

If the problem continues: 2 Emergency Towing P. 626

603

604

uuEngine Does Not StartuIf the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak If the beeper sounds, the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message appears on the driver information interface, and the ENGINE START/STOP button flashes, and the engine wont start, start the engine as follows:

1. Touch the center of the ENGINE START/ STOP button with the H logo on the keyless remote while the ENGINE START/STOP button is flashing. The buttons on the keyless remote should be facing you. u The ENGINE START/STOP button

flashes for about 30 seconds.

2. Depress the brake pedal and press the ENGINE START/STOP button within 10 seconds after the beeper sounds and the ENGINE START/STOP button changes from flashing to on. u If you dont depress the pedal, the mode

will change to ACCESSORY.

uuEngine Does Not StartuEmergency Engine Stop H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

1Emergency Engine Stop

Do not press the ENGINE START/STOP button while driving unless it is absolutely necessary for the engine to be turned off. If you press the ENGINE START/STOP button while driving, the beeper sounds.

Emergency Engine Stop The ENGINE START/STOP button may be used to stop the engine due to an emergency situation even while driving. If you must stop the engine, do either of the following operations: Press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for about two seconds. Firmly press the ENGINE START/STOP button three times.

The steering wheel will not lock. However, because turning off the engine disables the power assist the engine provides to the steering and braking systems, it will require significantly more physical effort and time to steer and slow the vehicle. Use both feet on the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle and stop immediately in a safe place.

The transmission automatically changes to (P after the vehicle comes to a complete stop. Then, the power mode changes to VEHICLE OFF.

The power mode is in ACCESSORY when the engine is stopped. To change the mode to VEHICLE OFF, put the transmission into (P after the vehicle comes to a complete stop.

Then, press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice without depressing the brake pedal.

Automatic transmission models

Continuously variable transmission models

Continuously variable transmission models for Canadian models

605

606

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

If the Battery Is Dead

1If the Battery Is Dead

Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they do not come off when the engine vibrates. Be careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the cable ends to touch each other while attaching or detaching the jumper cables.

3WARNING A battery can explode if you do not follow the correct procedure, seriously injuring anyone nearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking materials away from the battery.

Jump Starting Procedure Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the engine, then open the hood.

1. Open the cover on the positive + terminal. 2. Connect the first jumper cable to your

vehicles battery + terminal. 3. Connect the other end of the first jumper

cable to the booster battery + terminal. u Use a 12-volt booster battery only. u When using an automotive battery

charger to boost your 12-volt battery, select a lower charging voltage than 15-volt. Check the charger manual for the proper setting.

4. Connect the second jumper cable to the booster battery - terminal.

Booster Battery

1.5 L engine models

2.0 L engine models

Booster Battery

uuIf the Battery Is DeaduJump Starting Procedure H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

1If the Battery Is Dead

Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and may prevent the engine from starting.

5. Connect the other end of the second jumper cable to the engine mounting bolt as shown. Do not connect this jumper cable to any other part.

6. If your vehicle is connected to another vehicle, start the assisting vehicles engine and increase its rpm slightly.

7. Attempt to start your vehicles engine. If it turns over slowly, check that the jumper cables have good metal-to-metal contact.

1.5 L engine models

2.0 L engine models

Engine Mounting Bolt

Engine Mounting Bolt

Continued 607

uu If the Battery Is DeaduJump Starting Procedure

608

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

1What to Do After the Engine Starts

The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) OFF, adaptive cruise control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, safety support and low tire pressure/TPMS indicators may come on in amber along with a message in the driver information interface when you set the power mode to ON after reconnecting the battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Once your vehicles engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following order.

1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicles ground. 2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery -

terminal. 3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicles battery + terminal. 4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery +

terminal.

Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.

What to Do After the Engine Starts

Shift Lever Does Not Move

H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the (P position.

1. Set the parking brake. 2. Remove the built-in key from the keyless

remote. 3. Open the center pocket.

2 Center Pocket P. 225

4. Remove the cover in the center pocket.

5. Wrap a cloth around the tip of the built-in key. Put it into the shift lock release slot (as shown in the image) and remove the cover.

Releasing the Lock

Continuously variable transmission models

Models without wireless charger

Cover

Models without wireless charger

Slot

Cover

All models

609Continued

610

uuShift Lever Does Not Moveu

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

6. Insert the key into the shift lock release slot. 7. While pushing the key down, press the shift

lever release button, and place the shift lever into (N. u The lock is now released. Have the shift

lever checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

Release Button Shift Lock Release Slot

Overheating

H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

1How to Handle Overheating

NOTICE Continuing to drive with the temperature gauge pointer at the mark may damage the engine.

Continuing to drive with the Engine Temperature Too Hot. Do Not Drive. Allow Engine To Cool. message on the driver information interface may damage the engine.

3WARNING Steam and spray from an overheated engine can seriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.

H

How to Handle Overheating Overheating symptoms are as follows: The temperature gauge pointer is at the mark or the engine suddenly loses

power. The Engine Temperature Too Hot. Do Not Drive. Allow Engine To Cool.

message appears on the driver information interface. Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment.

First thing to do 1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place. 2. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights. u No steam or spray present: Keep the engine running and open the hood. u Steam or spray is present: Turn off the engine and wait until it subsides.

Then, open the hood.

H

611Continued

uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating

612

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

1How to Handle Overheating

If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.

Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only. Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze as soon as possible.

3WARNING Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.

Next thing to do 1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and

stop the engine once the temperature gauge pointer comes down. u If the cooling fan is not operating,

immediately stop the engine. 2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect

the coolant level and check the cooling system components for leaks. u If the coolant level in the reserve tank is

low, add coolant until it reaches the MAX mark.

u If there is no coolant in the reserve tank, check that the radiator is cool. Cover the radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to the base of the filler neck, and put the cap back on.

Last thing to do Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it and check the temperature gauge. If the temperature gauge pointer has come down, resume driving. If it has not come down, contact a dealer for repairs.

MAX

Reserve Tank

MIN

Indicator, Coming On/Blinking

H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

1If the Low Oil Pressure Warning Appears

NOTICE Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause serious mechanical damage almost immediately.

1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On

If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge the battery.

If the Low Oil Pressure Warning Appears Reasons for the warning to appear Appears when the engine oil pressure is low. What to do as soon as the warning

appears 1. Immediately park the vehicle on level

ground in a safe place. 2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights

on. What to do after parking the vehicle 1. Stop the engine and let it sit for

approximately three minutes. 2. Open the hood and check the oil level. u Add oil as necessary.

2 Oil Check P. 552

3. Start the engine and check the low oil pressure warning. u The warning disappears: Start driving

again. u The warning does not disappear within

10 seconds: Immediately stop the engine and contact a dealer for repairs.

If the Charging System Indicator Comes On Reasons for the indicator to come on Comes on when there is a problem with the charging system. What to do when the indicator comes on Stop in a safe place and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

613

614

uu Indicator, Coming On/Blinkingu If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks

NOTICE If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on, the emissions control system and the engine could be damaged.

If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at 31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle inspected.

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks

Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink Comes on when there is a problem with the engine emissions control

system. Blinks when engine misfiring is detected. What to do when the indicator lamp comes on Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a dealer. What to do when the indicator lamp blinks Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least 10 minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.

uu Indicator, Coming On/Blinkingu If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks

Have your vehicle repaired immediately. It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop immediately in a safe place. If necessary, downshift the gears.

If the brake system indicator (red) and ABS indicator come on simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution system is not working. This can result in vehicle instability under sudden braking. Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.

If the brake system indicator (red) blinks at the same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on, the parking brake may not work. Avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On P. 616

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks

Reasons for the indicator to come on The brake fluid is low. There is a malfunction in the brake system. What to do when the indicator comes on while driving Depress the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure. If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop. If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the

transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking. Reasons for the indicator to blink There is a problem with the electric parking brake system. What to do when the indicator blinks Avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

U.S.

Canada

(Red)

615

616

uu Indicator, Coming On/Blinkingu If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

1 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On

If you apply the parking brake, you may not be able to release it.

If the brake system indicator (red) and the brake system indicator (amber) come on at the same time, the parking brake is working.

If the brake system indicator (red) blinks at the same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on, the parking brake may not work because it is checking the system.

If you repeatedly operate the electric parking brake in a short period of time, the brake stops operating to prevent heating of the system and the indicator blinks. It returns to its original state in approximately 1 minute.

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On

If the brake system indicator (red) comes on or blinks at the same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on, release the parking brake manually or automatically. 2 Parking Brake P. 508

If the brake system indicator (red) continuously comes on or blinks at the same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe place and have it inspected by a dealer immediately. u Preventing the vehicle from moving, put the transmission into (P .

If only the brake system indicator (red) is turned off, avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

U.S.

Canada

(Red)

U.S.

Canada

(Amber)

uu Indicator, Coming On/Blinkingu If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On

Reasons for the indicator to come on Comes on when there is a problem with the EPS system. What to do when the indicator comes on Stop the vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine. If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

617

618

uu Indicator, Coming On/Blinkingu If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

1If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks

NOTICE Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always inflate your tires to the prescribed level.

If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks

Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink A tire pressure is significantly low, or the TPMS has not been calibrated. If there is a problem with the TPMS, the indicator blinks for about one minute, and then stays on. If the compact spare tire is installed, the indicator will either come on or it will first blink for about one minute, then stay on. What to do when the indicator comes on Drive carefully and avoid abrupt cornering and hard braking. Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on the driver side doorjamb. u Calibrate the TPMS after the tire pressure is adjusted.

2 TPMS Calibration P. 446

If the compact spare tire causes the indicator to come on, change the tire to a full-size tire. The indicator goes off after calibrating the TPMS. What to do when the indicator blinks, then remains on Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact spare tire causes the indicator to first blink, and then stay on, change the tire to a full-size tire. The indicator goes off after calibrating the TPMS.

2 TPMS Calibration P. 446

uu Indicator, Coming On/Blinkingu If the Transmission System Indicator Blinks along with the Warning Message H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

1If the Transmission System Indicator Blinks along with the Warning Message

You may not be able to start the engine.

Make sure to set the parking brake when parking your vehicle.

Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.

2 Emergency Towing P. 626

If the Transmission System Indicator Blinks along with the Warning Message

Reasons for the indicator to blink The transmission is malfunctioning.

What to do when the indicator blinks Immediately have your vehicle inspected by

a dealer. Put the transmission into (N after starting

the engine. u Check if the (N position on the driver

information interface and the indicator on the (N button light/blink.

2 Starting the Engine P. 412

Automatic transmission models

619

620

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

Fuses

Fuse Locations If any electrical devices are not working, set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF and check to see if any applicable fuse is blown.

Located near the battery. Push the tabs to open the box. Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box cover. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and box cover number.

Engine Compartment Fuse Box

Tab

uuFusesuFuse Locations H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

Circuit protected and fuse rating

Circuit Protected Amps 1 BATTERY 125 A

2

(70 A) EPS 70 A (30 A)

FUSE BOX MAIN 2 60 A EBB 40 A

ABS/VSA FSR 40 A (30 A)

IG MAIN1 30 A

3

REAR DEFROSTER 40 A FUSE BOX MAIN 1 60 A

(30 A) HEATER MOTOR 40 A

(40 A) ST MG 30 A

SUB FAN MOTOR 30 A VST1* (30 A)

4

VST2* (30 A) FUSE BOX OP 2* (70 A)

(40 A) FUSE BOX OP 1 60 A

* Not available on all models

5

(40 A) MAIN FAN MOTOR 30 A

SPM2 30 A ABS/VSA MOTOR 40 A

IG MAIN2 30 A WIPER MOTOR 30 A

6 SRM1 30 A 7 8 9 STOP LIGHT 10 A

10 TCU (15 A) 11 INJ 20 A 12 TCU2* (10 A) 13 IGP 15 A 14 TCU3* (10 A) 15 FI ECU 10 A 16 BATT SNSR 7.5 A 17 DBW 15 A 18 IG COIL 15 A 19 HAZARD 15 A 20 21 22 H/STRG* (10 A) 23 24 AUDIO 15 A 25 REAR H/SEAT* (20 A) 26 FR WIPER DEICER* (15 A)

Circuit Protected Amps

27 BACK UP 10 A 28 HORN 10 A 29 FR FOG LIGHT* (10 A) 30 SHUTTER GRILLE* (7.5 A) 31 MG CLUTCH 10 A 32 WASHER MOTOR 15 A 33 34 ACL (10 A) 35 AUDIO SUB* (7.5 A) 36 IGPS 7.5 A 37 IGPS (LAF) 7.5 A 38 VB ACT 7.5 A 39 IG1 TCU (10 A) 40 IG1 FUEL PUMP 20 A 41 IG1 ABS/VSA 7.5 A 42 IG1 ACG 10 A 43 IG1 ST MOTOR 10 A 44 IG1 MONITOR 7.5 A 45 BACK UP2 (30 A)

Circuit Protected Amps

621Continued

622

uuFusesuFuse Locations

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

Located under the dashboard. Fuse locations are shown on the label on the side panel. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and label number.

Interior Main Fuse Box

Fuse Label

Main Fuse Box

uuFusesuFuse Locations H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

Circuit protected and fuse rating

Circuit Protected Amps 1 2 L SIDE DOOR UNLOCK 10 A 3 R SIDE DOOR UNLOCK 10 A 4 ACC 10 A 5 ACC KEY LOCK 7.5 A 6 SRS 10 A 7 8 IG HOLD2* (10 A) 9 SMART 10 A

10 11 L SIDE DOOR LOCK 10 A 12 DR DOOR LOCK (10 A) 13 R SIDE DOOR LOCK 10 A 14 OPTION 10 A 15 DRL 10 A 16 CTR ACC SOCKET (20 A) 17 MOON ROOF* (20 A) 18 19 20 SBW ECU* (10 A) 21 DR DOOR UNLOCK (10 A) 22 23 24 PREMIUM AMP* (20 A) 25

* Not available on all models

26 27 28 29 30 31 32 IG HOLD3* (15 A) 33 DR P/SEAT SLI* (20 A) 34 AS P/SEAT SLI* (20 A) 35 OPTION2 10 A 36 METER 10 A 37 OPTION1 10 A 38 DR P/SEAT REC* (20 A) 39 AS P/SEAT REC* (20 A) 40 DR P/LUMBAR* (10 A) 41 42 AVS* (20 A) 43 OPTION 10 A 44 ADS* (20 A) 45 46 SRS 10 A 47 48 HUD* (10 A) 49 DOOR LOCK 20 A 50 FR ACC SOCKET 20 A 51 RR R P/W 20 A 52 RR L P/W 20 A

Circuit Protected Amps

53 AS P/W 20 A 54 DR P/W 20 A 55

Circuit Protected Amps

623Continued

624

uuFusesuFuse Locations

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

Located under the dashboard. Fuse locations are shown on the label on the side panel. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and label number.

Interior Sub Fuse Box

Models with Auto Idle Stop

Fuse Label

Sub Fuse Box

Circuit protected and fuse rating

Circuit Protected Amps 1 VST ACC 1 7.5 A 2 BACKUP2 MAIN 15 A 3 EOP 7.5 A 4 BACKUP3 7.5 A 5 EBB 7.5 A 6 METER VST 7.5 A 7 VSA/ABS 7.5 A

uuFusesu Inspecting and Changing Fuses H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

1Inspecting and Changing Fuses

NOTICE Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating greatly increases the chances of damaging the electrical system.

Use the charts to locate the fuse in question and confirm the specified amperage on the fuse label.

2 Fuse Locations P. 620 Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified amperage.

There is a fuse puller on the back of the engine compartment fuse box cover.

Inspecting and Changing Fuses 1. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF. Turn

headlights and all accessories off. 2. Open the fuse box cover in the engine

compartment. 3. Check the large fuse in the engine

compartment. u If the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head

screwdriver to remove the screw and replace it with a new one.

4. Inspect the small fuses in the engine compartment and the vehicle interior. u If there is a blown fuse, remove it with

the fuse puller and replace it with a new one.

Combined Fuse

Blown Fuse

Fuse Puller

625

626

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

Emergency Towing

1Emergency Towing

NOTICE Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed to support the vehicles weight.

Make sure the parking brake is released. If you cannot release the parking brake, your vehicle must be transported by the flatbed equipment.

2 Parking Brake P. 508

NOTICE Improper towing such as towing behind a motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the transmission.

Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is very dangerous, since ropes or chains may shift from side to side or break.

Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.

Flatbed equipment The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck. This is the best way to transport your vehicle.

Wheel lift equipment The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to tow your vehicle.

If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door

H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

1If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door

After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the vehicle checked.

If you cannot unlock the fuel fill door, use the following procedure.

1. Open the trunk. 2. Pull the release handle toward you. u The release handle unlocks the fuel fill

door when it is pulled. 3. Open the fuel fill door.

2 How to Refuel P. 532

What to Do If Unable to Unlock the Fuel Fill Door

Release Handle

627

628

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

If You Cannot Open the Trunk

1If You Cannot Open the Trunk

Following up: After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the vehicle checked.

If you cannot open the trunk, use the following procedure.

1. Remove the driver side rear outer head restraint.

2 Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints P. 221

2. Remove the built-in key from the keyless remote.

3. Wrap a cloth around the tip of the built-in key. Put it into the cover (as shown in the image) and remove the cover.

4. Insert the key into the cylinder and turn it clockwise. u The trunk unlocks and opens.

What to Do If Unable to Open the Trunk

Cover

Models with adjustable headrest

All models

Key

Models with the cylinder in the cover

uu If You Cannot Open the Trunku H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

4. Pull the trunk release handle up in the direction of the arrow in the image. u The trunk unlocks and opens.

Trunk Release Handle

Models without the cylinder in the cover

629

630

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

Refueling

1Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container

NOTICE Do not insert the nozzle of a portable fuel container or any funnel other than the one provided with your vehicle. Doing so can damage the fuel system. Do not try to pry open or push open the sealed fuel tank with foreign objects. This can damage the fuel system and its seal.

Make sure the fuel in the portable fuel container is gasoline before you refuel.

3WARNING Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks, and flames away.

Handle fuel only outdoors. Wipe up spills immediately.

Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container If you have run out of fuel and need to refuel your vehicle from a portable fuel container, use the funnel provided with your vehicle.

1. Turn off the engine. 2. Press on the edge of the fuel fill door until

you hear a click when the drivers door is unlocked. u The fuel fill door opens.

3. Take the funnel out of the tool case in the trunk.

2 Types of Tools P. 596

4. Place the end of the funnel on the lower part of filler opening, then insert it slowly and fully. u Make sure that the end of the funnel

goes down along with the filler pipe. 5. Fill the tank with fuel from the portable fuel

container. u Pour fuel carefully so you do not spill any.

6. Remove the funnel from the filler neck. u Wipe up any fuel from the funnel before

storing it. 7. Shut the fuel fill door by hand.

Funnel

Information

This chapter includes your vehicle's specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other

information required by regulation.

Specifications .................................... 632 Identification Numbers

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number ......................................... 636

Devices that Emit Radio Waves ....... 637 Reporting Safety Defects ................. 638

Emissions Testing Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 639

Warranty Coverages ........................ 641 Authorized Manuals......................... 644 Customer Service Information......... 645

631

632

In fo

rm atio

n

Specifications

Vehicle Specifications

Air Conditioning

Model ACCORD No. of Passengers: Front 2 Rear 3 Total 5 Weights: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

See the certification label on the drivers doorjamb

Gross Axle Weight Rating (Front)

See the certification label on the drivers doorjamb

Gross Axle Weight Rating (Rear)

See the certification label on the drivers doorjamb

Refrigerant Type HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) Charge Quantity 13.9 15.7 oz (395 445 g) Lubricant Type ND-OIL 14 Quantity 5.6 6.5 cu-in (92 107 cm3)

1.5 L engine models

* Not available on all models

Engine Specifications

Fuel

Washer Fluid

Displacement 91 cu-in (1,498 cm3) Spark Plugs NGK DILKAR8P8SY

Type Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number of 87 or higher

Fuel Tank Capacity 14.8 US gal (56 L)

Tank Capacity U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 L) Canada: 4.8 US qt (4.5 L)

Light Bulbs

*1: Models with halogen high beam headlights *2: Models with LED high beam headlights

Headlights (Low Beam) LED

Headlights (High Beam) 60W (HB3)*1

LED*2

Fog Lights* LED Parking/Daytime Running Lights LED Front Turn Signal Lights LED Front Side Marker Lights LED Side Turn Signal Lights (on Door Mirrors)* LED

Brake Lights LED Rear Turn Signal Lights 21W (Amber) Rear Side Marker Lights LED Taillights LED Back-Up Lights 16W High-Mount Brake Light LED Rear License Plate Light LED Interior Lights

Map Lights 8W Ceiling Light 8W Ambient Lights LED Vanity Mirror Lights 1.4W Center Pocket Light LED Door Courtesy Lights* 2CP (3.8W) Door Inner Handle Lights* LED Trunk Light 5W

uuSpecificationsu In

fo rm

atio n

Brake Fluid

Continuously Variable Transmission Fluid

Specified Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

Specified Honda HCF-2 Capacity Change 3.9 US qt (3.7 L)

Engine Oil

Engine Coolant

Recommended Honda Genuine Motor Oil 0W-20 API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil

Capacity

Change 3.4 US qt (3.2 L) Change including filter

3.7 US qt (3.5 L)

Specified Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2 Ratio 50/50 with distilled water

Capacity 1.59 US gal (6.03 L) (change including the remaining 0.17 US gal (0.66 L) in the reserve tank)

Tire

*1: Models with 17 inch wheel *2: Models with 19 inch wheel

Regular

Size 225/50R17 94V*1

235/40R19 96V*2

Pressure psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])

Front 32 (220 [2.2])*1

33 (225 [2.25])*2

Rear 32 (220 [2.2])*1

33 (225 [2.25])*2

Compact Spare

Size T135/90D16 102M*1

T135/80D17 103M*2

Pressure psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])

60 (420 [4.2])

Wheel Size Regular

17 x 7 1/2J*1

19 x 8 1/2J*2

Compact Spare 16 x 4T*1

17 x 4T*2

633Continued

634

uuSpecificationsu

In fo

rm atio

n

Vehicle Specifications

Air Conditioning

Model ACCORD No. of Passengers: Front 2 Rear 3 Total 5 Weights: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

See the certification label on the drivers doorjamb

Gross Axle Weight Rating (Front)

See the certification label on the drivers doorjamb

Gross Axle Weight Rating (Rear)

See the certification label on the drivers doorjamb

Refrigerant Type HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) Charge Quantity 13.9 15.7 oz (395 445 g) Lubricant Type ND-OIL 14 Quantity 5.6 6.5 cu-in (92 107 cm3)

2.0 L engine models

* Not available on all models

Engine Specifications

Fuel

Washer Fluid

Displacement 122 cu-in (1,996 cm3) Spark Plugs NGK DILKAR8P8SY

Type Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number of 87 or higher

Fuel Tank Capacity 14.8 US gal (56 L)

Tank Capacity U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 L) Canada: 4.8 US qt (4.5 L)

Light Bulbs Headlights (Low Beam) LED Headlights (High Beam) LED Fog Lights LED Parking/Daytime Running Lights LED Front Turn Signal Lights LED Front Side Marker Lights LED Side Turn Signal Lights (on Door Mirrors)* LED

Brake Lights LED Rear Turn Signal Lights 21W (Amber) Rear Side Marker Lights LED Taillights LED Back-Up Lights 16W High-Mount Brake Light LED Rear License Plate Light LED Interior Lights

Map Lights 8W Ceiling Light 8W Ambient Lights LED Vanity Mirror Lights 1.4W Center Pocket Light LED Door Courtesy Lights* 2CP (3.8W) Door Inner Handle Lights* LED Trunk Light 5W

uuSpecificationsu In

fo rm

atio n

Brake Fluid

Automatic Transmission Fluid

Specified Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

Specified Honda Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF-type 2.0

Capacity Change 4.5 US qt (4.3 L)

Engine Oil

Engine Coolant

Recommended Honda Genuine Motor Oil 0W-20 API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil

Capacity

Change 4.6 US qt (4.4 L) Change including filter

5.0 US qt (4.8 L)

Specified Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2 Ratio 50/50 with distilled water

Capacity 1.34 US gal (5.06 L) (change including the remaining 0.17 US gal (0.66 L) in the reserve tank)

Tire

Regular Size 235/40R19 96V Pressure psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])

Front 33 (225 [2.25]) Rear 33 (225 [2.25])

Compact Spare

Size T135/80D17 103M Pressure psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])

60 (420 [4.2])

Wheel Size Regular 19 x 8 1/2J Compact Spare 17 x 4T

635

636

In fo

rm atio

n

Identification Numbers

1Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number

The interior vehicle identification number (VIN) is located under the cover.

Cover

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle. The locations of your vehicles VIN, engine number, and transmission number are shown as follows.

Vehicle Identification Number

Engine Number

Certification Label/ Vehicle Identification Number

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Number

2.0 L engine models

1.5 L engine models

Engine Number

Automatic Transmission Number

Vehicle Identification Number

Devices that Emit Radio Waves

In

fo rm

atio n

Each radio frequency device installed in the vehicle conforms to the requirements and standards of the regulation listed below:

As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

637

638

In fo

rm atio

n

Reporting Safety Defects

In the U.S. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- 9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http:// www.safercar.gov.

In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.

If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.

To contact Transport Canadas Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety.

Emissions Testing

In

fo rm

atio n

1Testing of Readiness Codes

The readiness codes are erased when the battery is disconnected, and set again only after several days of driving under a variety of conditions.

If a testing facility determines that the readiness codes are not set, you may be requested to return at a later date to complete the test.

If the testing facility determines the readiness codes are still not set, see a dealer.

Testing of Readiness Codes Your vehicle has readiness code as part of the onboard self diagnostic system. Some states use these codes for testing to verify whether your vehicles emissions components are working properly. The codes may not be read properly if testing is performed just after the battery has gone dead or been disconnected.

To check if they are set, set the power mode to ON, without starting the engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are not set.

If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready, prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:

1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full. 2. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 6 hours or more. 3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40F and 95F (4C and 35C). 4. Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20

seconds. 5. Keep the vehicle in (P . Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there

for about 3 minutes. 6. Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds.

639Continued

640

uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes

In fo

rm atio

n

7. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in (D . Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).

8. Drive in city or suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal.

9. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes.

Warranty Coverages

In

fo rm

atio n

U.S. Owners Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:

New Vehicle Limited Warranty covers your new vehicle, except for the emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and workmanship.

Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance Warranty these two warranties cover your vehicles emissions control systems. Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for exact information.

Seat Belt Limited Warranty a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty all exterior body panels are covered against rusting from the inside out for the specified time period, regardless of mileage.

Accessory Limited Warranty Honda accessories are covered under this warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.

Replacement Parts Limited Warranty covers all Honda replacement parts against defects in materials and workmanship.

641Continued

642

uuWarranty Coveragesu

In fo

rm atio

n

Replacement Battery Limited Warranty provides prorated coverage for a replacement battery purchased from your dealer.

Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty provides coverage for as long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.

Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the Honda warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on warranty coverages. Your vehicles original tires are covered by their manufacturer. Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.

Statement on Warranty Coverage for Aftermarket and Recycled Parts The Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. s.2301 et seq., makes it illegal for motor vehicle manufacturers to void a motor vehicle warranty or deny warranty coverage solely because an aftermarket or recycled part has been used to repair the vehicle or someone other than the authorized service provider performed service on the vehicle. This provision does not apply to a new motor vehicle purchased solely for commercial or industrial use.

Under federal law, a manufacturer may deny warranty coverage and charge for repairs to a vehicle if it is discovered that an aftermarket or recycled part installed on the vehicle is defective or was installed incorrectly and caused damage to another part of the vehicle otherwise covered under warranty. The Federal Trade Commission requires that a manufacturer demonstrate that an aftermarket or recycled part or service performed by a person other than an authorized service provider caused damage to another part of the vehicle otherwise covered under warranty before denying warranty coverage. Additionally, federal law allows a manufacturer to void a motor vehicle warranty or deny warranty coverage if the manufacturer provides the article or service to consumers free of charge under the warranty or the manufacturer has secured a waiver from the Federal Trade Commission.

uuWarranty Coveragesu In

fo rm

atio n

Canadian Owners Please refer to the warranty manual that came with your vehicle.

EPA Contact Information An owner may obtain further information concerning emission warranties or report violations of the terms of the emission warranties by contacting:

Director, Light-Duty Vehicle Center, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Attention: Warranty Claim 2000 Traverwood Drive, Ann Arbor, MI 48105; complianceinfo@epa.gov

643

644

In fo

rm atio

n

Authorized Manuals

Service Express For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options.

For U.S. Owners Manuals can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual by phone at 1(800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at www.helminc.com.

For Canadian Owners Please contact a dealer to order any manuals that you may require.

Customer Service Information

In

fo rm

atio n

1Customer Service Information

When you call or write, please give us the following information: Vehicle Identification Number

2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number P. 636

Date of purchase Odometer reading of your vehicle Your name, address, and telephone number A detailed description of the problem Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you

Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals who should be able to deal with any problems you may encounter with your vehicle. If, however, you are faced with a problem that they cannot resolve to your satisfaction, contact Honda Customer Services.

U.S. Owners American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Honda Automobile Customer Service Mail Stop CHI-5 1919 Torrance Blvd. Torrance, CA 90501-2746 Tel: 1 (800) 999-1009

Canadian Owners Honda Canada Inc. Customer Relations 180 Honda Boulevard Markham, ON L6C 0H9 Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9 Fax: 1-877-939-0909 E-mail: Honda_cr@ch.honda.com

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin Islands Bella International P.O. Box 190816 San Juan, PR 00919-0816 Tel: 1 (787) 620-7546

645

Index

646

In d

ex

Index

Numbers 7-Speed Manual Shift Mode .................... 431

Operation ................................................ 432

A ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)................... 516 Accessories and Modifications ................. 593 Accessory Power Sockets .......................... 231 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow........................... 103, 104, 470

Adaptive Damper System......................... 440 Additives

Coolant ................................................... 559 Engine Oil................................................ 551 Washer.................................................... 563

Additives, Engine Oil ................................ 551 Adjusting

Armrest ................................................... 222 Front Seats .............................................. 212 Head Restraints........................................ 219 Mirrors .................................................... 210 Rear Seats................................................ 216 Steering Wheel ........................................ 209

Agile Handling Assist................................ 443 Air Conditioning System (Climate Control System)........................ 240 Changing the Mode ................................ 240 Defrosting the Windshield and Windows ............................................... 241

Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 587

Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode ................... 240 Sensors ................................................... 243 Synchronized Mode................................. 242 Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 240

Air Pressure............................... 576, 633, 635 Airbags ........................................................ 46

Advanced Airbags ..................................... 52 After a Collision ........................................ 49 Airbag Care............................................... 63 Event Data Recorder.................................... 0 Front Airbags (SRS).................................... 49 Indicator.............................................. 60, 93 Knee Airbags............................................. 54 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator .................. 61 Sensors ..................................................... 46 Side Airbags .............................................. 57 Side Curtain Airbags.................................. 59

AM/FM Radio............................................ 278 Android Auto ........................................... 320 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 516

Indicator.................................................... 93 Apple CarPlay ........................................... 313 Armrest ..................................................... 222 AT&T Hotspot ........................................... 311 Audio Remote Controls ........................... 250 Audio System............................................ 246

Adjusting the Sound................................ 272 Audio/Information Screen........................ 254 Display Setup .......................................... 273 Error Messages........................................ 327 General Information ................................ 329

Home Screen .......................................... 259 How to Update Wirelessly ....................... 266 How to Update with a USB Device .......... 270 How to use Siri Eyes Free ........................ 312 iPod ........................................................ 293 Limitations for Manual Operation............ 274 MP3/WMA/AAC ..................................... 296 Reactivating ............................................ 249 Remote Controls ..................................... 250 Security Code ......................................... 249 Selecting an Audio Source ...................... 274 Status Area ............................................. 264 System Updates ...................................... 266 Theft Protection ...................................... 249 USB Flash Drives.............................. 296, 330 USB Ports ................................................ 247 Wallpaper Setup ..................................... 257

Audio/Information Screen ....................... 254 Authorized Manuals ................................ 644 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ................ 180

Customize .............................................. 368 Auto High-Beam ...................................... 199

Indicator ................................................... 94 Auto Idle Stop .......................................... 435 Auto Idle Stop OFF Button ...................... 436 Automatic Brake Hold ............................. 513

Indicator ........................................... 86, 513 Automatic Brake Hold System

Indicator ........................................... 86, 513 Automatic Intermittent Wipers .............. 203 Automatic Lighting.................................. 196

In d

ex

Automatic Transmission Creeping................................................. 419 Fluid ....................................................... 561 Kickdown ............................................... 419 Shift Operation ....................................... 421 Shifting................................................... 420

Average Fuel Economy ............................ 145 Average Speed ......................................... 147

B Battery ...................................................... 584

Charging System Indicator ................ 88, 613 Jump Starting ......................................... 606 Maintenance (Checking the Battery) ....... 584 Maintenance (Replacing)......................... 586

Belts (Seat).................................................. 38 Beverage Holders ..................................... 227 Blind spot information System................ 450 Bluetooth Audio..................................... 299 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink ................... 374 Booster Seats (For Children) ...................... 77 Brake System ............................................ 508

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 516 Automatic Brake Hold............................. 513 Brake Assist System................................. 517 Fluid ....................................................... 562 Foot Brake .............................................. 512 Indicator ............................. 83, 84, 615, 616 Parking Brake.......................................... 508

Brightness Control (Instrument Panel) ... 205

Bulb Replacement .................................... 564 Brake, Taillight, Rear Side Marker Lights and Rear Turn Signal Light............................ 567

Fog Lights................................................ 566 Front Side Marker Lights .......................... 566 Front Turn Signal Lights ........................... 566 Headlights ............................................... 564 High-Mount Brake Light .......................... 571 Parking/Daytime Running Lights .............. 566 Rear License Plate Lights .......................... 571 Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights .................................................... 566

Taillight, Brake Light and Back-Up Light ... 569 Bulb Specifications ........................... 632, 634

C Carbon Monoxide Gas................................ 78 Cargo Hooks ............................................. 229 Carrying Cargo.................................. 403, 405 Center Pocket ........................................... 225 Certification Label .................................... 636 Changing Bulbs......................................... 564 Charging System Indicator ................. 88, 613 Child Safety ................................................. 64

Childproof Door Locks ............................. 179 Emergency Trunk Opener ........................ 183

Child Seat .................................................... 64 Booster Seats............................................. 77 Child Seat for Infants ................................. 66 Child Seat for Small Children ..................... 67

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt ......................................................... 72

Larger Children ......................................... 76 Rear-facing Child Seat ............................... 66 Selecting a Child Seat................................ 68 Using a Tether........................................... 74

Childproof Door Locks ............................. 179 Cleaning the Exterior ............................... 590 Cleaning the Interior................................ 588 Climate Control System............................ 240

Changing the Mode ................................ 240 Defrosting the Windshield and Windows............................................... 241

Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 587 Recirculation and Fresh Air Mode ............ 240 Sensors ................................................... 243 Synchronized Mode................................. 242 Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 240

Clock.......................................................... 166 CMBSTM (Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM)................................................. 456

Coat Hook................................................. 229 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) ................................................. 456

Compact Spare Tire .................. 597, 633, 635 Console Compartment ............................. 226 Continuously Variable Transmission

Creeping ................................................. 419 Fluid........................................................ 561 Kickdown................................................ 419 Operating the Shift Lever........... 24, 428, 430

647

648

In d

ex

Shift Lever Does Not Move....................... 609 Shifting............................................ 427, 429

Controls ..................................................... 165 Coolant (Engine)....................................... 559

Adding to the Engine Coolant Reserve Tank ...................................................... 559

Adding to the Radiator ............................ 560 Overheating............................................. 611

Creeping (Automatic Transmission/ Continuously Variable Transmission)..... 419

Cross Traffic Monitor................................ 525 Cup Holders............................................... 227 Customer Service Information ................. 645 Customized Features ................................ 351

D Daytime Running Lights........................... 198 Dead Battery ............................................. 606 Defaulting All the Settings ...................... 370 Defrosting the Windshield and Windows.................................................. 241

Devices that Emit Radio Waves................ 637 Dimming

Headlights ............................................... 195 Rearview Mirror ....................................... 210

Dipstick (Engine Oil) ................................. 552 Directional Signals (Turn Signal).............. 194 Door Mirrors ............................................. 211

Doors ......................................................... 167 Auto Door Locking .................................. 180 Auto Door Unlocking .............................. 180 Door and Trunk Open Message ................. 37 Keys ........................................................ 167 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside ...................................... 177

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside ................................... 170

Lockout Prevention System...................... 176 DOT Tire Quality Grading ........................ 578 Driver Attention Monitor ........................ 154 Driver Information Interface ................... 140

Switching the Display .............................. 140 Warning and Information Messages ........ 109

Driving ...................................................... 401 Automatic Transmission/Continuously Variable Transmission.......................................... 419

Braking ................................................... 508 Shifting Position ...................... 420, 427, 429 Starting the Engine.................................. 412

Driving Position Memory System ............ 207 Driving Support Information ................... 157 Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 587

E Eco Assist System ...................................... 12 ECON Button ............................................ 434 Econ Mode

Indicator.................................................. 100

Elapsed Time ............................................ 147 Electric Power Steering (EPS) System

Indicator ........................................... 95, 617 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ............ 441 Emergency ................................................ 626 Emergency Engine Stop........................... 605 Emergency Trunk Opener ....................... 183 Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes) ...... 639 Engine....................................................... 636

Coolant .................................................. 559 Jump Starting ......................................... 606 Oil .......................................................... 551 Starting................................................... 412

Engine Coolant ........................................ 559 Adding to the Engine Coolant Reserve Tank ..................................................... 559

Adding to the Radiator ........................... 560 Overheating............................................ 611 Temperature Gauge................................ 139

Engine Oil ................................................. 551 Adding ................................................... 554 Checking ................................................ 552 Displaying Oil Life ................................... 542 Low Oil Pressure Warning ....................... 613 Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 551

ENGINE START/STOP Button.................... 191 EPS (Electric Power Steering) System ...... 617 Exhaust Gas Hazard (Carbon Monoxide) .................................. 78

Exterior Care (Cleaning) .......................... 590 Exterior Mirrors ........................................ 211

In d

ex

F Features .................................................... 245 Filters

Dust and Pollen....................................... 587 Oil .......................................................... 555

Flat Tire..................................................... 597 Floor Mats ................................................ 589 Fluids

Automatic Transmission .......................... 561 Brake ...................................................... 562 Continuously Variable Transmission ........ 561 Engine Coolant ....................................... 559 Windshield Washer ................................. 563

FM/AM Radio ........................................... 278 Fog Lights ................................................. 197

Indicator ................................................... 97 Folding Down the Rear Seat ................... 216 Foot Brake ................................................ 512 Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 49 Front Seat Heaters ................................... 237 Front Seat Heaters and Seat Ventilation.............................................. 238

Front Seats Adjusting ................................................ 212

Front Sensor Camera ............................... 504 Fuel ..................................................... 25, 531

Economy................................................. 534 Gauge .................................................... 139 Instant Fuel Economy .............................. 145 Low Fuel Indicator..................................... 93 Range ..................................................... 145

Recommendation .................................... 531 Refueling................................................. 531

Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions ............ 534 Fuel Fill Door....................................... 25, 532

Unable to Unlock..................................... 627 Fuses .......................................................... 620

Inspecting and Changing......................... 625 Locations................................. 620, 622, 624

G Gasoline (Fuel)

Economy ................................................. 534 Gauge ..................................................... 139 Information ............................................. 531 Instant Fuel Economy............................... 145 Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 93 Refueling................................................. 531

Gauges ...................................................... 139 Glass (care) ........................................ 588, 591 Glove Box .................................................. 225

H Halogen Bulbs........................................... 564 Handling the Unexpected ........................ 595 HandsFreeLink (HFL) ............................... 374

Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History ............................................ 384

Automatic Transferring............................ 383 Displaying Messages ................................ 394

Favorite Contacts .................................... 385 HFL Buttons............................................. 374 HFL Menus .............................................. 377 HFL Status Display ................................... 376 In Case of Emergency...................... 305, 398 Limitations for Manual Operation ............ 376 Making a Call.......................................... 387 Options During a Call .............................. 390 Phone Setup............................................ 379 Receiving a Call ....................................... 390 Receiving a Text Message ........................ 392 Ringtone ................................................. 383 Selecting a Phone.................................... 393 To Set Up a Text Message Options .......... 391

Hazard Warning Button .............................. 6 HD RadioTM ............................................... 281 Head Restraints ........................................ 219 Headlights................................................. 195

Aiming .................................................... 564 Auto High-Beam ..................................... 199 Automatic Operation............................... 196 Dimming......................................... 195, 198 Operating................................................ 195

Head-Up Display....................................... 159 Heated Steering Wheel............................ 236 Heated Windshield Button ...................... 204 Heaters (Seat) ........................... 237, 238, 239 HFL (HandsFreeLink)............................... 374 High Beam Indicator .................................. 97 Hill Start Assist System ............................. 417 HomeLink Universal Transceiver............ 371

649

650

In d

ex

Honda App License Agreement............... 331 Honda Sensing ................................ 26, 453 HondaLink ............................................. 301

I Identification Numbers

Engine and Transmission.......................... 636 Vehicle Identification ............................... 636

Illumination Control Dial.......................................................... 205

Immobilizer System .................................. 184 Indicator .................................................... 98

Indicators..................................................... 82 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (Amber) ...................................... 103

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (White/Green) ..................... 104, 471

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ..................... 93 Auto High-Beam........................................ 94 Auto Idle Stop (Green) ............................. 102 Auto Idle Stop System (Amber) ................ 102 Automatic Brake Hold........................ 86, 513 Automatic Brake Hold System............ 86, 513 Charging System ............................... 88, 613 Cruise Mode (White/Green) ..................... 104 ECON Mode .................................... 100, 434 Electric Power Steering (EPS) System............................................. 95, 617

Fog Light ................................................... 97 High Beam................................................. 97

Immobilizer System ................................... 98 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) (Amber)................................................. 104

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) (White/Green)........................................ 104

Lights On .................................................. 97 Low Fuel ................................................... 93 Low Tire Pressure/TPMS............. 96, 444, 448 M (sequential mode/7-speed manual shift mode) Indicator/Gear Selection Indicator.................................................. 88

Malfunction Indicator Lamp............... 87, 614 Parking Brake and Brake System (Amber)........................................... 84, 616

Parking Brake and Brake System (Red) ....................................... 83, 615, 616

Safety Support (Amber) ........................... 105 Safety Support (Green/Gray).................... 108 Seat Belt Reminder .............................. 39, 92 Security System Alarm ............................... 99 Shift Position ............................................. 88 SPORT Mode ................................... 101, 433 Supplemental Restraint System............ 60, 93 System Message........................................ 99 Transmission System............................ 89, 91 Turn Signal and Hazard Warning ............... 97 Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) OFF ................................................. 95, 442

Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) System ............................................ 94, 441

Information .............................................. 631

Instant Fuel Economy .............................. 145 Instrument Panel........................................ 81

Brightness Control .................................. 205 Interior Lights........................................... 223 Interior Rearview Mirror ......................... 210 iPhone....................................................... 330 iPod ................................................... 293, 330

J Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench) ........................ 600 Jump Starting ........................................... 606

K Key Number Tag ...................................... 168 Keyless Access System with Push Button Start System ..................................................... 170

Keyless Lockout Prevention..................... 176 Keys........................................................... 167

Lockout Prevention ................................. 176 Number Tag............................................ 168 Rear Door Wont Open ........................... 179 Remote Transmitter ................................ 174 Types and Functions................................ 167 Valet Key ................................................ 183

Kickdown (Automatic Transmission/ Continuously Variable Transmission) .... 419

Knee Airbags .............................................. 54

In d

ex

L Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) ........ 486 Language (HFL) ........................................ 376 LATCH (Child Seats) ................................... 69 Lights ................................................ 195, 564

Auto High-Beam ..................................... 199 Automatic............................................... 196 Bulb Replacement ................................... 564 Daytime Running Lights .......................... 198 Fog Lights ............................................... 197 High Beam Indicator ................................. 97 Interior.................................................... 223 Light Switches......................................... 195 Lights On Indicator.................................... 97 Turn Signals ............................................ 194

Load Limits ............................................... 405 Locking/Unlocking ................................... 167

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ................. 180 Childproof Door Locks ............................ 179 From Inside ............................................. 177 From Outside .......................................... 170 Keys........................................................ 167 Using a Key............................................. 175

Lockout Prevention System ..................... 176 Low Battery Charge ................................. 613 Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 93 Low Keyless Remote Signal Strength ..... 169 Low Oil Pressure Warning ....................... 613 Low Speed Braking Control .................... 465 Lower Anchors ........................................... 69 Lubricant Specifications Chart ........ 632, 634

Luggage (Maximum Load Limit) ............. 405 Lumbar Support Adjustment Switch ....... 213

M Maintenance ..................................... 149, 537

Battery .................................................... 584 Brake Fluid .............................................. 562 Cleaning.................................................. 588 Climate Control System ........................... 587 Coolant ................................................... 559 Maintenance MinderTM ............................ 541 Oil ........................................................... 552 Precautions.............................................. 538 Radiator .................................................. 560 Remote Transmitter ................................. 586 Replacing Light Bulbs............................... 564 Safety ...................................................... 539 Service Items ........................................... 545 Tires ........................................................ 575 Transmission Fluid ................................... 561 Under the Hood ...................................... 548

Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............. 87, 614 Map Lights ................................................ 224 Maximum Load Limit ............................... 405 Meters, Gauges ......................................... 139 Mirrors....................................................... 210

Adjusting................................................. 210 Door........................................................ 211 Exterior.................................................... 211 Interior Rearview ..................................... 210

Modifications (and Accessories) .............. 593 Moonroof ................................................. 190 MP3 ........................................................... 296 MP3/WMA/AAC ........................................ 296 Multi-View Rear Camera.......................... 529

N Navigation ........................................ 148, 163 Numbers (Identification).......................... 636

O Odometer ................................................. 142 Oil (Engine)............................................... 551

Adding.................................................... 554 Checking................................................. 552 Displaying Oil Life.................................... 542 Low Oil Pressure Warning........................ 613 Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 551 Viscosity .................................................. 551

Open Source Licenses............................... 345 Opening

Trunk ...................................................... 628 Opening/Closing

Hood....................................................... 550 Moonroof ............................................... 190 Power Windows...................................... 187 Trunk ...................................................... 181

Outside Temperature............................... 143 Overheating.............................................. 611

651

652

In d

ex

P Paddle Shifters .................................. 425, 431 Panic Mode ............................................... 186 Parking ...................................................... 518 Parking Brake............................................ 508 Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Amber) ............................................. 84, 616

Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Red) .......................................... 83, 615, 616

Parking Sensor System.............................. 520 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ................. 61 Passing Indicators ..................................... 195 Phone ........................................................ 150 Playing Bluetooth Audio ........................ 299 Power Windows........................................ 187 Precautions While Driving........................ 418

Rain......................................................... 418 Pregnant Women ....................................... 44 Puncture (Tire) .......................................... 597

R Radiator..................................................... 560 Radio (AM/FM).......................................... 278 Radio (SiriusXM)...................................... 282 Radio Data System (RDS).......................... 280 Range ........................................................ 145 RDS (Radio Data System).......................... 280 Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing) ....... 639 Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button...................................................... 204

Rear Seat (Folding Down)........................ 216 Rear Seat Heaters ..................................... 239 Rear Seat Reminder.................................. 217 Rearview Mirror ....................................... 210 Refueling .................................................. 531

Fuel Gauge.............................................. 139 Gasoline.................................. 531, 632, 634 Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 93

Regulations............................... 448, 578, 637 Remote Engine Start ................................ 414 Remote Transmitter ................................. 174 Replacement

Battery .................................................... 586 Bulbs....................................................... 564 Fuses............................... 620, 622, 624, 625 Tires ........................................................ 581 Wiper Blade Rubber ................................ 572

Reporting Safety Defects ......................... 638 Resetting a Trip Meter ..................... 143, 145 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) ......... 494

On and Off.............................................. 496

S Safe Driving ................................................ 33 Safety Check ............................................... 37 Safety Labels............................................... 79 Safety Message ............................................. 3 Safety Support .......................................... 158

Seat Belts .................................................... 38 Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor ................. 43 Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ................. 41 Checking .................................................. 45 Fastening .................................................. 42 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt ......................................................... 72

Pregnant Women...................................... 44 Reminder .................................................. 39 Warning Indicator ............................... 39, 92

Seat Heaters ............................. 237, 238, 239 Seat Ventilation ....................................... 238 Seats.......................................................... 212

Adjusting ................................................ 212 Front Seats.............................................. 212 Rear Seats............................................... 216 Seat Heaters ........................... 237, 238, 239 Seat Ventilation ...................................... 238

Security System ........................................ 184 Immobilizer System Indicator..................... 98 Security System Alarm Indicator ................ 99

Selecting a Child Seat ................................ 68 Sequential Mode...................................... 425

Operation ............................................... 426 Shift Buttons ...................................... 21, 420

Operation ............................................... 421 Shift Lever .................................. 24, 427, 429

Operation ................................. 24, 428, 430 Releasing ................................................ 609 Wont Move ........................................... 609

Shift Position Indicator .............................. 88

In d

ex

Shifting (Transmission) ............ 420, 427, 429 Shoulder Anchor ........................................ 43 Side Airbags ............................................... 57 Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 59 Siri Eyes Free............................................. 312 SiriusXM Radio ....................................... 282 Snow Tires ................................................ 583 Spare Tire ................................. 597, 633, 635 Spark Plugs ....................................... 632, 634 Specifications ........................................... 632 Specified Fuel ........................... 531, 632, 634 Speedometer ............................................ 139 SPORT Mode............................................. 433

Indicator ................................................. 101 SRS Airbags (Airbags) ................................ 49 Starting Assist Brake Function ................ 439 Starting the Engine.................................. 412

Does Not Start ........................................ 603 Jump Starting ......................................... 606

Steering Wheel Adjusting ................................................ 209

Stopping ................................................... 518 Summer Tires............................................ 583 Sunglasses Holder .................................... 230 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ....... 49 Switches (Around the Steering Wheel) ........ 6, 7, 191

System Message Indicator ......................... 99 System Updates ........................................ 266

T Tachometer ....................................... 151, 162 Temperature

Gauge ..................................................... 139 Outside Temperature ............................... 143

Temperature Sensor ......................... 143, 243 Time (Adjusting) ....................................... 166 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ..................................................... 444 Indicator ............................................ 96, 618

Tires ........................................................... 575 Air Pressure ............................. 576, 633, 635 Checking and Maintaining....................... 575 Inspection................................................ 575 Labeling .................................................. 576 Puncture (Flat Tire)................................... 597 Regulations ............................................. 578 Rotation .................................................. 582 Spare Tire ................................ 597, 633, 635 Summer .................................................. 583 Tire Chains .............................................. 583 Wear Indicators ....................................... 580 Winter ..................................................... 583

Tools .......................................................... 596 Towing a Trailer ....................................... 407

Equipment and Accessories ..................... 409 Load Limits .............................................. 407

Towing Your Vehicle ................................ 411 Emergency .............................................. 626

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) ........ 444 Indicator............................................ 96, 618

Traffic Sign Recognition System.............. 498 Transmission ..................... 419, 420, 427, 429

Automatic ............................................... 420 Continuously Variable ..................... 427, 429 Fluid........................................................ 561 Number................................................... 636 Shift Position Indicator............................... 88

Transmission System Indicator.............................................. 89, 91

TRIP Button............................................... 142 Trip Computer .................................. 144, 146 Trip Meter................................. 143, 145, 147 Troubleshooting....................................... 595

Blown Fuse.............................. 620, 622, 624 Brake Pedal Vibrates.................................. 30 Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door.......... 31 Emergency Towing.................................. 626 Engine Wont Start.................................. 603 Noise When Braking.................................. 32 Overheating ............................................ 611 Puncture/Flat Tire .................................... 597 Rear Door Wont Open...................... 31, 179 Shift Lever Wont Move........................... 609 Warning Indicators .................................... 82

Trunk......................................................... 181 Lid........................................................... 181 Light Bulb........................................ 632, 634 Main Switch ............................................ 183

653

654

In d

ex

Unable to Open....................................... 628 Turbo Engine Vehicle ............................... 535 Turn Signals............................................... 194

Indicators (Instrument Panel)...................... 97 Turn-by-Turn Directions ................... 148, 163

U Unlocking the Doors................................. 170 Unlocking the Front Doors from the Inside........................................ 178

USB Flash Drives................................ 296, 330 USB Ports ................................................... 247 Using the Keyless Access System with Push Button Start System ................................ 170

V Vanity Mirrors ............................................... 9 Vehicle Identification Number................. 636 Vehicle Speed............................................ 162 Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA)............... 441

Off Button ............................................... 442 Off Indicator .............................................. 95 System Indicator ........................................ 94

Ventilation ........................................ 238, 240 Viscosity (Oil)............................. 551, 633, 635 Voice Control Operation .......................... 275

Voice Portal Screen .................................. 276 Voice Recognition.................................... 275

VSA (Vehicle Stability AssistTM)............... 441

W Wallpaper ................................................. 257 Warning and Information Messages....... 109 Warning Indicator On/Blinking ............... 613 Warning Labels........................................... 79 Warnings................................................... 149 Warranties (Warranty Manual provided separately) .............................................. 641

Watts ................................................. 632, 634 Wear Indicators (Tire) .............................. 580 Wheel Nut Wrench (Jack Handle) ... 596, 600 Wi-Fi Connection ...................................... 310 Window Washers ..................................... 202

Adding/Refilling Fluid .............................. 563 Switch..................................................... 202

Windows (Opening and Closing) ............ 187 Windshield

Cleaning ......................................... 588, 591 Defrosting/Defogging.............................. 241 Washer Fluid ........................................... 563 Wiper Blades ........................................... 572 Wipers and Washers................................ 202

Winter Tires Snow Tires .............................................. 583 Tire Chains .............................................. 583

Wipers and Washers................................. 202 Automatic Intermittent Wipers ................ 203 Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades ..... 572

Wireless Charger ...................................... 232 WMA ......................................................... 296 Worn Tires ................................................ 575

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Accord Sedan Honda works, you can view and download the Honda Accord Sedan 2022 Owner'sManual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Honda Accord Sedan as well as other Honda manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Honda Accord Sedan. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Honda Accord Sedan 2022 Owner'sManual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Honda Accord Sedan 2022 Owner'sManual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Honda Accord Sedan 2022 Owner'sManual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Honda Accord Sedan 2022 Owner'sManual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Honda Accord Sedan 2022 Owner'sManual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.